Contents

Seat Ateca 2019 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 408
1 of 408

Summary of Content for Seat Ateca 2019 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

Owners manual SEAT Ateca

57 50 12 72 0B K

In gl

s 5

75 01

27 20

BK (

07 .19

)

SE A

T A

te ca

I ng

l s

(0 7.

19 )

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.19

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man- ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving.

Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING Read and always observe safety infor- mation concerning the passenger's front airbag page 30, Fitting and us- ing child seats.

About this manual This manual describes the features of the ve- hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of the features described below will be intro- duced in the future or will only be available in certain markets.

Some of the features described here are not included in all the types or variations of the model and they can be varied or modified based on technical or marketing requirements without it being considered misleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, backwards) in this manual refer to the travel direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant to help the users better understand some fea- tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the instruction manual. Access the instruction manual to see the complete information and warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk are included by default only in certain versions of the model, supplied as op- tional only for certain versions or only of- fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with . The ab- sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. It indicates that the section continues on the next page.

You can access the information in this manual using:

Thematic table of contents that follows the manuals general chapter structure. Visual table of contents that uses graphics to indicate the pages containing essential information, which is detailed in the corre- sponding chapters. Alphabetical index with many terms and synonyms to help you find information.

WARNING Texts after this symbol contain informa- tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.

CAUTION Texts after this symbol indicate possible damage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts after this symbol contain informa- tion about the protection of the environ- ment.

Note Texts after this symbol contain addition- al information.

Printed and digital instruction man- ual The printed instruction manual contains rele- vant information about the use of the vehicle and the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals contains more in-depth information. It is available on SEAT's official website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

Fig. 1 SEAT website

scan the QR code Fig. 1 OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicle.

Related videos The operation of some of the vehicle's fea- tures can be shown as an instruction video:

Fig. 2 SEAT website

scan the QR code Fig. 2 OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then Multimedia.

Note Video instructions are only available in certain languages.

Frequently Asked Ques- tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? page 132

How do you adjust the steering wheel? page 14

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? page 129

How do you turn on the exterior lights? page 117

How does the automatic gearbox selector lever work? page 253

How do you refuel? page 336

How do you activate the windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system? page 126

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does this mean? page 86

How do you open the bonnet? page 344

How do you perform a jump start? page 47

Where is the vehicle tool kit located? page 38

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture kit? page 40

How do you change a wheel? page 41

How do you change a fuse? page 54

How do you change a light? page 58

How do you tow a vehicle? page 49

Useful tips

How do you set the time? page 80

When should the vehicle inspection should be performed? page 83

What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on the steering wheel perform? page 92

How do you remove the luggage compartment cover? page 138

How do you drive in an economical and environ- mentally-friendly way? page 266

How do you check and top up the engine oil? page 346

How do you check and top up the engine cool- ant? page 350

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid? page 352

How do you check and top up the brake fluid? page 351

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val- ues? page 360

Vehicle washing tips page 370

Functions of interest

Easy Connect, Car menu page 89

How does the START-STOP system work? page 249

What parking assistants are available? page 305

How does the rear assist work? page 323

How does the adaptive cruise control work? page 277

How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted? page 262

How does the lane departure warning system work? page 285

How does tyre pressure monitoring work? page 364

How do you open the vehicle without a key (Key- less Access)? page 100

Interior lighting and ambient light page 125

Table of Contents

Table of Contents General views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Correct sitting position of vehicle occu- pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 15 How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 18 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 46 Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Easy Connect system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 136 Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 auxiliary heating (additional heating)* . . . . . 158

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 SEAT Media Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Navigation in Offroad mode* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Vehicle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

5

Table of Contents

SEAT Driving modes (SEAT Drive Pro- file)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Stabilisation and brake assistance sys- tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 305 Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* . . . . . . 305 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring (ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Peripheral view system (Top View Cam- era)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . 323 Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Electrically unlocking trailer hook* . . . . . . . . . 332 Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Engine management and emissions control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 367 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Accessories and modifications to the ve- hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 375

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 378 Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Information about the EU Directive 2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Indications about the technical data . . . . 383 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Rear lid Opening from outside page 109 Emergency opening page 112 Fuel tank Fuel capacity page 383 Open/Close cap page 336 Opening and closing Doors page 106 Central locking page 97 Manual release page 107

1

2

3

Bonnet Unlocking lever page 344 Open/close page 344 Levels control Oil page 346 Brake fluid page 351 Battery page 353 Towing the vehicle Towline anchorage page 52 Tow start page 50

4

5

6

Action in the event of a puncture Anti-puncture kit page 38 Wheel change page 41

7

7

General views of the vehicle

Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows page 112 Central locking page 97 Exterior mirror adjustment page 129 Open bonnet lever page 344 Headlight switch page 118 Turn signal and main beam lever page 120 Cruise control page 268 Warning lamps page 86

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Wipers and rear window wiper page 126 Driver information system page 84 Easy Connect page 89 Front passenger airbag disconnection display page 25 Fuses page 54 Steering wheel adjustment page 14 Ignition lock page 244 Starter button page 245

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Air conditioning page 150 Hazard warning lights page 123

15

16

8

General views of the vehicle

Overview (right hand drive)

Open bonnet lever page 344 Easy Connect page 89 Front passenger airbag disconnection display page 25 Turn signal and main beam lever page 120 Cruise control page 268 Warning lamps page 86 Wipers and rear window wiper page 126

1

2

3

4

5

6

Driver information system page 84 Headlight switch page 118 Central locking page 97 Exterior mirror adjustment page 129 Electric windows page 112 Fuses page 54 Hazard warning lights page 123 Air conditioning page 150 Starter button page 245 Steering wheel adjustment page 14

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Ignition lock page 24416

9

General views of the vehicle

Interior view

Armrest page 142 Isofix anchors page 32 Headrest adjustment page 133 Seat belts page 15 Panoramic roof page 114 Interior mirror page 129

1

2

3

4

5

6

Disconnecting the front passenger front airbag page 25 Electronic parking brake page 298 Seat adjustment page 132

7

8

9

10

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING This manual contains important informa- tion about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documenta- tion also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers. Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- pecially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Before driving

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.

Make sure all luggage is secured page 136.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors properly according to your size.

Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the headrests in the in-use po- sition page 133.

Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests according to their height.

Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts page 28.

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position page 12.

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly page 15.

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.

Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone calls.

Never drive when your driving ability is im- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics may result in severe accidents and even loss of life. Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics may significantly alter perception, affect reaction times and safety while driving, which could result in the loss of control of the vehicle.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- dent, the safety equipment may reduce the

11

Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part of the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

three-point seat belts, belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats, belt tensioners for the front and rear side seats, front airbags, knee airbags, side airbags in the front seat backrests, head-protection airbags, ISOFIX anchor points for ISOFIX rear child seat system height-adjustable front headrests, rear headrests with in-use position and non-use position, adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your pas- sengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 3 The correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10 inches).

Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct sitting position, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices. The seat belt and airbag can only provide optimum protection if a cor- rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom- mends taking your car in for technical serv- ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the following positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants: Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the headrest Fig. 4. Short people must lower the headrest com- pletely, even if your head is below its upper edge. Tall people must raise the headrest com- pletely. Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

1) Depending on the version/market. 12

Safe driving

Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly page 18.

The following also applies to the driver: Move the seat backrest to an almost up- right position so that your back rests com- pletely against it. Move the steering wheel so it is at least 25 cm (10 inches) away from the ster- num Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands on both sides, on the outer part, with your arms slightly bent. The steering wheel must always point to- wards the chest and never towards the face. Move the seat in such a way that you can step on the pedals with your knees slightly bent and with a distance between the knees and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in- ches) Fig. 3. Adjust the height of the seat so that you can reach the top of the steering wheel. Always keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

For the passenger, the following applies: Move the seat backrest to an almost up- right position so that your back rests com- pletely against it. Move the seat as far back as possible (mini- mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-

board check translation). If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rear seats.

WARNING Sitting in an incorrect position may in- crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in the event of sudden braking or manoeu- vring, in case of collision or accident and if the airbags deploy. Before starting the car, all passengers must be sitting in a correct position and stay like that for the entire journey. This al- so applies to a correct use of the seat belt. The maximum amount of people in the vehicle is the same as the amount of seats with seat belts. For children, always use a certified pro- tection system, certified and suited for their weight and height page 28. While driving, always keep your feet in the footwell. Never place them over the seat or the dashboard, for example, or out-

side the window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt may offer insufficient protection and also increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi- tion

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases. Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the pro- tective function of seat belts and, therefore, increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju- ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe- cially heightened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver is re- sponsible for all people, particularly children, inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of incor- rect sitting positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion: Never stand in the vehicle. Never stand on the seats. Never kneel on the seats. Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the rear.

13

Safety

Never lean against the dash panel. Never lie on the rear seats. Never sit on the front edge of a seat. Never sit sideways. Never lean out of a window. Never put your feet out of a window. Never put your feet on the dash panel. Never place your feet on the bench or on the backrest of the seat. Never travel in a footwell. Never sit on the armrests. Never travel without wearing the seat belt. Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Sitting in an incorrect position increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres. All occupants must sit correctly during the journey and wear the seat belt correct- ly. Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit- ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or are not at a proper distance of the airbag risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries, especially if the airbags deploy and strike them.

Steering wheel position adjust- ment

Fig. 5 Lever in the lower left side of the steering column.

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is stationary.

Pull the Fig. 5 1 lever down, move the steering wheel to the desired position and lift the lever back up until it locks.

WARNING Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust- ment function and an incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury. After adjusting the steering column, push the lever Fig. 5 1 firmly upwards to en- sure the steering wheel does not acciden- tally change position while driving.

Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, stop safely and make the proper adjustment. The adjusted steering wheel should be facing your chest and not your face so as not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro- tection in the event of an accident. When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce injuries when the driver's front airbag deploys. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and head.

Pedal area

Pedals

Ensure that you can always press the ac- celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim- paired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unim- paired to their initial positions.

14

Seat belts

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.

WARNING Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving. Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could ob- struct the pedals. Risk of accident. Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores of seat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp lights up to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off. Protect children by using a child seat ac- cording to the child's height and weight page 28.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened while driving, a warning sound will be heard for a few seconds. The warning light will also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened with the ignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Fig. 6 Instrument panel: left rear seat occu- pied and corresponding seat belt fastened dis- play.

Depending on the model version, when the ignition is switched on, the seat belt status display Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in- forms the driver whether the passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

It indicates that the corresponding seat is empty. Indicates that the seat is occupied and the occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehi- cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt

15

Safety

status is displayed for approximately 30 sec- onds. The indication can be hidden by press- ing the button on the dash panel.

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the proper position. They also help prevent uncontrolled movements that may result in serious injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-

tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- gy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival when in- volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- tion provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air- bags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on collision. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- sions, overturns or accidents in which the air- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.

Important safety instructions for the use of seat belts

Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.

Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.

WARNING If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly. Never allow two passengers (even chil- dren) to share the same seat belt. Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries. Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position. Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- ducing their capacity to protect. The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from en- gaging securely. Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing. Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of

16

Seat belts

the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and have been stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- newal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked. Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- moved or modified in any way. The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics

Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the case of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en- ergy called kinetic energy starts acting on both the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher they are, the more energy there is to be ab- sorbed in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle in our example do not have their seat belts fas- tened, in the event of a collision the entire

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- screen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 8.

It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could other- wise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- danger not only themselves but also the front occupants Fig. 9.

17

Safety

How to properly adjust your seat belt

Fastening and unfastening the seat belt

Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle.

Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- cupants in the position that most protects them in the event of an accident or sudden braking .

Fastening the seat belt Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly page 12. Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in an upright position . Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so . Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the corresponding seat Fig. 10. Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat belt Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle has come to a standstill .

Press the red button on the buckle Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from the buckle. Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- tion unless the seat backrest is in an up- right position and the seat belt is worn cor- rectly, according to your size. Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sud- den braking. The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, can cause severe injuries if the belt moves from hard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. the stomach).

18

Seat belts

Correct seat belt position

Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and headrest posi- tions, viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection in the event of an accident and reduce the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat

belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op- timum position to ensure the airbag provides the maximum protection. The seat belt must therefore always be worn and the webbing correctly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even fatal injuries page 12, Correct sit- ting position of vehicle occupants.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the shoulder. The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt must lie evenly across the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach and must be worn properly at all times during the pregnancy Fig. 13.

Adapting the position of the belt webbing to your size The seat belt can be adapted using the fol- lowing equipment:

Belt height adjustment for the front seats.

WARNING An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort- ably on the torso The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stom- ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com- fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack. For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis and always lie flat, surrounding the stomach Fig. 13. Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas- tened. Once the seat belt is positioned correct- ly, don't pull it away from your body with your hand. Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Note If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct position of the

19

Safety

belt webbing, contact a specialised work- shop for help with any special devices to ensure the optimum protection of the seat belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking your car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the front seats and the side rear seats1) are equipped with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, although only in severe head-on, lateral and rear-end collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combination with the airbag system. In case of overturn, the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the head airbags are deployed.

Note If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components

of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar with these regula- tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seat belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- ers or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- sioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regulations, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other re- pair work, must be performed by a special- ised workshop only. The belt tensioners will only provide pro- tection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environment Airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re- quirements for their disposal.

1) Depending on version/market. 20

Airbag system

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Related video

Fig. 14 Vehicle interior

Why is it so important to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is re- quired by law in most countries, but also for

your safety page 15, The whys and wherefores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the air- bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis- tance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the speci- fied reference values, the front, side and/or head-protection airbags will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter

how serious, is not a determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.

WARNING Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- suming an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries. All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig- gered. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never trans- port children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not ap- propriate for their age, size or weight. To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- erly page 15.

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec- tion for the occupants in combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow- ing modules (as per vehicle equipment): Electronic control unit Front airbags for driver and passenger Knee airbag for the driver Side airbags

21

Safety

Head airbag Airbag control lamp on the instrument panel page 23 Key-operated switch for front passenger airbag Control lamp for disabled/enabled status of the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control lamp : does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 23, turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on, illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving.

The airbag system is not triggered if: the ignition is switched off there is a minor frontal collision there is a minor side collision there is a rear-end collision the vehicle turns over.

WARNING The seat belts and airbags can only pro- vide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 12. If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- tem, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousands of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to function when the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air- bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be gener-

alised. Some factors play an important role, such as the properties of the object the vehi- cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec- tory and activates the respective restraint system.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede- fined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous head-on collisions: Driver airbag. Front passenger front airbag Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous side-on collisions: Front side airbag on the side of the acci- dent. Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- cident.

22

Airbag system

In an accident with airbag activation: the interior lights switch on (if the interior light switch is in the courtesy light position); the hazard warning lights switch on; all doors are unlocked; the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru- ment

Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

Front passenger front airbag deactivated. Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag activated. The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system control lamp remains on or flashes, it indi- cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system . Have the system checked immediately by a specialised work- shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the warning lamp re- mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the control lamp on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the airbag system . If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the disabling of the airbag system . Have the system checked immediately by a speci- alised workshop.

WARNING In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

Do not mount a child seat in the front passenger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descrip- tions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle or harm to the occupants.

23

Safety

Front airbags

Fig. 15 Driver airbag located in steering wheel.

Fig. 16 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Fig. 15 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Fig. 16. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

When the driver and front passenger airbags are deployed, the covers remain attached to the steering wheel and dashboard, respec- tively Fig. 15 Fig. 16.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants ad-

ditional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision .

Their special design allows the controlled es- cape of the propellant gas when an occu- pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi- ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. It is also important not to attach any ob- jects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the air- bag units.

24

Airbag system

Activate and deactivate front pas- senger front airbag*

Fig. 17 Switch for activating and deactivating the front passenger airbag.

Fig. 18 Dash panel: control lamp for the deac- tivation of the front passenger front airbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti- vated, this means that only the front passen- ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen- ger front airbag Switch the ignition off. Open the door on the front passenger side. Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 17. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. Turn the key gently to change its position to (deactivate) or to (activate). If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. Close the front passenger door. When deactivating the airbag, switch the ignition on and check that the control lamp remains lit where it says in the central part of the dashboard Fig. 18. When reactivating the airbag, check that when the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not light up and the lamp lights up or 60 seconds and then turns off.

WARNING The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. Always switch off the ignition before dis- abling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do so could result in a fault in the airbag deactivation system. Never leave the key in the airbag disa- bling switch as it could get damaged or en- able or disable the airbag during driving. If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can fulfil its protective function.

25

Safety

Knee airbag*

Fig. 19 On the driver side: location of the knee airbag

Fig. 20 On the driver side: airbag action radius for the knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver side below the dash panel Fig. 19. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The area framed in red (deployment area) Fig. 20 is covered by the knee airbag

when it is deployed. Objects should never be placed or mounted in this area.

WARNING The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy- ment areas of the knee airbags free. Never not fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the knee airbag. Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be- tween your knees and the location of the this airbag. If your physical constitution prevents you from meeting these require- ments, make sure you contact a special- ised workshop.

Side airbags*

Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 22 Illustration of completely inflated side airbags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger seat backrests Fig. 21.

The locations are identified by the text AIR- BAG in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air- bag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision .

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these airbags provide maximum protection.

26

Airbag system

WARNING If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident. In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the inte- rior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel. Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted. Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- ers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been closed properly. Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted inside the door pan- els. Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deploy- ment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup

holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered. Under no circumstances should protec- tive covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been ap- proved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the back- rest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness. Any damage to the original seat uphols- tery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. Any work on the side airbag system or re- moval and installation of the airbag com- ponents for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

head-protection airbags*

Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors Fig. 23 and are identified with the text AIR- BAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- protection airbag system gives the vehicle occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side collision .

The area framed in red is covered by the head-protection airbag when it is deployed Fig. 23 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- jects should never be placed or mounted in this area .

In the event of a side collision the head-pro- tection airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle.

27

Safety

The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact.

WARNING In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. For safety reasons, the head-protection airbag must be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See your technical service to make this adjustment. There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protection airbag can deploy com- pletely without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

Any work on the head-protection airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- bag system operation. The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- ation of the side and head-protection air- bags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- aged, the airbag system may not work cor- rectly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.

Transporting children safely

Safety for children

Related video

Fig. 24 Vehicle interior

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned from accident statistics, we recommend that chil- dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- sons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to children page 17. But unlike adults, children do not

28

Transporting children safely

have fully developed muscle and bone struc- tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al- ways use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod- ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- gramme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke (not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de- signed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:

Child seats in the opposite direction of trav- el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)). Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX DUO Plus). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX (Peke G3 KIDFIX)1).

Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX (Peke G3 KIDFIX)1).

Child seats in the opposite direction of trav- el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg (RO- MER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX BASE / PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE). Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUO PLUS + TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I-SIZE). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX (ROMER KIDFIX XP). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle (group 3): safety belt and ISOFIX (ROMER KIDFIX XP).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats. Always read and note page 30.

We recommend you always carry the manu- facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- gether with the on-board documentation.

Child seats group classification

Fig. 25 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap- proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco- nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight group The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- ries:

1) Temporarily, the child seat recommended by the Accessories Programme for groups 2 and 3 will be ROMER KIDFIX XP instead of Peke G3 KIDFIX. It is available on the SEAT website.

29

Safety

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg

Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg

Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and ap- proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category Child seats may have the approval category of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific

(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

Universal: child seats with universal appro- val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt. Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in addition to the standard requirements of universal approval, requires safety devices to lock the child seat, which require additional testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- proval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats with vehicle-specific approval also include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- R 129 standard in relation to installation and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- cle.

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 26 Airbag sticker: on the passengers sun visor

Fig. 27 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the passenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seat Take the following general warnings into ac- count if you are going to fit a child seat. They are valid for all child seats regardless of their attachment system.

30

Transporting children safely

Please read and follow the child seat man- ufacturer's operating instructions. The child seat should preferably be fitted to the rear seat behind the front passenger seat so that the child can exit the vehicle on the pavement side. Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ing child seats. To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child seat in the back in the case that it goes opposite to the direction of the car. In the case of front facing restraint systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet. If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- led, in which the method of attachment to the car is through the seat belt and support bracket, it should never be installed in the central rear seat as the ground clearance is lower than in other places and the support bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- ciently stable.

When fitting a child seat on the front pas- senger seat, the seat must be moved back- wards as far as possible and placed in the highest position. The backrest must also be put in a vertical position1).

Important information about the front pas- senger front airbag A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passeng- er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame Fig. 26.

Read and always observe the safety informa- tion included in the following chapters:

Safety distance with respect to the passen- ger airbag page 21. Objects between the passenger and the passenger side airbag in Front airbags on page 24.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena- bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing backward since the airbag can strike the seat with such force that it can cause serious or fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. This is the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- bled with a key-operated switch page 25. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child page 29.

WARNING If a child seat is secured to the front pas- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases. An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest. Never install a child seat facing back- wards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if necessary, the front passenger front airbag must be deactiva- ted page 25. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest, most upright position. If you have a fixed seat, do not install any child restraint system in this location.

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

31

Safety

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the air- bag when an adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat. Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- ling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- cle occupants. Never leave a child alone in the child seat or in the vehicle. Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci- dent. When a child seat is mounted in the rear seats, the door child-proof lock should be activated page 108.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach- ment systems are used for safely installing child seats.

Attachment systems overview ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ment system allowing quick and safe attach- ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- tachment establishes a rigid connection be- tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fit- ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found between the seat cushion and the backrest of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- FIX attachment systems are used mainly in Europe page 33. If necessary, ISOFIX at- tachment may have to be supplemented with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

Automatic three-point seat belt. When- ever possible, it is preferable to attach the child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than attaching them with an automatic three-point seat belt page 36.

Additional attachment:

Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are located at the back of the rear seat back- rest on the boot side page 35. The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol.

Support bracket: some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of impact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats . For the assembly of this type of seat you should also consult the list of approved vehicles for this assembly, available in the instructions for child restraint systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child seats SEAT recommends attaching child seats as follows:

Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support bracket or i-Size. Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury. Make sure the support bracket is correct- ly and safely installed.

32

Transporting children safely

Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether* system

Fig. 28 Rear seat: ISOFIX/i-Size securing rings. Fig. 29 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the ISOFIX system.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear side seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system.

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are

secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. The ISOFIX rings are located between the rear seat backrest and the seat cushioning Fig. 28. The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-

hind the seat backrest or in the boot) page 35.

To understand the compatibility of the ISO- FIX systems in the vehicle, check the table below.

Weight group Size classa) Electrical equipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Baby carrier F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

33

Safety

Weight group Size classa) Electrical equipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X X --- X

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X X --- X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.

34

Transporting children safely

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

i-Size child seats X X i-U X

i-U: Position suitable for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129. X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

Securing the child seat with the ISOFIX/i- Size system You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- turer's instructions.

Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX/iSize retaining rings until the child seat is heard to engage securely Fig. 29. If the child seat is equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, se- cure it to the correspondent ring page 35. Observe the manufacturer's in- structions. Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* attachment system are available from Tech- nical Services.

WARNING The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Top Tether* system child seats.

Never secure other child seats that do not have the ISOFIX or Top Tether* sys- tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- tening rings - this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child. Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- rectly using the ISOFIX and Top Tether* securing rings.

Top Tether* securing belts

Fig. 30 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.

35

Safety

Fig. 31 Back of the rear seats: Top Tether se- curing rings.

Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- cle anchor point, located at the back of the rear seat backrest and provide greater re- straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for- ward movements of the child seat in a crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun- ted seats Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufac- turer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining strap. Place the belt under the headrest of the back seat Fig. 30 (depending on the in- structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the headrest if necessary). Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest Fig. 31. Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap Loosen the strap following the manufactur- er's instructions. Push the lock and release it from the an- choring support.

WARNING An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash. Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment. Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego- ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must check that the seat is approved for your vehi-

cle. You will find any necessary information on the child seats orange ECE approval la-

bel. The following table shows the different fitting options.

36

Transporting children safely

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

Airbag activated airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ing child seats. Put the seat belt in place and pass it through the child seat according to the in- structions of the child seat manufacturer. Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle until you hear the engagement click.

WARNING When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suita- ble for age, weight and size. Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 30.

37

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-help

Emergency equipment

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 32 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. To ac- cess the vehicle tools page 138.

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt* Towing eye, removable Wheel spanner* Crank handle for jack

1

2

3

4

Jack* Hook for extracting the central wheel trims* Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNING When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set and spare wheel are loose in the interior they can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe- cially in accidents, causing serious injury. Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- rary spare wheel are safely secured in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can cause injury or accidents. Never work with inappropriate or dam- aged tools.

Note The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be greased using universal type grease.

5

6

7

Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must again check the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa- miliar with the procedure and you have the necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following cases: If the wheel rim has been damaged. In outside temperatures below -20C (-4F). In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre greater than 4 mm. If you have been driving with very low pres- sure or a completely flat tyre. If the sealant bottle has passed its use by date.

38

Self-help

WARNING Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- rounding traffic to fill the tyre. Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid. All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area. Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users. Use the tyre mobility system only if you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance. The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- porary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop. Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mobility set as soon as possible. The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin. Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the reach of small children. Always stop the engine, apply the elec- tronic parking brake and put it in gear when using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce

the risk of involuntary movement of the ve- hicle.

WARNING A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- tional tyre. Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of used or expired sealant observ- ing any legal requirements.

Note A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships.

Note Take into account the separate instruction manual of the tyre mobility set* manufac- turer.

Anti-puncture kit contents*

Fig. 33 Standard representation: anti-punc- ture kit contents.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compart- ment. It includes the following components Fig. 33:

Valve insert remover A sticker to be adhered to the instrument cluster, within the driver's visual field, to remind that the maximum advisable speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph Filler tube with cap Air compressor ON/OFF switch Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube).

1

2

3

4

5

6

39

Emergencies

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- toring system (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube). Tube for inflating tyres 12 volt connector Bottle of sealant Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for a valve insert. The valve in- sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part 11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use the Fig. 33 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously Fig. 33 10 . Screw the inflator tube Fig. 33 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break automatically. Remove the lid from the filling tube Fig. 33 3 and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve. With the bottle upside down, empty all of the contents into the tyre.

7

8

9

10

11

Remove the bottle from the valve. Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ing the tool Fig. 33 1 .

Inflating the tyre Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube Fig. 33 8 into the tyre valve. Check that the air bleed screw is closed Fig. 33 6 . Start the engine and leave it running. Insert the connector Fig. 33 9 into the vehicle's 12-volt socket page 148. Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 33 5 . Keep the air compressor running until it rea- ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. Disconnect the air compressor. If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre. Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve. Repeat the inflation process. If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and request assistance from an authorised technician.

Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Attach the sticker Fig. 33 2 to the instru- ment cluster, within the driver's visual field. Check the pressure again after 10 minutes page 41.

WARNING When inflating the wheel, the air compres- sor and the inflator tube may become hot. Protect hands and skin from hot parts. Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable mate- rial. Allow them to cool before storing the de- vice. If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid overheating! Before switching on the air compressor again, let it cool for several mi- nutes.

40

Self-help

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube Fig. 33 5 again and check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. You should obtain professional assistance .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again. Carefully resume your journey until you reach the nearest specialised workshop with- out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious in- jury. Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. Seek specialist assistance.

Changing a wheel

Related video

Fig. 34 Wheels

What to do first

Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible. Apply the electronic parking brake. Switch on the hazard warning lights. Manual transmission: select the 1st gear. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to position P. If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle. Have the vehicle tool kit page 38 and the spare wheel* ready page 365. Observe the applicable legislation for each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.).

All occupants should leave the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

WARNING Always observe the above steps and pro- tect yourself and other road users. If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- cle from moving.

Wheel central trim*

Fig. 35 Correct positioning of the central wheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access to the wheel nuts.

41

Emergencies

Removing Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools page 38) to one of the recesses of the central wheel trim and remove it.

Fitting Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The bottom of the S of the SEAT badge should align with the inflation valve Fig. 35 1 . Press the central trim firmly until it locks in with an audible click.

Note There is also a valve mark on the back of the central wheel trim that indicates the correct alignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 36 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.

Removal Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools Fig. 32) over the cap until it clicks into place Fig. 36. Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel nuts and should be remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel nuts.

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Fig. 37 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.

Insert the special adapter Fig. 37 1 (ve- hicle tools page 38) onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go. Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto the adapter as far as it will go. Remove the wheel bolt page 43.

Note Make a note of the code number of the an- ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a new adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Official Service, indicating the code number.

42

Self-help

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 38 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.

Fig. 39 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and the correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car to loosen the wheel nuts.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push on the end of the wheel wrench with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go Fig. 38. Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- wise .

Important information about wheel nuts Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe- cially matched during construction. There- fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct wheel nuts with the right length and heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not even use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same model.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft locking bolt must be threaded onto positions Fig. 39 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valves po- sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the hubcap.

WARNING If the wheel nuts are not properly tight- ened, they could come loose while driving

and cause an accident, serious injury and loss of vehicle control. Use only wheel nuts which correspond to the rim in question. Never use different wheel nuts. Wheel nuts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease, and it should be pos- sible to screw them easily. To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only use the wheel wrench that came with the car from the factory. The wheel nuts should only be loosened slightly (about one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident! Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed tor- que, they could come loose while driving. Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims. If wheel nuts are tightened below the prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could come loose while driving. If tightening tor- que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads can be damaged.

43

Emergencies

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 40 Jack position points.

Fig. 41 Cross member: positioning the jack on the vehicle.

Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slip- pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- ping .

Find the support point on the strut (sunken area) closest to the wheel to be changed Fig. 40. Turn the jack* crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the tab 1 Fig. 41 is below the housing provi- ded. Align the jack* so that tab 1 grips onto the housing provided on the strut and the mo- bile base 2 is resting on the ground. The base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- spect to the support point 1 . Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING The factory-supplied jack* is only de- signed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in- jury. Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could slip or sink, respectively, with the re- sultant risk of injury. Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, even those approved for other SEAT mod- els could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. Only mount the jack* on the support points designed for this purpose on the strut, and always align the jack correctly. If

you do not, the jack* could slip as it does not have an adequate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury! You should never place a body limb such as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that is solely supported by the jack. If you have to work underneath the vehi- cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one side or the engine is running. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. The vehicle may come loose from the jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTION The vehicle must not be raised on the crossbar. Only place the jack* on the points designed for this purpose on the strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam- aged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheel nuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea- son, please take care and get a second per- son to assist you.

44

Self-help

Taking off the wheel Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box spanner and place them on a clean surface. Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel Check the direction of rotation of the tyre page 45.

Place the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel into position. Screw on the wheel nuts in position and tighten them loosely with a box spanner. To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts use the corresponding adaptor. Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di- agonal pairs (not in a circle). Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on.

The wheel nuts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nuts The recommended tightening torque for wheel nuts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the

tightening torque checked immediately with a torque wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have any rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re- placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the indicated direction of rotation in order to guarantee optimum grip and help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is of particular importance when the road sur- face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos- sible or remount it with the correct direction of rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap. Return all tools to their proper storing loca- tion. If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug- gage compartment page 136. Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- ted tyre as soon as possible. In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica- tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory page 364. Have the tightening torque of the wheel nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor- que wrench page 45. Meanwhile, drive carefully. Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

45

Emergencies

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Wiper service position

Fig. 42 Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- ers are in service position Fig. 42.

Close the bonnet page 343. Switch the ignition on and off. Press the windscreen wiper lever down- wards briefly page 126 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- tion.

Note The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the bonnet is properly closed. You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a cover over the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.

Changing the wiper rear wiper blades

Fig. 43 Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Fig. 44 Changing the rear wiper blade

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the windscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty .

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a specialised workshop and cor- rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades should be replaced immediately. These are availa- ble from qualified workshops.

46

Self-help

Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms Place the windscreen wipers in the service position page 46. Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades Raise the wiper arms. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades. If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades Lift and unfold the wiper arms. Press and hold release button Fig. 43 1 and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- rection of the arrow. Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place. Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade Lift and fold the wiper arm. Turn the blade slightly Fig. 44 (arrow A ).

Hold down the release button 1 while gen- tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrow B . Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di- rection to the arrow B and hook into place button 1 . Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

WARNING Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- dent and serious injury. Always replace damaged or worn wind- screen wiper blades or blades that no lon- ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass. If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- aged. Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win- dows. In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in service position page 46.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, only leave them in the service position. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

Jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis- charged battery, the battery can be connec- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- tions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board network.

47

Emergencies

Jump start: description

Fig. 45 Diagram of connections for vehicles without Start Stop system

Fig. 46 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connections Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

1.

Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 45. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- hicle providing assistance B . In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle providing the current B Fig. 45. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block itself Fig. 46. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid metal component bol- ted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A . Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compart- ment.

Starting Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

5.

6.

7.

Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- onds, switch off the starter and try again after about 1 minute.

WARNING Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 343. The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery

8.

9.

10.

11.

48

Self-help

(12V) and approximately the same capaci- ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- ply could result in an explosion. Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- plosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- ted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion. Never attach the negative cable to fuel system components or the brake lines in the other vehicle. The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine of the vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling another that is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relating to tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehicle with a discharged battery is not allowed. The jump start should be used instead page 47.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access system, towing is only allowed with the igni- tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is towed with the engine switched off and the ignition connected. Depending on the battery charge status, the drop in voltage may be so large, even after just a few minutes, that no electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the

Keyless Access system, the steering wheel could lock .

WARNING A vehicle with no power should never be towed. When towing, never remove the ignition key or disconnect the ignition with the start button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of the steering column could suddenly be- come blocked and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle. This could cause an accident, serious injury and loss of control of the vehicle. If during towing the vehicle runs out of power, stop towing immediately and re- quest the assistance of specialist person- nel.

WARNING Vehicle handling and braking capacity change considerably during towing. Please observe the following instructions to mini- mise the risk of serious accidents and in- jury: As the driver of the vehicle being towed: You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op- erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid crashing into the towing vehicle.

More strength is required at the steer- ing wheel as the power steering does

49

Emergencies

not operate when the engine is switch- ed off.

As the driver of the towing vehicle: Accelerate with particular care and

caution. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual and more

smoothly.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam- ple the paint, remove and replace the lid and towing eye carefully. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it during towing.

Instructions for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow- started. The jump start should be used in- stead page 47.

For technical reasons, towing the following vehicles is not allowed:

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system the steering re- mains locked and the electronic parking brake cannot be deactivated nor can the

electronic lock of the steering column be re- leased if they are activated. If the battery is flat, it is possible that the engine control units may not operate correct- ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (in the case of manual gear- boxes): Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. Keep the clutch pressed down. Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- ing lights of both vehicles. Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch. Once the engine starts, press the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle.

CAUTION When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam- age to the catalytic converter.

Note The vehicle can only be tow-started if the electronic parking brake and, if appropri- ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-

umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be tow-started to de- activate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column.

Towing instructions

Towing requires some expertise and experi- ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should be familiar with the difficulties involved in towing. For this reason, inexper- ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that no impermissible tractive forces or shocks are generated. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signal the change of direction even with the hazard warning lights turned on. To do so, at the same time, the turn signal lever must be oper- ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the hazard warning lights will go off. When the turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi- tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto- matically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is not blocked, and the electronic parking brake

50

Self-help

may be deactivated and the turn signals and wash/wipe operated. More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steering does not oper- ate when the engine is switched off. You should depress the brake much harder as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid hitting the towing vehicle. Bear in mind the information and instruc- tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. Bear in mind the information and instruc- tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Tow rope or tow bar It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is not available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- ilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de- vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted if it has been specially designed to be instal- led on a tow hitch page 325.

When the vehicle has to be towed: Check whether the vehicle may be towed page 51, Cases where towing the vehi- cle is not permitted.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope in the normal way, with all four wheels on the road; it can also be towed with either the front or rear wheels lifted off the road.

Switch the ignition on. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se- lector lever in the N page 252 position. Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph). The vehicle must not be towed further than 50 km (30 miles). If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with automatic transmission are only allowed to be towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive (4Drive) Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi- cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-

pended, the engine must be switched off, otherwise the transmission may be damaged.

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per- mitted If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri- cant. If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cause the steering remains locked and, if ap- propriate, the electronic parking brake can- not be deactivated or the electronic lock of the steering column released. If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav- elled. When, for example, after an accident, the smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering operation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle: Observe legal requirements. Keep in mind the instructions in the manual on towing vehicles.

CAUTION If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri- cant in the automatic transmission the car may only be towed with the driven wheels lifted clear of the road, or transported on a special car transporter or trailer.

51

Emergencies

Note The vehicle can only be towed if the elec- tronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column are deactiva- ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be tow-started page 47 to deacti- vate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 47 On the right side of the front bumper: remove the cover.

Fig. 48 On the right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the removable towline an- chorage is on the right side of the front bump- er underneath a cover Fig. 47.

The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing page 50.

Fitting the towline anchorage Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment page 38. Extract the lid for the towing eye using the vehicle key blade (if you do not have the spe- cific tool), pressing on the side and levering gently from left to right. Leave it hanging from the vehicle Fig. 47. Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock-

wise Fig. 48 . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object. Insert the side tab of the lid into the opening of the bumper and press until the tab is prop- erly clipped into the bumper. Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.

52

Self-help

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 49 On the right side of the rear bumper: remove the cover.

Fig. 50 On the right side of the rear bumper: towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid Fig. 49.

Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing bracket do not have any housing for the

screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal- led and used for towing page 325, .

Bear in mind the instructions for towing page 50.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with- out a factory-equipped towing bracket) Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment page 38. Press the upper side of the lid Fig. 49 to unclip it. Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve- hicle. Screw the towline anchorage into the hous- ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock- wise Fig. 50 . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object. Insert the upper flange of the lid into the opening of the bumper and press the lower side of the lid until the upper flange is inserted into the bumper. Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION The towing eye must always be com- pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow- starting. If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with a tow bar if this has been specially de- signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In- stead, a tow rope should be used.

53

Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death! Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury. Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) and size. Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- ple or similar.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec- tric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- trical elements and remove the key from the ignition. Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system.

Note One component may have more than one fuse. Several components may run on a single fuse. In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 51 Left hand drive vehicles: fuse box cover under the driver's side dashboard

54

Fuses and bulbs

Fig. 52 glove compartment (right hand drive): fuse box access.

Opening and closing the fuse box situated below the dash panel (left-hand steering wheel) Open: fold the cover down Fig. 51. Close: push back the cover it in until it clicks into place.

Fuses behind the glove compartment (right-hand steering wheel) Open the glove compartment and, if nec- essary, empty it. Undo the opening limiter Fig. 52 A in two steps: first, unlock the limiter by pulling back on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gently to the right (arrow 2 ). Remove the guide when the cover is in the normal opening posi- tion (30). Free the side pivots B to release the cover to its second opening position (60). Follow the same procedure in reverse order to return the glove compartment to its normal position.

Identifying fuses below below the dash- board by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Colour Amp rating

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle. Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam- age to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 53 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover.

To open the engine compartment fuse box Open the bonnet page 343.

55

Emergencies

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover Fig. 53. Then lift the cover out. To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 54 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- cal equipment. Open the corresponding fuse box page 54, page 55.

Recognise a blown fuse A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 54.

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.

To replace a fuse Remove the fuse. Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size. Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

Fuse placement

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

1 Adblue (SCR) 20

4 Alarm horn 7.5

5 Gateway 7.5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5

7 Air conditioning and heating control panel, back window heating, auxiliary heating.

10

No. Consumers/Amps

8 Diagnosis, electronic parking brake switch, light switch, re- verse light, interior lighting, driv- ing mode, lit-up door sill

7.5

9 Steering column 7.5

10 Radio display 7.5

11 Left lights 40

12 Radio 20

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 Steering column release 10

16 Connectivity Box 7.5

17 Instrument panel, OCU 7.5

18 Rear camera 7.5

19 Kessy 7.5

20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

22 Trailer 15

23 Electric sunroof 20

24 Right lights 40

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 30

27 Interior light 30

56

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps

28 Trailer 25

32 Control unit for parking aid, front camera and radar 7.5/10

33 Airbag 7.5

34 Reverse switch, climate sensor, electrochromic mirror, rear power sockets (USB)

7.5

35 Diagnosis, headlight control unit, headlight adjuster 7.5

36 Right LED headlight 7.5

37 Left LED headlight 7.5

38 Trailer 25

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

42 Central locking 40

43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30

44 Trailer 15

45 Electric driver's seat 15

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

50 Electric rear lid 40

52 Driving mode. 15

53 Heated rear window 30

In-line fuse Amperes

Rear power sockets 7.5

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

1 ESP control unit 25

2 ESP control unit 40

3 Engine control unit (diesel/pet- rol) 30/15

4 Engine sensors 7.5

5 Engine sensors 7.5

6 Brake light sensor 7.5

7 Engine power supply 7.5/10

8 Lambda probe 10/15

9 Engine 5/10/20

10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

13 Gearbox pump 30

14 Heated windscreen 40

15 Horn 15

16 Petrol pump 7.5/15/20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

No. Consumers/Amps

18 Terminal 30 (positive refer- ence) 7.5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

22 Engine control unit 7.5

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

31 Pressure pump 15

37 Parking heating 20

46 230V socket 30

Note In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop. Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- pear in the following tables. Some of the equipment listed in the ta- bles below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras. Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject to change.

57

Emergencies

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of practical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom- mends that you consult a technical service or request assistance from a specialist. In gen- eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to the bulbs, other vehicle components require re- moval.

If you choose to change the engine compart- ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a dangerous area in Working in the en- gine compartment on page 343.

Always use identical bulbs with the same designation. The name can be found on the base of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, there are different sets of headlights and tail lights:

Halogen headlights. Full-LED main headlights* Rear bulb light LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system* Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam

and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Bulbs (12 V) Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an au- thorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Daytime running light/side light

LED (it cannot be replaced)

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Turn signal PY21W

Full-LED main headlights

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs

Front fog light Type

Fog/cornering lights* H8

Rear lights Type

Brake light/tail light P21W LL

Side lights P21W LL

Turn signal PY21W LL

Retro fog light P21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

LED rear lights Type

Turn signal PY21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

The remaining functions work with LEDs

WARNING Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm. Risk of burns. Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury. When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp edges, in particular on the headlight housing.

CAUTION Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit could occur.

58

Fuses and bulbs

Switch off the lights and the parking light before changing a bulb. Take good care to avoid damaging any components.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest of your own safety, but also that of all other road users. Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead, since the fingerprints left on the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited on the reflector and will impair its surface. Depending on the level of equipment fit- ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than that of the car. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Dipped beam headlight bulb

Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: remove the cover.

Fig. 56 In the engine compartment: dipped beam headlight bulb.

Raise the bonnet.

Move the loops Fig. 55 1 in the direc- tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

Remove connector Fig. 56 2 from the bulb.

Unclip the retainer spring Fig. 56 3 pressing clockwise and inwards.

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess on the reflector.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

59

Emergencies

Main beam headlight bulb and turn signal bulb

Fig. 57 In the engine compartment: remove the cover.

Fig. 58 In the engine compartment: main beam headlight bulb 2 and turn signal bulb 3 .

Main beam headlight bulb Raise the bonnet.

Move the loop Fig. 57 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover.

Slide connector Fig. 58 2 to the left or right and pull.

Remove the bulb by disconnecting the con- nector.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

Turn signal bulb Raise the bonnet.

Move the loop Fig. 57 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover.

Turn the bulb holder Fig. 58 3 anti- clockwise and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

60

Fuses and bulbs

Front fog light bulb*

Fig. 59 Front fog light: remove the grille.

Fig. 60 Front fog light: remove the bulb holder

Remove the screw Fig. 59 1 from the fog light grille using a screwdriver and ex- tract the grille.

Remove the 3 screws Fig. 59 2 .

Remove the metal clip situated on the up- per part of the fog light by pulling away from the vehicle 3 and extract the fog light.

Remove connector Fig. 60 1 from the bulb.

Turn the bulb holder Fig. 60 2 anti- clockwise and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

Check that the bulb works properly.

Note Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical Service or specialised workshop.

61

Emergencies

Tail light bulbs located in the body- work

Fig. 61 Luggage compartment: access to the bolt securing the tail light unit.

Fig. 62 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light.

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

Remove the lid, levering it with the flat side of a screwdriver into the recess Fig. 61

1 .

Remove the bulb connector.

Unscrew the light securing bolt by hand or using a screwdriver Fig. 61 2 .

Remove the light from the body, gently pull- ing it toward you, and place on a clean, smooth surface.

Disassemble the bulb holder unlocking the securing tabs Fig. 62 1 .

Change the damaged bulb.

To refit follow the steps in reverse order, tak- ing special care when fitting the bulb hold- er. The securing tabs must click into place.

CAUTION Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paintwork or any of its components.

Note Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, to avoid any scratches. In the case of LED lights, change only the turn signal bulb.

Tail lights bulbs located in the rear lid

Fig. 63 Rear lid open: remove the cover.

Fig. 64 Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs.

Remove the rear lid cover in the direction indicated Fig. 63.

62

Fuses and bulbs

Unlock the securing tabs from the bulb holder Fig. 64 1 or turn the bulb holder to the left 2 and 3 .

Remove the bulb holder from its location.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it to the left and re- move it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Carry out the same actions in reverse order for assembly and pay special attention to placing the bulb holder, ensuring that the tabs are properly secured.

Note For LED pilots, you can only change the re- verse bulb.

Changing the number plate bulbs

Fig. 65 In the rear bumper: Number plate light.

Fig. 66 number plate light: remove the bulb holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

Press the number plate light in the direction of the arrow Fig. 65.

Detach the number plate light.

Turn the connector lock Fig. 66 in the di- rection of arrow 1 and pull on the connec- tor.

Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of the arrow Fig. 66 2 and extract it to- gether with the bulb.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb.

Insert the bulb holder into the number plate light and rotate all the way in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig. 66 2 .

Plug the connector into the bulb holder.

Insert the number plate light carefully into the opening on the bumper. Ensure that the number plate light is in the correct position.

Insert the number plate light into the bump- er until it audibly clicks into place.

63

Emergencies

Side turn signals

Fig. 67 Turn signal integrated in the rear view mirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- grated in the rear view mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work- shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Taking into account that it consists of LED bulbs, the change should be made at a tech- nical service centre.

64

Operation

Fig. 68 Instruments and controls.

66

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Door handle Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Control for the electric adjustment of the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Control lever for: Turn signals and main beam

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Cruise control system (GRA) and

speed limiter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268, 270 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . 86 According to features, lever for: Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . 277 Steering wheel with horn and Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 On-board computer controls . . . . . 84 Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialogue system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 255

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Control lever for: Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 126 Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 According to features: radio or dis- play for Easy Connect (navigation, radio, TV/video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Depending on the equipment, but- tons for: Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Depending on the equipment, glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 203 Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 25 Front passenger seat heating con- trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Depending on the equipment, con- trols for: Heating and ventilation system or

manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . . 151 Depending on the equipment: USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Lighter/power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Gear lever for: Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Rotating control(Driving Experience button) for driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 298 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- cess closing and start-up sys- tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . . . 156 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key- less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Steering column adjustment lev- er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

67

Operation

Note Some of the equipment listed in this sec- tion is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras. The arrangement of switches and con- trols on right-hand drive models* may be slightly different from the layout shown in page 66. However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.

Instruments and warn- ing/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

Fig. 69 Related video: Dash panel

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument panel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEAT Cockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort set- tings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving. To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions on the screen of the instrument panel and to the instructions on the screen of the Info- tainment system when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

68

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 70 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments Fig. 70:

Revolution counter (with the engine run- ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- nute) page 81.

1

Engine coolant temperature display page 82 Displays on the screen page 72. Adjuster button and display.

2

3

4

Speedometer. Fuel gauge page 81.

5

6

69

Operation

Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 71 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: Engine coolant temperature display page 82 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- nute the engine is running page 81. Gear engaged or position of the selec- tor lever currently selected Screen display page 72 Speedometer Digital speed display Fuel gauge page 81. Information Profile page 70.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument panel digital with monochrome screen in col- our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi- ble using the button of the multifunction steering wheel. By selecting different infor- mation profiles, indications other than the classic circular instruments can be displayed, such as navigation data, multimedia informa- tion or travel data.

The 3 views are:

Classic View Digital maps (no information profiles) Semicircular watches

All views will display information on the screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi- cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).

In Classic View and Semicircular watches it is possible to customise the information dis- played under Information Profiles Fig. 71 8 .

Information profiles With the option INSTRUMENT PANEL (infotain- ment button > View > Instrum. panel) you can choose between the different infor- mation display options that will be shown on the SEAT Digital Cockpit.

1) Depending on the version. 70

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Classic View The revolutions per minute and speedometer needles appear along the entire length Fig. 71.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)

Personalisation of the information that ap- pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of these items of information can be displayed at the same time, but the user chooses which to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can be memorised by exiting the menu or keeping the View button pressed.

Consumption. Graphic representation of the current consumption and digital display of the average consumption. Audio. Digital display of the current audio playback. Altitude. Digital display of the current alti- tude above sea level. Compass. Digital display of the compass. Information about the final destination. Digital display of the remaining travelling time, distance to the destination and the esti- mated time of arrival.

Operating range. Digital display of the re- maining range. Travel time. Route guidance. Journey. Digital display of the distance travelled. Assistance systems. Graphic representa- tion of different assistance systems. Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- ted. Navigation. Graphical representation of the navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num- ber and the contents of the selectable infor- mation profiles..

Navigation map in the SEAT Digital Cockpit*

Fig. 72 Infotainment system:: map transfer key

Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do this, select the Navigation option in the menu menu on the instrument panel page 74.

Depending on the features or the navigation map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on both at the same time. If it is displayed only in the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma- noeuvres.

1) Pre-set information depending on the Driving mode selected.

71

Operation

Transfer of navigation map Using the map transfer key Fig. 72, the map is transferred from the Infotainment system to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice versa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu, you can transfer the map back to the Info- tainment System.

Status display

Possible indications on the instrument panel display Different pieces of information can be dis- played on the screen of the instrument panel, depending on the features of the vehicle. Doors, bonnet and rear lid open Warning and information messages Odometer Time page 80 Indications of the radio and navigation sys- tem Indications of the phone Outside temperature Indications of the compass Selector lever positions Gear-change recommendation page 260

Display of travel data (multifunction dis- play) and menus for different settings page 74 Service interval display page 83 Speed warning page 74 Speed warning for winter tyres Start-Stop system status display page 249 Signs detected by the traffic signal detec- tion system page 78 Indication of active cylinder management status (ACT) page 266 Low consumption driving Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Driver assistance system display page 268 Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- ing, the instrument panel display shows if any of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and, in some cases, it is also indica- ted by an audible warning. The display may vary according to the type of instrument pan- el fitted.

Selector lever positions (DSG dual clutch shift) The current position of the selector lever is shown on the side of the lever and on the in- strument panel display. When the lever is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in some cases, the gear engaged in each case is shown on the instrument panel display.

Outside temperature indicator If the outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +4 C (+39 F), the ice crystal symbol on the outside temperature dis- play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un- til the outside temperature exceeds +6 C (+43 F) .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux- iliary heater is switched on or when driving at very low speeds, the outside temperature in- dicated may be higher than the actual tem- perature due to the heat produced by the en- gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from -45 C (-49 F) to +76 C (+169 F).

Gear-change recommendation While driving, the instrument panel of certain vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda- tion for saving fuel page 260.

72

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Odometer The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- tance travelled since the last time it was reset to zero.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Briefly press the button Fig. 70 4 to reset the trip recorder to 0. Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 seconds and the previous value will be displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain- ment system or the multifunction steering wheel page 74.

Speed warning for winter tyres If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is displayed on the instrument panel page 74.

Speed warning settings can be changed in the infotainment system, by pressing the info- tainment button > SETTINGS > Driver assistance page 89.

Indications of the compass Depending on the equipment, when the igni- tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-

cates the direction in which you are driving with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and there is no route guidance active, the graphic rep- resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving * Depending on the equipment, when driving, the display appears on the instrument panel when the vehicle is in low consumption status due to active cylinder management (ACT)* page 266.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Switch the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Hold the button Fig. 70 4 down for more than 15 seconds to display the iden- tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB).

Copyright Legal text about the property rights and copyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNING Even when the outside temperature is high- er than freezing temperature, some roads and bridges could be frozen. The ice crystal symbol indicates that there may be a risk of freezing.

At outside temperatures above +4 C (+39 F), there may be ice even when the ice crystal symbol is not on. The outside temperature sensor takes a guideline measurement.

Note There are different instrument panels and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of dis- plays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the con- trol warning lamps. Some indications on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by a sudden event, e.g. an incoming call. Depending on the equipment, some set- tings and instructions can be carried out or displayed on the infotainment system as well. If there are several warnings at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one af- ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- bols will stay on until you remove the cause. If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

73

Operation

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information items available will depend on the vehicles elec- tronics and features.

A specialised workshop can programme or modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is stationary. Driving data page 74 Assistance systems. Lane Assist On/Off page 285 Front Assist On/Off page 273 Blind spot detector On/Off page 291 ACC (only display) page 277

Navigation. Audio. Telephone. Vehicle status page 76

Service Menu 3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can be adjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menu To open up the Service menu, select the Range information profile while in the Driv- ing data menu, and keep the key press- ed on the multifunction steering wheel for ap- proximately 4 seconds. When it is released, the Service menu will be displayed. Now you can browse through the menu using the keys on the multifunction steering wheel as usual.

Restart the service interval display Select the Service menu and follow the in- structions on the screen of the instrument panel.

Restart the oil service Select the Restore Oil service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument pan- el display.

Restart journey data Select the Reset trip menu and follow the instructions on the instrument panel display to reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Select the menu Engine code. The identify- ing letters of the engine will be shown on the instrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clock Select the Time menu and set the correct time by turning the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel.

Driving data indicator (multifunc- tion display)

The display of the travel data (multifunction display) shows different values about the journey and the consumption.

Change from one display to another Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: press the rocker switch on the wind- screen wiper lever page 85.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel page 85.

Changing memory Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button of the multifunc- tion steering wheel.

74

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: While in Travel data > General infor- mation press on the multi-function steer- ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo- ries1):

The memory is deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours.

Display and storage of the journey data and the consumption values collected. When refuelling, the memory is deleted.

This memory contains travel data up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 mi- nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or 9999.9 km. When one of these values is exceeded (varies depending on the ver- sion of the instrument panel), the memo- ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets Select the memory that you wish to erase. Hold the button of the multifunction steering wheel or the button of the multi-

From start

Since refuelling

Long-term

function wheel pressed down for about 2 seconds.

Select the instructions In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi- cle settings, you can display different travel data page 89.

The current fuel consumption display operates through- out the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the vehicle stop- ped, in litres/hour.

The average fuel consumption is displayed after driving for approximately 300 metres.

This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition was switched on.

Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled if the same driving style is maintained.

Approxi- mate distance in km that can still be travelled with the current level of the AdBlue tank with the same driving style. The indication appears from a range of

Current consumption

Average consumption

Travelling time

Range

Adblue Autonomy or Autonomy

less than 2,400 km and cannot be de- activated.2)

Distance covered in km (m) after switching on the ignition.

The average speed will be shown after driving for approximately 100 metres.

Current speed displayed in digital format.

Displays a list of the connected comfort systems that in- crease energy consumption, e.g. air conditioning.

Setting a speed warning Select the display Warning at --- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph. Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel to store the current speed and activate the warning. Activate: adjust to the desired speed within 5 seconds using the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel. Next, press the button or

Distance

Average speed

Digital speed

Convenience consumers

1) This will show all data on the display at the same time: distance travelled, average con- sumption, average speed and autonomy. 2) Not available in all countries.

75

Operation

again or wait several seconds. The speed is stored and the warning activated. Deactivate: press button or button . The stored speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be- tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph).

Display Oil temperature The engine reaches its operating tempera- ture when, under normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80C and 120C. If the engine is under a lot of stress and the outside temperature is high, the en- gine oil temperature can increase. This does not present any problem as long as the warn- ing lamps or page 347 do not ap- pear on the display.

Warning and information messages (Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo- nents and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults displayed on the instrument panel as red and yellow warning symbols accompa- nied with messages and, depending on the case, even an audible warning page 86. The representation of the messages and

symbols may vary depending on the version of the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually. To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or Vehicle page 74.

Priority 1 warning (red) The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- companied by audible warnings). Stop driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi- nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio- nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow) The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- companied by audible warnings). Operating faults or the lack of operating fluids can cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, seek professional assistance.

Information message It provides information about processes in the vehicle.

Driver alert system (break recom- mendation)*

Fig. 73 On the instrument panel display: driver alert system symbol.

Function and operation Fatigue detection determines the driving be- haviour of the driver when starting a journey, making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- stantly compared with the current driving be- haviour. If the system detects that the driver is tired, an audible warning is given with a sound and an optic warning is shown with a symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display Fig. 73. The mes- sage on the instrument panel display is shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- pending on the case, is repeated. The system stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel display can be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the

76

Instruments and warning/control lamps

button on the multi function steering wheel page 84.

The message can be recalled to the instru- ment panel display using the multifunction display page 74.

Conditions of operation Driving behaviour is only calculated on speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off The driver alert system can be activated or deactivated in the Easy Connect system with the key > SETTINGS page 89. A mark indicates that the adjustment has been acti- vated.

System limitations The Fatigue detection has certain limitations inherent to the system. The following condi- tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- vent it from functioning.

At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) When cornering On roads in poor condition In unfavourable weather conditions

When a sporty driving style is employed In the event of a serious distraction to the driver

Fatigue detection will be restored when the vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri- od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys- tem automatically re-establishes the tired- ness calculation. When driving at a faster speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- ted.

WARNING Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- gue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, sufficient in length when making long jour- neys. The driver always assumes the responsi- bility of driving to their full capacity. Never drive if you are tired. The system does not detect the tiredness of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section page 77, System limitations.

In some situations, the system may incor- rectly interpret an intended driving ma- noeuvre as driver tiredness. No warning is given in the event of the ef- fect called microsleep! Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note Fatigue detection has been developed for driving on motorways and well paved roads only. If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

77

Operation

Road signs detection system*1)

Fig. 74 On the instrument panel display: ex- amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- tions with their respective additional signs.

The traffic sign detection system records the standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle with a camera located on the base of the in- terior mirror and provides information about speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.

Within its limitations, the system also displays additional signals, such as time-specific pro- hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers page 325 or limitations that only apply in the event of rain. Even on journeys without signs, the system may display any applicable speed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does not work in all countries. Keep this in mind when travelling abroad.

Shown on the display In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads, besides speed limits and overtaking provisions the system also displays the end of prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the time in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system are displayed on the dash panel display Fig. 74 and, depending on the navigation system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- ment system as well page 89.

Road sign detection system messages: There are no traffic signs available The system is in its start-up phase. OR: the camera has not recognized any mandatory or prohibitive sign.

Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display There is a fault in the system. Have the sys- tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Speed warning currently unavailable The speed warning function of the road sign detection system is faulty. Have the sys- tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Dynamic Road Sign Display: please clean the windscreen. The windscreen is dirty in the camera area. Clean the windscreen.

Dynamic Road Sign Display currently restricted. The navigation system is not transmitting data. Check if the navigation system has up- dated maps. OR: the vehicle is in a region not included on the navigation system's map.

No data available The traffic sign detection system does not work in the current country.

Activate and deactivate the road sign dis- play on the instrument panel The permanent display of road signs on the instrument panel can be activated or

1) System available depending on the country. 78

Instruments and warning/control lamps

deactivated in the infotainment system using the > SETTINGS > Driver assistance button.

Display of traffic signs When the traffic sign detection system is con- nected, a camera located on the base of the interior rear-view mirror records the traffic signs in front of the vehicle. After checking and evaluating the information from the cam- era, the navigation system and the current vehicle data, up to three valid road signs are displayed, Fig. 74 with their additional signs.

The sign that is currently valid for the driver is shown in the left side of the screen For example, a maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (100 mph) Fig. 74 .

A sign valid only in certain circum- stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown second, together with the additional rain sign.

If the windscreen wiper is working while you are driving, the signal with the additional rain sign will be shown first, on the left, as it is the one that is applicable at the time.

A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. No overtaking at certain times, will be displayed in third place Fig. 74 .

First:

Second:

Additional sign:

Third:

Speed warning If the system detects that the permitted speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver with a gong and visually with a message on the dash panel display.

The speed warning can be adjusted or deac- tivated completely in the infotainment system using the > SETTINGS > Driver assis- tance page 89 button. The speed is ad- justed in steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a range of between 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) above the maximum speed permit- ted.

Trailer mode In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory and a trailer that is electrically connected to the vehicle, it is possible to activate or deactivate the display of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi- tions. Activation or deactivation is performed in the infotainment system using the > SETTINGS > Driver assistance page 89 buttons.

For trailer mode, the display of speed limits applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed greater than that which is permitted in the

country in question for driving with a trailer, the system automatically displays the usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h (50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- vated, the system displays the speed limits as if there were no trailer hitched.

Limited operation The traffic sign detection system has certain limitations. The following cases may lead the system to operate with limitations or not at all:

In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, rain, fog or intense mist. In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- on traffic or by the sun. When driving at high speeds. If the camera is covered or dirty. If the traffic signs are out of the camera's field of vision. If the traffic signs are partially or totally covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi- cles. In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil the regulations. In the case of damaged or bent traffic signs.

79

Operation

In the case of variable messages on over- head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traffic signs or other lighting units). If the maps on the navigation system are not up-to-date. In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on lorries.

WARNING The technology in the traffic sign detection system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works with- in the system's limits. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the traffic sign detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog may lead to the system failing to dis- play traffic signs or not displaying them correctly. If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- ered or damaged, system operation may be impaired.

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the traffic sign detec-

tion system may differ from the actual cur- rent traffic situation. The system may not detect or correctly show all the traffic signs. Traffic signs and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and dis- plays provided by the system.

WARNING If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- vere injuries. Never ignore the messages displayed. Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.

Note To avoid affecting the correct operation of the system, take the following points into consideration: Regularly clean the area of vision of the camera and keep it in a clean state, without snow or ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the camera. Always replace damaged or worn blades when required to avoid lines on the cam- era's field of vision. Check that the windscreen is not dam- aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- sion.

The use of outdated maps on the naviga- tion system may cause the system to show traffic signs incorrectly. In the waypoints mode of the navigation system, the traffic sign detection system is only partly available. Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehi- cle.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys- tem Press the infotainment button. Press the SETTINGS function button. Select the menu option Time and date to set the time page 89.

Setting the time on analogue the instru- ment panel To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), press and hold the button on the instrument panel until the Time is displayed. Release the button . The time is dis- played on the instrument panel display and the hours field is highlighted. Afterwards, press the button until the desired time is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold the button .

80

Instruments and warning/control lamps

When they have finished setting the hour, wait until the minute field is marked on the in- strument panel display. Afterwards, press the button until the desired time is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold the button . Release the button in order to finish setting the time.

Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digital Cockpit While in the Driving data menu, select the Range function (infotainment button > View > Driving data > Range). Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the Service menu is dis- played on the instrument panel display page 74. Select the menu Time. Adjust the correct time by turning the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en- gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, the rev counter offers you the possibility of using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed.

The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the red zone .

We recommend that you avoid high revs and that you follow the recommendations on the gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- al information in page 260, Selecting the optimal gear.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only remain in the red zone for a short period of time. When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and en- gine noise.

Fuel gauge

Fig. 75 Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge

Fig. 76 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

81

Operation

Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, the lower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has been reached . Refuel as soon as you have the opportunity. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash- es red.

It lights up yellow

Presence of water in diesel. Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance.

The display only works when the ignition is switched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrument panel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- hicle in the page 383 section.

WARNING When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- vere injuries. If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes. The steering system and the driver assis- tance systems and brakes do not work when the engine is running irregularly or

switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu- lar supply thereof. Always refuel when there is only one quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle to stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system. The catalytic converter or the par- ticulate filter may get damaged!

Note The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to the fuel pump symbol points out towards the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank flap.

Engine coolant temperature indica- tor.

Fig. 77 Analogue instrument panel: engine coolant temperature indicator.

Fig. 78 Digital instrument panel: engine cool- ant temperature indicator.

Cool zone. The engine has not reached operating temperature yet. Avoid high speeds and stressing the engine if it has not reached operating temperature.

A

82

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Normal zone. At high outside tempera- tures and when making the engine work hard, the diodes may continue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is no cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work- ing hard, especially at high outside tem- peratures, the diodes may light up in the warning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only works when the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving! Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too high.

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and let it cool down. Check the engine coolant level page 350. If the warning lamp does not switch off even if the coolant level is correct, request assis- tance from specialised personnel.

B

C

CAUTION To ensure a long useful life for the engine, avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approxi- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature* page 74 page 76 as a guide. Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- atures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating. The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can reduce the cooling effect, which could cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe- cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on the instrument panel display and the Infotain- ment system.

There are different versions of instrument panels and infotainment systems, so the ver- sions and instructions on the screens may vary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en- gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and

services without engine oil change (e.g. In- spection).

In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service intervals are al- ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- vals are determined individually. Thanks to technological progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. Because of the technology used by SEAT, with this service you only need to change the oil when the ve- hicle so requires. To calculate this variation (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are considered. The advance warning first appears 20 days before the date established for the corre- sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- maining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The cur- rent service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on- ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder If a service or an inspection has to be carried out soon, a service reminder will be dis- played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres that can still be travelled or the time until the next service.

83

Operation

Service due When the time for a service or an inspec- tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- ted when the ignition is switched on and the fixed key symbol may appear on the in- strument panel for a few seconds, along with one of the following messages:

Service now! Please have your vehicle inspec- ted. Oil change service due! Oil change service and inspection due!

Consult a service notification With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current service notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on the infotainment system Press the infotainment button . Press the function button SETTINGS page 89. Select the Service menu option to display information about the services.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel Press and hold the button Fig. 70 4 for more than 5 seconds to con- sult the service message

Vehicles with digital instrument panel The date of the service can only be read through the Service menu page 74.

Resetting service interval display If the service was not carried out by a SEAT dealership, the display can be reset as fol- lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel Switch off the ignition, press and hold but- ton Fig. 70 4 . Switch ignition back on. Release the button and press it again for the next 20 seconds.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel The service interval display can only be re- set through the Service menu page 74.

Do not restart the indicator between the service intervals, otherwise the information displayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, the service interval display changes to a fixed service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible oil change service.

Note The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when button is pressed on the wiper

lever, or the button on the multifunction steering wheel. In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the maximum service intervals permitted page 367. If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehi- cles with fixed service intervals. For this reason we recommend that the service in- terval display be reset by a SEAT author- ised Dealer.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, the multifunction display can only be operat- ed with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.

84

Instruments and warning/control lamps

WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Never use the menus on the instrument panel display while the vehicle is in motion.

Note After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- tery, check the system settings. If the pow- er supply is interrupted, the system settings might be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the wiper lever

Fig. 79 Wiper lever: control keys.

As long as a priority 1 page 76 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button Fig. 79 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display Switch the ignition on. If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press button 1 ; if necessary, several times. To display the menus page 74 or to re- turn to the selection of menus from a menu or from an informative display, hold down the rocker button 2 . To change from one menu to another, press the upper or lower part of the rocker switch. To open the menu or the informative display shown, press button 1 or wait a few seconds until the menu or the informative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings In the menu displayed, press the upper or lower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re- quired menu option is checked. The option appears framed. Press button 1 to make the required modi- fications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Select Back on the corresponding menu to exit.

Note If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not

be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

Operation using the multifunction steering wheel

Fig. 80 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel: buttons to the menus and information displays on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 page 76 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 80.

Select a menu or an informative display Switch the ignition on.

85

Operation

If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press the button Fig. 80; if necessary, several times. To change menus, use buttons or Fig. 80. To open the menu or the information dis- played, press the button Fig. 80 or wait a few seconds until the menu or the informa- tive display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb- wheel of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 80 until the desired option of the menu is highlighted. The option appears framed. Press the button Fig. 80 to make the required modifications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Press the button or Fig. 80.

Button for the driver assistance systems*

Fig. 81 On the turn signal and main beam lev- er: button for driver assistance systems (de- pending on versions).

With the turn signal and main beam headlight lever button, you can activate or deactivate the driver assistance systems displayed in the Assistance systems menu.

Activate or deactivate a driver assistance system Press Fig. 81 1 or 2 briefly to open the Driving aids menu.

Select the driver assistance system and ac- tivate or deactivate it page 84. A mark in- dicates that driver assistance system is switched on. Afterwards, mark or confirm the selection with button on the windscreen wiper lever or button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel.

The driver assistance systems can also be switched on and off in the infotainment sys- tem, in the menu Vehicle settings page 89.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

Fig. 82 Related video

The control and warning lamps are indicators of warnings , faults or certain functions. Some control and warning lamps come on when the ignition is switched on, and switch off when the engine starts running, or while driving.

86

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Depending on the model, additional text messages may be viewed on the instrument panel display. These may be purely informa- tive or they may be advising of the need for action page 68, Instrument panel.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- times a symbol may be displayed on the in- strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor- mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on page 296.

Fault in the brake system page 296.

Fault in the steering system page 262.

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt page 15.

Press the foot brake page 278.

AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCR system page 339.

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor- mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn page 296.

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation page 301.

ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in Sport mode page 301.

Fault in the ABS page 301.

Rear fog light switched on page 117.

Fault in the emission control system page 341.

Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault in the management of the diesel engine page 341.

Fault in the petrol engine management page 341.

Particulate filter blocked page 341.

Fault in the steering system page 262.

Tyre monitor system page 364.

Fuel tank almost empty page 81.

Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR sys- tem page 339.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten- sioners page 23.

Front passenger front airbag is disa- bled page 23.

The front passenger front airbag is activa- ted page 23.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist) page 286.

Error in the lane assist warning system page 286.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle page 117.

Low engine oil level page 347.

Fault in the gearbox page 259.

Windscreen cleaning fluid too low page 126.

Other warning lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on page 117.

Trailer turn signals page 117.

Auto Hold activated page 300.

Press the foot brake page 253.

Cruise control (GRA) page 268; OR speed limited page 270; OR Adaptive cruise control (ACC) page 278.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist) page 286.

Main beam on or flasher on page 117.

87

Operation

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not properly closed page 72.

Engine cooling fluid page 82.

Engine oil pressure page 347.

Fault in the battery page 354.

Main beam assist (Light Assist) page 117.

Hill descent control (HDC) page 261.

Service interval display page 83.

Mobile telephone is connected via Blue- tooth page 231.

Mobile telephone battery charge status page 231.

Risk of freezing page 72.

Start-Stop system activated page 249.

Start-Stop system unavailable page 249.

Low consumption driving status page 73.

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ig- nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri- ous injuries may occur. Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- ble. A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- dent for the driver and for other road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers. Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool. In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injuries page 343.

88

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Easy Connect system

Introduction

The infotainment system brings together im- portant vehicle functions and systems into a single central control unit, e.g. menu settings, radio equipment and the navigation system.

General operating information The following section contains all of the rele- vant information for changing the settings in the Vehicle Settings menu. General infor- mation on the operation of the infotainment system, as well as on the warning and safety instructions that must be taken into account, is found in page 162

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could dis- tract you from traffic.

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 83 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 84 Easy Connect: Vehicle Menu.

Open the Vehicle settings menu Switch the ignition on. If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on. Press the Infotainment button and then the Vehicle Fig. 83 function button.

OR: Press the infotainment button to go to the Vehicle Fig. 84 menu. Press the SETTINGS function button to open the Vehicle settings menu.

To select a function in the menu, press the desired button.

89

Operation

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system Activation and deactivation of the traction control system (ASR) and the elec- tronic stability control (ESC) system, selecting the Sport / Off-road* mode of the electronic stability control (ESC Sport)

page 301

Tyres Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) page 364

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warning value page 362

Lights

Light assist Dynamic Light Assist, Light Assist, motorway function, turning-on time, headlamp range adjustment, automatic lights when raining, one-touch signalling, travel mode.

page 117

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls page 125

Coming Home/Leaving Home function Switch-on time of the Coming home and Leaving home functions page 122

Driver assis- tance

ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. page 277

Front Assist (emergency brake assistance system)

Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis- play page 273

Lane Assist (system warning you if you leave the lane) Activation and deactivation of lane departure warning, adaptive lane guidance page 285

Detection of traffic signs Display on the instrument panel, activation and deactivation of the speed warn- ing page 78

Trailer Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer), use to calcu- late the route, maximum speed for trailer page 325

Fatigue detection Activation and deactivation page 76

90

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Parking and ma- noeuvring

ParkPilot Automatic activation, front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound treble, adjust Infotainment volume

page 313, page 317

Auto Hold Switching on and off when starting off page 300

Electric parking brake Switching on and off automatically page 298

Braking while manoeuvring function Switching on and off page 316

Displaying the parking space Switching on and off

Ambient lighting Switching on and off, selecting brightness, colour, area or total page 125

Mirrors and windscreen wip- ers

Mirrors Synchronous adjustment, lower the passenger side mirror while reversing (kerb function), fold in after parking, exterior mirrors heating, dim when dark page 129

Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipers if raining, rear window wiping in re- verse gear page 126

Opening and closing

Electric windows Convenience opening, automatic closure in case of rain, automatic closure with central locking page 113

Central locking Unlocking doors, automatic lock/unlock when driving, Easy Open audible con- firmation, Easy Entry convenient entry function, automatic opening of the rear lid, interior monitoring

page 97

Instrument panel Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad- vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display, speed warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, reset data when setting off, reset data for total calculation, traffic signal detection

page 74

Date and time Time source, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format page 80

Units Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption, electric consumption, pressure

Service Vehicle ID number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service page 83

91

Operation

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Factory settings All Restore all settings

Individual Lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, background lighting, rear view mirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, instrument panel

When the function button check box is activa- ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those menus.

The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.

Multifunction steering wheel*

Operation of the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 85 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigation functions without needing to distract the driv- er.

92

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Turn Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn announcement volume

up/down.

A Press Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation

B a) Activate/deactivate voice control.b)

This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/next stationc).

Short press: Switch to the previous/next track. Long press: Fast rewind/for- wardd).

No function No active call: Radio/Me- dia functionality (except AUX) Active call: no function

No function for the other modes (navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel. This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).

G Colour instrument panel: switch to the previous menu. Monochrome instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

H Turn

Coloured instrument panel: List of stations available (only if the instrument panel is in audio menu).

Coloured instrument panel: next track (only if the instru- ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

There is no active call: Re- cent calls list. Active call: go to the call options list (call in standby, hang up, mute microphone, private number, etc.).

Active route: access the view to stop route guidance. No active route: list last destina- tions.

H Press Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data). c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

93

Operation

Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Turn Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn announcement volume

up/down.

A Press Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation.

B a) Enable/disable voice controlb). This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/next stationc).

Short press: Switch to the previous/next track. Long press: Fast rewind/for- wardd).

No function No active call: Radio/Me- dia functionality (except AUX) Active call: no function

No function for the other modes (navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

G Short pressb): Change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semicircular dials Long pressb): access the Personalised Profiles configuration view.

H Turn

List of sources available (audio/media).

List of sources available (audio/media). No function

There is no active call: Re- cent calls list. Active call: go to the call options list (call in standby, hang up, mute microphone, private number, etc.).

If there is a map on the Digital Scorecard: Zoom in-out (with and without active route). If there is no map on the Digital Panel: the map is transferred from the infotainment System display to the Digital Panel (with and without active route).

H Press No function No function No function No function Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

map on the DigitScorecard.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data). c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

94

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Related video

Fig. 86 Opening and closing

Vehicle key

Fig. 87 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key.

Fig. 88 Vehicle key with alarm button.

Key to the Fig. 87, Fig. 88 Unlock the vehicle Lock the vehicle Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button until all the turn signals on the vehicle flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it will lock again. In addition, the lamp on the key flashes. Folding the key shaft in and out Alarm button*. Only press in the event of an emergency! When the alarm button is pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn signals light up for a short time. Press again to disconnect.

With the vehicle key the vehicle may be locked or unlocked remotely page 97.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-

1

2

3

4

5

cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new battery is several metres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised page 97 or the battery changed page 96.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used.

Control lamp on the vehicle key When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, the control lamp flashes Fig. 87 (arrow) once briefly, but if the button is held down for a longer period the control lamp flashes sev- eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not light up when the button is pressed, replace the key's battery page 96.

Spare key To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle ID number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip which must be coded with the data from the vehicle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not contain a microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys which are specially cut for the vehicle.

95

Operation

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe- cialised workshop or an approved key service qualified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use page 97.

WARNING Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own. An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equip- ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergen- cy situation. Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect them from damage, impacts and humidity.

Note Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also possible even when you are outside the radius of action. Key operation can be greatly influenced by overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle working in the same range of fre- quencies, for example, radio transmitters or mobile telephones. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control. If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed or one of the central locking but- tons page 100 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking brief- ly disconnects as protection against over- loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock it if necessary. Spare remote control keys are available at your Technical Service, where they must be matched to the locking system. Up to five remote control keys can be used.

To change the battery

Fig. 89 Vehicle key: opening the battery com- partment cover.

Fig. 90 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- cle key, under a cover.

96

Opening and closing

Changing the battery Unfold the vehicle key blade page 95. Remove the cover from the back of the ve- hicle key Fig. 89 in the direction of the ar- row . Extract the battery from the compartment using a suitable thin object Fig. 90. Place the new battery in the compartment as shown Fig. 90, pressing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow . Fit the cover as shown Fig. 89, pressing it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di- rection to that shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.

CAUTION If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- place the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications. When fitting the battery, check that the polarity is correct.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries cor- rectly and with respect for the environ- ment.

Synchronize the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- ing the key. In this case, the key must be re- synchronised as described below:

Unfold the vehicle key blade page 95. If necessary, remove the cover from the driver door lever page 107. Press the button on the vehicle key. For this, it must remain with the vehicle. Open the vehicle within one minute using the key blade. The key has been synchron- ised. If necessary, fit the cap.

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when all the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking and ignition system, it may only be locked with the ignition off and the driver's door closed.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may run down and fail to start the motor.

WARNING The incorrect use of the central locking system may cause serious injuries. The central locking system will lock all doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can prevent any non-authorised individual from opening the doors and accessing the vehi- cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or accident, locked doors will complicate ac- cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas- sengers. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. The central locking button can be used to lock all the doors from within. Therefore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures. Depending on the time of the year, tem- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- cle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children. Never leave individuals locked in a closed and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle by themselves or get help.

97

Operation

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

From outside, using the vehicle key page 99. From outside with the Keyless Access page 100 system, From inside, by pushing the central locking button page 100.

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Security system Safe page 103 Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking Selective unlocking system Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system (Auto Lock) Emergency unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve- hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in- cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec- onds, it re-locks automatically.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle only When you lock the vehicle with the key, the doors and the rear lid are locked. When you open the door, you can either unlock only the driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select the required option, use Easy Connect* page 98.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)* The Auto Lock function locks the doors and the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle can also be unlocked via the central locking switch or by pulling one of the inside door handles.

The Auto Lock function can be activated and deactivated in the Easy Connect* page 98 system.

In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, the doors will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Turn signals The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one of the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed correctly.

Accidental lock-out The central locking system prevents you from being locked out of the vehicle in the follow- ing situations:

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the central locking switch page 100.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, when all the doors and the rear lid have been closed. This prevents the accidental locking of the vehicle.

Note Never leave any valuable items in the ve- hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe. If the LED on the driver door sill lights up for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked, the central locking system or anti- theft alarm* is not working properly. You should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Official Service or specialised workshop. The vehicle interior monitoring of the an- ti-theft alarm* system will only function as intended if the windows and the sunroof* are closed.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed in the Easy Connect* system.

98

Opening and closing

Unlocking doors Select: key > SETTINGS > Opening and closing > Central locking > Un- locking the doors.

You can choose to unlock all the doors or only the driver door when you unlock the vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, only the driver door is unlocked. If that button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the rear lid will be unlocked.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicle doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- mation signal* is heard.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock) Select: key > SETTINGS > Opening and closing> Central locking> Auto- matic locking.

If the function is activated, all the vehicle doors are locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph).

The doors unlock automatically when the key is removed from the ignition. In addition, you can unlock the doors by pressing central locking key page 100 or, individually, by operating the internal door handle (e.g. so that a passenger can get out).

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 91 Remote control key: buttons.

Lock: press the Fig. 91 button. Locking the vehicle without the Safe se- curity system: push the button again and hold for 2 seconds. Unlock: press the button. Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical- ly if you do not open one of the doors or the rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the car. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you press the button for at least one second.

Selective unlocking system The selective unlocking system allows you to only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank

flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain locked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap: Press (once) the button on the remote control key or turn the key once in the open- ing direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously: Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but- ton on the remote control key, or turn the key twice within 5 seconds in the opening direc- tion.

The Safe* security system and the anti-theft alarm* deactivate immediately when only the driver door is opened.

In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro- gramme the security central locking system directly page 98.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Lock- ing system Safe on page 104.

Note Do not use the remote control key until the vehicle is visible. Other functions of the remote control key page 113, Convenience open/close function.

99

Operation

Unlocking and locking from the in- side

Fig. 92 Driver's door: central locking switch.

Lock: press the Fig. 92 button. Unlock: press the Fig. 92 button.

Please note the following when using the central locking switch to lock your vehicle:

It is not possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). The LED in the central locking switch lights up when all the doors are closed and locked. You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac- cess and assistance.

WARNING The central locking switch also works with the ignition switched off, except when the safe system is activated. The central locking switch does not oper- ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside and the security system is switched on. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe- cially children, in the vehicle.

Note Your vehicle will lock automatically when it reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) (Auto Lock) page 98. You can unlock the vehicle again using the button on the central locking switch.

Related video Keyless Access

Fig. 93 Handsfree

Unlock and lock the vehicle with Keyless Access*

Fig. 94 Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 95 Door handle: sensor surfaces

Fig. 95 Unlocking sensor surface on the inside of the door handle. Locking sensor surface on the outside of the door handle.

A

B

100

Opening and closing

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. To do this, all that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in the detection area where you are attempting to access the vehicle Fig. 94 and to touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles Fig. 95 or operate the softtouch/han- dle on the rear lid page 108 .

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via the front doors only. When doing so, the re- mote control key must be no further than ap- prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key, e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can- not be opened again immediately. This will enable you to check that the doors are prop- erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre- sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec- essary adjustments can be made in vehicles with a driver information system page 89 page 74.

General information If a valid key is in the proximity of the car, Fig. 94 the Keyless Access locking and starting system gives the key entry as soon as

one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles is touched or the softtouch/handle on the rear lid is operated.

The following features are then available without having to use the vehicle key actively:

Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using the handles of the front doors or the soft- touch/handle on the rear lid. Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the sensor of the driver or passenger door han- dle. Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one foot below the rear bumper page 111. Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine with the starter button page 244.

The central locking and locking systems op- erate in the same way as a normal locking and unlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a double flash of the indicator lights; locking by a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and the rear lid are closed leaving the last key used inside the vehicle and none outside, the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve- hicle's indicator lights will flash four times. The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if you do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-Entry) Grip one of the front door handles. When you do this, you touch the sensor surface Fig. 95 A (arrow) of the handle and the vehicle unlocks. Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info- tainment system configuration, pulling the door handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the Safe security sys- tem: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit) Switch the ignition off. Close the driver's door. Touch (once) the locking sensor surface Fig. 95 B (arrow) on one of the front door handles. The door that is used must be closed.

In vehicles with the Safe security sys- tem: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit) Switch the ignition off. Close the driver's door.

101

Operation

Touch (once) the sensor surface Fig. 95 B (arrow) on one of the front door handles.

The vehicle locks with the Safe security sys- tem page 103. The door that is used must be closed. Touch (twice) the sensor surface Fig. 95 B (arrow) of one of the front door handles to

lock the vehicle without activating the Safelock security system page 103.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- id vehicle key in the proximity Fig. 94.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehicle with a second key If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and it is locked from the outside with a second ve- hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked for engine ignition page 244. In order to enable engine ignition, press the button on the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensors If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a long period of time, the proximity sensors on

the passenger doors are automatically disa- bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles is often activated in an unusual manner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity sensors are disabled for a certain period of time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

After a time. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ton on the key. OR: if the boot is opened. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with the key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection function* You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Access unlocking for one locking and unlock- ing cycle.

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- wise the vehicle cannot be locked. Close the door. Push the central locking button on the re- mote control and touch the locking sensor surface of the driver door handle Fig. 95 B within the following 5 seconds. Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the

vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also possible if the vehicle is locked through the drivers door lock. To check that the function has been deacti- vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull on the door handle. The door should not open.

The next time the door can only be unlocked via the remote control or the lock cylinder. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions To close all the electric windows and the sun- roof using the comfort function, keep a fin- ger for a few seconds on the locking sensor surface Fig. 95 B (arrow) of the door han- dle until the windows and roof have closed.

How the doors open when touching the sen- sor surface on the door handle will depend on the settings that have been activated in the infotainment system, using the button > SETTINGS > Opening and closing.

CAUTION The sensor surfaces on the door handles could engage if hit with a water jet or high pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. If at least one of the electric windows is open and the sensor surface Fig. 95 B (arrow) on one of the

102

Opening and closing

handles is activated continuously, all win- dows will close.

Note If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost or entirely out of charge, you will probably not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- cle can be unlocked or locked manually page 107. To control the proper locking of the vehi- cle, the release function is disabled for ap- prox. 2 seconds. If the message Keyless access system faulty is displayed on the screen of the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the operation of the Keyless Access system. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Depending on the function set on the in- fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte- rior mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle using the sensor surface on the driver and passenger door handles page 129. If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning will display on the dash panel screen. This

could happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mobile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an aluminium case). If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a layer of salt, the correct functioning of the sensors on the door handles may be affec- ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear stick is in position P. To improve the safety of your vehicle, the remote control of the system is equipped with a position sensor. If this remote control does not detect movement for a certain length of time, the system will conclude that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled.

Locking system Safe1)

When the vehicle is locked, the Safe securi- ty system puts the door handles out of opera- tion and makes it difficult for unauthorized people to enter. The doors cannot be opened from inside .

Depending on the vehicle, when switching the ignition off, a warning may be displayed on

the control panel screen stating that the Safe security system is activated.

Lock the vehicle and activate the Safe security system. Press the locking button once on the ve- hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the Safe system. Press the locking button on the vehicle key twice. On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system: touch the sensor surface on the outside part of the door handle twice.

When the Safe security system is disa- bled, the following needs to be taken into account: The vehicle can be opened and unlocked from the inside using an inside door handle. The anti-theft alarm is activated. The vehicle interior monitoring system and the anti-tow system are disabled.

Safe status The flashing frequency of the diode in the door sill immediately confirms the process. Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence

1) Available depending on market and version. 103

Operation

for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues flashing slowly.

WARNING Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the Safe security system* is activa- ted, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. The system will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned on when the vehicle is locked with the key. The system is immediately activated and the turn signal light located on the driver door will flash along with the turn signals, indicating that the alarm and the locking security sys- tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, they will not be included in the protection zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-

quently closed, they will be automatically in- cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle and the turn signals will flash accordingly when the doors close.

The turn signal light will flash twice on opening and deactivating the alarm. The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm? The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for about 30 seconds alongside a sound and optical (flashing) warning signals and will be repeated about ten times when the vehicle is locked and the following unauthorised ac- tions are attempted:

Opening a door that is mechanically un- locked using the vehicle key without switching on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer- tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is activated immediately on opening the door). A door is opened. Opening the bonnet. The rear lid is opened. When the ignition is switched on with a non- authorised key. Undue manipulation of the alarm. Disconnection of the vehicle battery.

Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring page 105). When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with anti-tow system page 105). When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with anti-tow system page 105). When the vehicle is transported on a ferry or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or vehicle interior monitoring page 105). When a trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button of the key. OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

If the drivers door is unlocked mechanically using the key, the key must be inserted into the ignition, and the ignition must be turned on within 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTION If the anti-theft security system is switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protection are automatically disconnected.

104

Opening and closing

Note After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the battery from ex- hausting if the vehicle has been left parked for a long period of time. The alarm system remains activated. If, after the audible warning goes off, an- other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered again. The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button . If the driver door is unlocked mechanical- ly with the key, only the driver door is un- locked, the rest of the doors remain locked. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - but not unlocked - and the central locking button will be activated. If the vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not operate correctly. Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason. The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active.

Interior monitoring and the anti- tow system*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- sound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched on. In order to activate it, all the doors and the rear lid must be closed.

If the Safe security system* page 103 is switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protection are automati- cally disconnected.

Activation It is automatically switched on when the anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation Open the vehicle with the key, either me- chanically or by pressing the button on the remote control. The time period from when the door is opened until the key is inserted in the contact should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. Press the button on the remote control twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors will be deactivated. The alarm system re- mains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system are automatically switched on again next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must be done each time that the vehicle is locked; if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system should be switched off if animals are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, their movements will trigger the alarm) or when, for example, the vehicle is transported or has to be towed with only one axle on the ground.

Deactivation through the infotainment system Turn off the ignition and select: key > SETTINGS > Opening and closing> Cen- tral locking > Interior monitoring. When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protec- tion are switched off until the next time the door is opened.

False alarms Interior monitoring will only operate correctly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- serve related legal requirements.

105

Operation

The following cases may cause a false alarm: Open windows (partially or fully). Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or completely). Movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items hanging from the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is activated without the volumetric sensor function, relocking will activate the alarm with all its functions, except the volumetric sensor. This function is reactivated when the alarm is switched on again, unless it is deliberately switched off. If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is different to the flash indicating the alarm is activated. The vibration of a mobile phone left in- side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in- terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors react to movements and shakes in- side the vehicle. If on activating the alarm, any door or the rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system will only be activated

once all the doors are closed (including the rear lid).

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man- ually and partially opened, for example if the key or the central locking is damaged.

WARNING Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury. If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get themselves to safety. Depending on the time of the year, tem- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- cle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING Getting in the way of the doors and the rear lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in- jury.

Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTION When opening and closing in an emergen- cy, carefully disassemble components and then reassemble them carefully to avoid damage to the vehicle.

106

Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking or locking of the drivers door

Fig. 96 Driver door handle: Concealed lock cylinder.

Fig. 97 Driver door handle: lever the cover off

If the central locking system should fail to op- erate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system page 104.

Unfold the vehicle key blade page 95. Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle Fig. 97 then remove the cover upwards. Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will not be triggered page 104. After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de- activates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft page 97.

Emergency lock of doors without lock cylinders

Fig. 98 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail to work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder will have to be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the front of the front passenger's door and the rear doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

Pull the cap out of the opening. Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side). Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can no lon- ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- rior door handle once to unlock and open the door.

107

Operation

Childproof locks

Fig. 99 Childproof lock on the left hand side door.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. This sys- tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- ted and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof lock.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, clockwise for the left hand side doors Fig. 99 and anti- clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti- vate.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise for the left hand side doors Fig. 99 and clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNING Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and closing of the rear lid can cause acci- dents and serious injury. The rear lid must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights. Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury! Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving.

Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid. Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi- soning! Never leave the vehicle unattended or al- low children to play inside or next to it, es- pecially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle can reach extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries, illness or even death.

CAUTION Before opening or closing the rear lid, make sure that there is enough space to open or close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a garage.

Note Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage compartment.

108

Opening and closing

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 100 Rear lid: handle

The rear lid opening system operates electri- cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressure on the handle Fig. 100.

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if it is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing To open: place slight pressure on the han- dle. The rear lid opens automatically. To close: hold one of the handles on the in- ner trim and close it by moving it downwards, or press the button on the rear lid* Fig. 101.

If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also locked.

Rear lid with electric opening and closing*

Fig. 101 Rear lid: button to close the rear lid.

Fig. 102 Centre console: button to open and close the rear lid.

Opening the rear lid Unlock the vehicle page 97 and briefly press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles with Keyless Access you can directly press the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un- locked if an authorised key is recognised in the proximity of the vehicle. OR: press the button on the centre console for at least one second Fig. 102. The but- ton also works when the ignition is switched off. OR: press and hold the button of the ve- hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doors remain locked). OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and sensor-controlled opening you can open the rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open page 111). The rear lid will be auto- matically opened.

Closing the rear lid Briefly press the button on the rear lid Fig. 101 in Introduction on page 108. OR: press the button located on the centre console until the rear lid is closed Fig. 102. OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press and hold the vehicle key button until the rear lid is closed, or move one foot into the

109

Operation

area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open) page 111. The key of the vehicle must not be further away than 1.5 m from the boot or inside the vehicle. OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc- tion of closing until it closes automatically. The rear lid goes down automatically to the final position and also closes automatically in Introduction on page 108.

Interrupting opening or closing After beginning to open or close the rear lid, the action can be halted by pressing one of the buttons.

Continue opening or closing the rear lid by hand. To do this, some force will have to be used.

If you press one of the buttons again, the rear lid will move again in the original direc- tion.

If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob- stacle during the automatic opening or clos- ing, opening or closing will be interrupted im- mediately. For the closing process, the rear lid opens again slightly.

Check why it has not been possible to open or close the rear lid. Try to open or close the rear lid again. If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or closed by hand using reasonable force.

Particular features if towing a trailer If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri- cally connected to a trailer page 325, the electric rear lid can only be opened or closed with the buttons on the rear lid itself.

Acoustic warnings Throughout the process of opening or closing the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard. Exception: when the rear lid is opened man- ually using the handle or the Easy Open func- tion with the movement of the foot or closed using the button on the rear lid itself Fig. 101.

Modifying and memorising the opening angle If the space behind or above the vehicle is less than the travel area of the rear lid, you can change the opening angle of the rear lid.

To memorise a new opening angle, the rear lid must be open at least halfway.

Interrupt the opening process in the desired position. Press the button Fig. 101 on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds.

The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa- tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.

Resetting and memorising the opening an- gle For the rear lid to reopen completely, the opening angle must be reset and memorised again.

Release the rear lid and open it to the memorised height. Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To do this, some force will have to be used. Press the button Fig. 101 on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds. This resets and memorises the factory-set opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.

Automatic protection against overheating If the system is operated repeatedly in a short space of time, it automatically switches off to prevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the function can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can only be opened and closed by hand using reason- able force.

If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is disconnected page 353 or the corre- sponding fuse burns out page 54, the sys- tem will have to be reset. This requires closing the rear lid completely once.

110

Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking page 112

WARNING If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open or, after opening, it may lower by itself due to the extra weight and cause serious in- jury. Do not open the rear lid when there is a lot of snow on it or when carrying a load (e.g. on a rack). Before opening the rear lid, remove the snow or the load.

Rear lid with sensor-controlled opening and closing (Easy Open)

Fig. 103 Rear lid with sensor-controlled open- ing (Easy Open).

If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock and open or close it moving one foot in the area of the sensors located under the rear bumper.

Switch the ignition off. Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the middle. With a brisk movement, bring your foot and lower leg as close as you can to the bumper. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to the upper sensor area and your foot must be close to the lower sensor area Fig. 103 1 . Quickly remove your foot and lower leg from the sensor areas Fig. 103 2 . The rear lid will be automatically opened. If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro- cedure after a few seconds.

The third brake light flashes once to show the boot has opened with the Easy Open func- tion.

The rear lid can be closed with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provi- ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of the rear lid).

When closed, the rear lid automatically locks if the vehicle has been locked beforehand and there is no valid key inside.

While the rear lid is in motion (either opening or closing), it can be stopped with another foot movement similar to the opening one

(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi- ty of the rear lid).

The Easy Open feature is not available or on- ly has limited availability in the following sit- uations (examples):

If the rear bumper is very dirty. If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g. after having driven on gritted roads. If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not covered. If the vehicle has been equipped at a later time with a tow bracket.

In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea- ture may take a little longer to open the boot or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. because of the running water.

The Easy Open function can be connected and disconnected permanently in the info- tainment system using the button > SET- TINGS > Opening and closing page 89.

WARNING If there is a valid key in the proximity of the rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func- tion may be accidentally activated and the rear lid will open, for example, when sweeping under the rear bumper, when di- recting a water jet or high pressure steam to the area or when carrying out

111

Operation

maintenance work or repairs in that area. If accidentally opened, the rear lid could in- jure somebody situated in its area of oper- ation or cause material damage. Therefore, always make sure that there is no unsupervised valid key in the area near the rear lid. Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work on the vehicle, always disable the Easy Open feature via the infotainment system. Before washing the vehicle, always disa- ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain- ment system. Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail- er, page 325, always disable the Easy Open feature via the infotainment system.

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 104 Detail of the luggage compartment: access to emergency unlocking.

Fig. 105 Detail of the luggage compartment: emergency unlocking

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in the event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart- ment allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug- gage compartment Remove the cover using the key blade as a lever Fig. 104. Insert the key blade into the slot and move the key in the direction of the arrow until the lock unlocks Fig. 105.

Window controls

Electrically opening and closing the windows

Fig. 106 Detail of the driver's door: window controls.

Opening the window: press the button . Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver door Window on the front left door Window on the front right door Window on the rear left door Window on the rear right door Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

112

Opening and closing

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using the controls on the driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended .

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passen- ger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch * The safety control Fig. 106 5 on the driver door can be used to disable the electric win- dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel- low if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off.

Convenience open/close function The electric windows can be opened or closed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening: Press and hold the button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sun- roof* have reached the desired position. OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but- ton on the remote control key and then keep the key in the driver door lock until all the win- dows and the sunroof* have reached the re- quired position.

Convenience closing: Press and hold button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sun- roof* are closed . OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock" position until all the windows and the sunroof* are closed.

During convenience closing, first the windows and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.

Different settings can be changed using the Easy Connect system. Select: key > SET- TINGS > Opening and closing > Elec- tric windows > Comfort opening.

One-touch opening and closing The one-touch automatic opening and clos- ing is used to open or close the windows completely. It will not be necessary to hold the button of the corresponding electric win- dow.

For the automatic raising function: pull the button for the corresponding window up- wards until it reaches the second position.

For the automatic lowering function: pull the button for the corresponding window up- wards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull on the button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing The one-touch opening and closing function is not active after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or is flat and will have to be reset.

Pull the button of the corresponding win- dow and hold it for one second in this posi- tion. Release the button and pull upwards and hold again. The one-touch function is now ready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windows can be reinitialised individually or several at a time.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Intro- duction on page 106. Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.

113

Operation

Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window. If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows. The doors can be locked using the re- mote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened. If necessary, use the safety switch to dis- able the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled. For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close func- tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the windows when pressing the button to close them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is released.

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will automatically open again page 114. If this happens, check why the

window could not be closed before at- tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- jury when the electric windows close.

If a window is obstructed when closing au- tomatically, the window stops at this point and lowers immediately . Next, check why the window does not close before attempting it again. If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes again with difficulty or there is an obstruction, the automatic closing will stop working for 10 seconds. If the window is still obstructed, the window will stop at this point. If there is no obvious reason why the win- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- back function is now deactivated. If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Elec- trically opening and closing the windows on page 113. The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al- so has a sun blind.

The sunroof only works when the ignition is switched on. Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

WARNING If the sunroof is used negligently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury. Open or close the sunroof and the sun blind only when no one is in their path of movement.

114

Opening and closing

Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting. Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle, espe- cially if they have access to the vehicle key. If using they key unattended, they could lock the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition and activate the sun- roof. After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sunroof during a short space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION To prevent damage, during winter tem- peratures remove any ice or snow that might be on the car roof before opening the sunroof or adjusting the tilt position. Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the sunroof open or in a tilted position, water can enter the interior and can cause con- siderable damage to the electrical system. As a result, other damage can occur in the vehicle.

Note Leaves and other loose objects that ac- cumulate on the sunroof rails should be regularly cleaned away either by hand or with a vacuum.

If the sunroof does not work correctly, the anti-trap function will not work either. Con- tact a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 107 On the interior roof lining: sunroof but- ton.

The sun blind automatically opens along with the sunroof if completely closed or if in front of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the previous position and does not automatically close with the sunroof. The sun blind can only be closed completely once the sunroof has been closed.

The button Fig. 107 has two levels. The first level switches the sunroof to the tilted po- sition, opening or closing it fully or partially.

On the second level, the sunroof automati- cally moves to the corresponding final posi-

tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat- ing the button again stops the automatic function.

Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof Press the rear part of the button B to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press the rear part of button B to the second level.

Closing the sunroof from a tilted position Press the front part of the button A to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press the front part of the button A to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation by ad- justing the tilted position of the sunroof or by closing the sunroof Press button A or B again.

Opening the sunroof Press button C backwards to the first level. Automatic function to the comfort position: briefly press button C backwards to the sec- ond level.

Closing the sunroof Press button D forwards to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press button D forwards to the second level.

115

Operation

Stopping the automatic operation during the opening or closing Press button C or D again.

Opening and closing the sunshade blind

Fig. 108 On the interior roof lining: sunshade blind buttons.

The electrical sun blind works when the igni- tion is switched on.

When the sunroof is in its most tilted position, the sun blind automatically goes into a venti- lation position. The sun blind remains in this position also with the sunroof closed.

Buttons Fig. 108 1 and 2 have two lev- els. The first level opens or closes the sun blind fully or partially.

By briefly pressing the button to the second level, the sun blind automatically moves to

the corresponding final position. Activating the button again stops the automatic func- tion.

Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sun blind for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

Opening the sun blind Press button 1 to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press button 1 to the second level.

Closing the sun blind Press button 2 to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press button 2 to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation during the opening or closing Press button 1 or 2 again.

Note When the sunroof is open, the electric sun blind can only be closed to the front edge of the sunroof.

Convenience function to open or close the sunroof*

Fig. 109 Door handle: sensor surface.

The sunroof can be opened and closed with the convenience function, just like the win- dows.

Using the door lock* Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the unlocking or locking posi- tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po- sition. Release the key to interrupt this func- tion.

Using the remote control Keep the locking or unlocking button press- ed to open or close the roof. If you release the button is the opening or closing will stop.

116

Lights

Using the Keyless Access* system (only closing) Press and hold the locking sensor surface Fig. 109 (arrow) on the door handle to close the sunroof. If you release the sensor surface, the closing movement stops.

Anti-trap function of the panoramic sunroof and sunshade

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of injury when closing the sunroof and the sun blind . If the sunroof or sun blind encoun- ter resistance or an obstacle when closing, they reopen immediately.

Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not close. Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again. If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed due to an obstacle or some resistance, it stops at the corresponding position and then opens. For automatic closing, a new closing attempt might take place. If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to close, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function Sunroof: within approximately 5 seconds of having activated the roll-back function, press

the button Fig. 107 to the second level in the direction of arrow Fig. 107 D until the sunroof closes completely. Sunshade blind: within approximately 5 seconds of having activated the anti-trap function, press button Fig. 108 2 until the sun blind closes completely. The sunroof or sun blind close without the anti-trap function intervening! If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function can cause serious inju- ries. Always be careful when closing the sun- roof and sun blind. No person should ever remain in the way of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when closing without the anti-trap function. The anti-trap function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body from be- coming trapped against the roof frame and injuries occurring.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Related video

Fig. 110 Lights and visi- bility

Fig. 111 Vehicle lights

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on page 119. 117

Operation

It lights up

Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on page 123.

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on page 120.

It lights up

The Light Assist system is on page 121.

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Headlight switch

Fig. 112 Dash panel: lights control.

Turn the switch to the required position Fig. 112.

Sym- bol

Ignition switch- ed off

Ignition is switched on

Fog lights, dipped beam and side lights off.

Daylight running lights switched on.

The Coming home, Leaving home and Wel- come lights may be switched on.

Automatic control of dipped beam and daytime run- ning light.

Side light on. Daylight running lights switched on.

Dipped beam head- light off

Dipped beam switched on.

The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all situations.

Automatic dipped beam headlight control * The automatic dipped beam control is merely intended as an aid and is not able to recog- nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instrument panel and switch lighting switch on automatically in the following situations :

The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex- ample, when driving through a tunnel. They switch off when adequate lighting is detec- ted. The rain sensor detects rain and activates the wipers. They switch off when the wipers have not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights consist of individu- al lights, integrated in the front headlights. These lights come on when the daytime run- ning lights are switched on. On vehicles equipped with LED tail lights, the rear side light is switched on as well .

The daytime running lights turn on every time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in

118

Lights

position or , according to the level of ex- terior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a light sensor automatically switches dipped beam on and off (including the control and instru- ment lighting) or the daytime running lights depending on the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light* The motorway light is available on vehicles equipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected and disconnected via the corresponding Easy Connect system menu.

Activation: when going above 110 km/h (68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip- ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- er's visibility distance. Deactivation: when reducing the speed of the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dipped beam immediately returns to its nor- mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver that the lights have not been switched off If the key is not in the ignition and the driver door is open, an audible warning signal is heard in the following cases: this will remind you to turn the light off.

When the parking light is on page 120.

When the light switch is in position or .

WARNING If the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, accidents may occur. The automatic dipped beam control ( ) only switches on the dipped beam when there are changes in light conditions but not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNING The side lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor. Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weather or lighting conditions. On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, when activating the daytime running light the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi- cle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibility.

WARNING If the headlights are set too high and not used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or

distracting other road users. This could re- sult in a serious accident. Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.

Note The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be observed. The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.

Fog lights

Fig. 113 Dash panel: lights control.

The warning lamps or also show, on the light switch or instrument panel, when the front fog lights are on.

119

Operation

Turning on the front fog lights* : pull the light switch out to its first click position Fig. 113 1 , from positions , or . Turning on the rear fog light : pull the light switch fully out 2 from position , or . To switch off the fog lights, press the light switch or turn it to position .

Note The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 114 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parking light (ignition switched off).

1

Left turn light or left-hand parking light (ignition switched off). Main beam on: control lamp lit up on the instrument panel. Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con- trol lamp lit up.

Push the lever all the way down to turn off the corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals When the ignition is switched on, move the lever as far as possible upwards or down- wards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

The convenience turn signal can be activated and deactivated in the Easy Connect system using the key > SETTINGS > Lights > Light assistant > Convenience turn signal page 89.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond- ing menu, this function can be deactivated in a specialised workshop.

Parking light The parking lights will only work with the igni- tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning will sound while the driver door is open.

Switch the ignition off. Move the turn signal lever up or down.

2

3

4

When the parking light is switched on, the front side light and the tail light on the corre- sponding side of the vehicle turn on.

Parking light on both sides Switch the ignition off. Place the light switch in position . Lock the vehicle from the outside.

In doing so, only the side lights of both head- lights light up, and additionally the tail lights will do so partially.

WARNING Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or forgetting to deactivate them can con- fuse other road users. This could result in a serious accident. Always give warning when you are going to change lane, overtake or when turning, activating the turn signal in good time. As soon as you have finished changing lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn signal off.

WARNING Incorrect use of the headlights may cause accidents and serious injury, as the main beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

120

Lights

Note If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This is intended as a re- minder to switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to leave the parking light on. If the convenience turn signals are oper- ating (three flashes) and the other conven- ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- tive part stops flashing and only flashes once in the new part selected. The turn signal only works when the igni- tion is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switch- ed off. If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash at double speed. The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. In cold or damp weather conditions, the headlights, tail lights and turn signals may mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle lighting system. The parking light does not activate auto- matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig- nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec- ted.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist acts within the limits of the system and depending on environmental and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the system is activated as of a speed of about 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below about 30 km/h (18 mph) .

When the system is activated and the cam- era detects other vehicles that may be daz- zled, the main beam is automatically switch- ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati- cally switched on.

The main beam assist generally detects illu- minated areas and deactivates the main beam when passing through a town, for ex- ample.

Switching the main beam assist on Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch to the position . From the base position, press the turn signal and main beam headlights lever forwards Fig. 114 3 When the lamp is displayed on the instrument panel display, the main beam assist is switched on.

Switching the main beam assist off Turn the light switch to a position other than page 118.

OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turn signal light and main beam headlights lever forwards Fig. 114 4 . OR: push the turn signal and main beam headlight lever forwards to manually turn on the main beam. The main beam assist will then be deactivated.

Malfunctions The following conditions may prevent the main beam headlight control from turning off the headlights in time or from turning off alto- gether:

In poorly lit towns with highly reflective signs. Other insufficiently lit road users (such as pedestrians or cyclists). On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps) and when oncoming vehicles are partially obscured. When the drivers of other oncoming vehi- cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard rail in the centre of the road. If the camera is damaged or the power supply is cut off. In fog, snow and heavy rain. With dust and sand turbulence. With loose gravel in the field of vision of the camera.

121

Operation

When the field of vision of the camera is misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow, ice, etc.

WARNING The convenience features of the main beam assist should not encourage the tak- ing of risks. The system is not a replace- ment for driver concentration. You are always in control of the main beam and adapting it to the light, visibility and traffic conditions. It is possible that the main beam head- light control does not recognise all driving situations and is limited under certain cir- cumstances. When the field of vision of the camera is dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the main beam control may be affected. This also applies when changes are made to the vehicle lighting system, for example, if additional headlights are installed.

CAUTION To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- tem, take the following points into consid- eration: Clean the field of vision of the camera regularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the camera.

Check that the windscreen is not dam- aged in the area of the field of vision of the camera.

Note Main beam and headlight flasher can be turned on and off manually at any time with the turn signal and main beam lever page 120.

Fog lights with cornering light func- tion*

The cornering light function is an additional function to the dipped beam headlights to improve lighting of the side of the road when taking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when the dipped beam headlights are already on and it is activated when driving at speeds below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the steering wheel is turned or the turn signal is switched on, the front fog light grad- ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering light function is gradually switched off. When engaging reverse gear, both front fog lights turn on.

Coming home and Leav- ing home function

The Coming home and Leaving home function lights up the vehicles immediate proximity when getting into and out of it in the dark. When switched on, the front position and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li- cense plate light come on.

The Leaving Home is controlled by a photo- sensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain- ment system you can adjust the duration of the light switch-off delay, and activate and deactivate the function.

Activating the Coming Home function For vehicles with light and rain sensors. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition with the light switch in posi- tion page 118. The automatic Coming Home function is only active when the light sensor detects darkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors. Switch the ignition off. Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home lighting comes on. The delay in

122

Lights

switching off the headlights is counted from when the last door or boot hatch is closed.

The Coming Home lighting turns off in the following cases: Automatically, once the headlight turn off delay has elapsed. Automatically, when a vehicle door or the rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting the engine. When the rotary light switch is turned to po- sition page 118. With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the Leaving Home function Unlock the vehicle using the remote control. The Leaving Home function is only activa- ted when the light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases: Automatically, when the Leaving Home delay period ends (default 30 sec). When the vehicle is locked using the remote control. When the light switch is turned to position .

With the ignition is switched on.

Welcome light*1)

The welcome light is a light located on the exterior mirrors, focused on the ground, which activates or deactivates if the light switch is in the position and the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is turned on or off.

Note To activate the Coming Home and Leav- ing Home function, the rotary light switch must be in position and the light sensor must detect darkness.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 115 Dash panel: hazard warning lights switch

The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehi- cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the electronic parking brake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; for an automatic gearbox, move the gear lever to P.

1) Valid for vehicles with a light and rain sensor and full-LED headlights.

123

Operation

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

Emergency braking warning If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times per second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off automatically when the vehicle starts to move again.

WARNING The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz- ard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle. Due to the high temperatures that the catalytic converter can reach, never park in an area where the catalytic converter

could come into contact with highly inflam- mable materials, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time, even if the ignition is switched off. The use of the hazard warning lights de- scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- utory requirements.

Light range control

Fig. 116 Next to the steering wheel: headlight range control.

The headlight range control Fig. 116 is modified according to the value of the head- light beam and the vehicle load status. This offers the driver optimum visibility and the

headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers .

The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch Fig. 116:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart- ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart- ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart- ment full. With trailer and minimum drawbar load.

Driver only, luggage compartment full With trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

OR: Through the Easy Connect system, with but- ton > SETTINGS > Light > Headlight range control page 89).

Setting 0 Two front occupants, luggage com- partment empty

Setting 1 All seats occupied, luggage compart- ment empty

124

Lights

Setting 2 All seats occupied, luggage compart- ment full. With trailer and minimum drawbar load.

Setting 3 Driver only, luggage compartment full Driving with trailer and maximum drawbar load.

Dynamic headlight range control The control is not mounted in vehicles with dynamic headlight range control. The head- light range is automatically adjusted accord- ing to the vehicle load status when they are switched on.

WARNING Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that the headlights dazzle and distract oth- er drivers. This could result in a serious ac- cident. Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load status so that it does not blind other driv- ers.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights is asymmetric: the side of the road on which you are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a country that drives on the right travels to a country that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-

mally necessary to cover part of the head- light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad- justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certain light values that must be complied with for designated points of the light distribution. This is known as Tourist light.

The light distribution of the halogen and full- LED headlights allows the specific tourist light values to be met without the need for stickers or changes in the settings.

Note Tourist light is only allowed temporarily. If you are planning a long stay in a country that drives on the other side, you should take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel, displays and switches

Depending on the model, the lighting of the instrument panel and switched can be adjus- ted in the Easy Connect system, using the button > SETTINGS page 89.

With the ignition on and without light activa- tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting remains activated in daytime light conditions. The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving through a tunnel without the function ac- tive, the instrument panel lighting may even switch off. The objective of this function is to provide the driver with a visual indication that he or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the following message will appear Turn on the lights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 117 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of the passenger compartment.

125

Operation

Knob Function

Turns off the interior lights.

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Central po- sition

or

a)

Door contact connection. The interior lights come on automati- cally when you unlock the vehicle, open a door or remove the key from the ignition. The light goes out a few seconds after closing all the doors, when locking the vehicle or connecting the ignition.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

a) Depending on version.

Glove compartment and luggage com- partment lighting* When opening and closing the glove com- partment on the front passenger side and the rear lid, the respective light will automatically switch on and off.

Footwell lighting* The lights in the footwell area below the dash (driver and front passenger sides) will switch on when the doors are opened and will de- crease in intensity while driving. This intensity setting can be changed through the infotain- ment system menu (key > SETTINGS > Light> Interior lighting page 89 ).

Ambient light* The ambient light lights up the area of the centre console and the footwell area and, depending on the version, the front door pan- els as well.

The brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as can colour, in versions with lighting on the front door panel (button > SETTINGS > Ambient lighting page 89).

Note Depending on the features fitted in the vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following interior lights: front vanity mirror light, rear vanity mirror light, footwell light, sun blind and glove compartment light. The reading lights switch off when the ve- hicle is locked using a key or after several minutes if the key is removed from the igni- tion. This prevents the battery from dis- charging.

Visibility

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 118 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper.

More the lever to the required position:

0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals. Use control Fig. 118 A to set the in- terval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

126

Visibility

More the lever to the required position:

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold the lever down for more time to in- crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreen washer function is activated by push- ing the lever towards the steering wheel, and the wipers operate simulta- neously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wip- er will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti- vated by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNING In cold conditions you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.

CAUTION If the ignition is switched off with the wind- screen wipers active, they complete their wipe before returning to the rest position. When switching the ignition back on, the windscreen wiper will continue to operate at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

er obstacles on the windscreen may dam- age the wiper and the windscreen wiper motor. If necessary, remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before starting your journey. Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip- ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de- icer spray for this operation. Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the windscreen wipers while dry can cause damage. In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in service position page 46.

Note The windscreen and window wipers only function when the ignition is switched on and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are closed. The interval wipe speed varies according to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is moving, the more often the windscreen is cleaned. The rear wiper is automatically switched on when the windscreen wiper is on and the car is in reverse gear.

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ- ent situations If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi- tion temporarily moves to the previous posi- tion. The air conditioner comes on for approxi- mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode when the windscreen washer is activated, to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash- er fluid entering the inside the vehicle. When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary according to the speed. The higher the vehi- cle speed the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets* The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does not thaw the water in the washer hoses. When the ignition is switched on the heated windscreen washer jets automatically adjust the heat depending on the ambient tempera- ture.

Headlight washer system* The headlight washer cleans the glass of the headlights and only works when the dipped beam headlights are on. After switching on the ignition, the headlights are also washed when the automatic wiper is activated for the first time and then every fifth time.

127

Operation

Regularly clean dirt that has become encrus- ted on the headlights, e.g., remains of insects.

To ensure the headlight washers work cor- rectly in winter, clean away any snow that may be present on the jet covers located on the bumper. If necessary, remove ice with an anti-ice spray.

Note The wiper will try to wipe away any ob- stacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper back on again. If you stop the vehicle with the wind- screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto- matically change to a lower position speed. The set speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls away. The windscreen will be wiped again ap- proximately 5 seconds after the wind- screen washer has been activated, provi- ded the vehicle is moving (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec- onds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without performing the last wipe. For the drip function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and then on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 119 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

Fig. 120 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain . The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Manual wipe page 126.

Move the lever to the required position Fig. 119:

Rain sensor off. Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- sary. Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor Set control to the right: high sensitivity. Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts operating again when the windscreen wipers are in position 1 and the vehicle is travelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

Modified behaviour of the rain sensor Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- ings on the sensitive surface Fig. 120 of the rain sensor include:

Damaged wipers: a film of water on the damaged blades may lengthen the activa- tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re- sult in a fast and continuous wipe. Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger the windscreen wiper. Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on the roads may cause an excessively long wipe when the windscreen is almost dry. Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or make it react more slowly, later or not at all.

0

1

A

128

Visibility

Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re- duction in the sensitive surface area and adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sensor will vary with the size of the damage caused by the stone.

WARNING The rain sensor may not detect enough rain to switch on the wipers. If necessary, switch on the wipers man- ually when water on the windscreen ob- structs visibility.

Note Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sensor regularly and check the blades for damage Fig. 120 (arrow). To remove wax and coatings, we recom- mend a window cleaner containing alco- hol. Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sensor disruption or faults.

Mirrors

Interior mirror anti-dazzle function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz- zle function* The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- matically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNING In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- id may leak. This could cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you come into contact with this liquid, it must be rinsed with large quantities of water. If necessary, get medial help.

CAUTION In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur- faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possible.

Note If the light incident in the interior rear vi- sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror with automatic setting will not operate per- fectly. When the interior lights are on or reverse gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle position. If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti- dazzle function from working well or even from working at all.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 121 Detail of the driver's door: control for the exterior mirror.

129

Operation

Turn the control to the corresponding posi- tion:

Turning the knob to the desired position, adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired. Depending on the equipment fitted on the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated according to the outside temperature. Folding in mirrors.

Synchronized regulation of the exterior mirrors Select in the Easy Connect system menu > Settings > Mirrors and wipers > Rearview mirrors if the exterior mirrors have to be adjusted in a synchronised man- ner.

Turn the knob to position L1). Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised). If necessary, correct the right-hand rear- view mirror: rotate the control to position R1).

L/R

Tilt function for front passenger exterior mirror* When parking backwards, and in order to be able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir- ror can be automatically tilted towards the passenger to provide a better view of the kerb. The control must be in the position R1)

for this feature to be operational.

The mirror returns to its original position as soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re- turns to its original position if the position of the control is adjusted.

Storing the rear view mirror settings for the tilt function Switch the ignition on. Using the Easy Connect system, button > SETTINGS > Mirrors and wipers > Mir- rors select Lower while reversing page 89. Select the R1) position on the control. Select reverse gear. Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb area well. Release the reverse gear.

The adjusted position for the rear view mir- ror is stored.

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the vehicle* Using the Easy Connect system, button > SETTINGS > Mirrors and wipers > Mir- rors can be selected to fold the outside mir- rors when parking and to lock the vehicle page 89.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au- tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are deployed automatically.

WARNING Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give a larger field of vision. However, they make objects look smaller and further away than they really are. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNING Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking care to avoid injuries.

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym- metrical.

130

Visibility

Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror when there is no-one in the way of the mir- ror. When moving the mirror, take care not to trap fingers between the mirror and the mirror bracket.

CAUTION If one of the mirror housings is knocked out of position (e.g. when parking), the mir- rors must first be fully retracted with the electric control. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function. Before washing the vehicle in an auto- matic car wash, please make sure to re- tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. Electrically retracta- ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand. Always use the electrical power control.

Note If the electrical adjustment should fail to operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus- ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass. The fold-in function on the exterior mir- rors will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h (25 mph).

Sun protection

sun blind

Fig. 122 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas- senger sun visors Lower the sun visor towards the wind- screen. The sun visor can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards the door Fig. 122 1 . Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi- tudinally backwards.

There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a cover. When the cover is opened 2 a light comes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up.

WARNING Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use.

Note The light above the sun visor automatically switches off after a few minutes in certain conditions. This prevents the battery from discharging.

131

Operation

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

Related video

Fig. 123 Vehicle interior

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Fig. 124 Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and move the seat. The seat must engage when the lever is released! Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from its home position. Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. Lumbar support: move the lever until the required position is achieved.

WARNING Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac- cidents and severe injuries. Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary, as the seats could move unex- pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur- thermore, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat. Adjust the height, position and inclination of the front seats only when their move- ment area is empty. Make sure there are no objects in that area. Make sure that the movement and lock- ing areas of the seats are clean.

WARNING Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov- ers might cause an accidental activation of the electrical seat adjustment system and make it move unexpectedly while driving.

1

2

3

4

This might cause loss of control of the vehi- cle and thus accidents or injuries. More- over, the electrical components of the front seats might be damaged. Never attach or place seat upholstery or covers on the electric controls. Never use upholstery or seat covers that have not been explicitly authorised for the seats of the vehicle.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*

Fig. 125 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.

Adjust the lumbar support: press the but- ton according to the desired position. Seat forwards/backwards: press the but- ton forwards/backwards.

A

B

132

Seats and headrests

Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the button up/down. To adjust the angle of the seat cushion, press the front of the button up/down. Backrest further upright/further reclined: press the button forwards/backwards.

WARNING If the electric front seats are used negli- gently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury. The front seats can also be electrically adjusted when the ignition is switched off. Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle. In the event of an emergency, electrical adjustment can be stopped by pressing any control.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical compo- nents of the front seats, please refrain from kneeling on the seat or applying sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cush- ion and backrest.

Note It may not be possible to electrically ad- just the seat if the vehicle battery is very low.

C

If the engine is started while the seats are being electrically adjusted, the adjustment will stop.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas- sembly of the headrests are described below. Always make sure that the seats are correctly adjusted page 12.

All seats are equipped with a headrest. The central rear headrest is only intended for the central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do not install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrest Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short people Lower the headrest completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. In the lowest position, there may be a small distance be- tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall people Push the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNING If travelling with the headrests removed or improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres increases. Always travel with the headrest correctly installed and adjusted. To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in the event of an accident, adjust the head- rest correctly based on your height, always making sure that its upper edge is at the same height as the top of the head, but never below eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as possible and centred. Never adjust the headrest while the vehi- cle is in motion. Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the headrests are in the non-use position.

CAUTION When assembling and disassembling the headrests, do not let them meet the top lin- ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the front seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not, this could damage the vehicle.

133

Operation

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 126 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 127 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.

Adjusting the height of the headrests Grab the sides of the headrests with both hands and push upwards to the desired posi- tion. To lower it, repeat the same action, pressing the 1 Fig. 126 Fig. 127 button on the side.

The headrest must lock correctly in one po- sition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 128 Rear headrest: removal.

Removing and fitting the front headrests Move the headrest upwards until it arrives to the top. Press the side button Fig. 126 1 and re- move the headrest. To refit, insert the headrest into the holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it engages.

Removing the rear headrests To remove the headrest, the corresponding backrest must be partially folded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 135.

Move the headrest upwards until it arrives to the top. Press button Fig. 128 1 , while simulta- neously pressing on the security hole 2 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrest. Move the backrest until it engages properly in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 135.

Fitting the rear headrests To mount the external headrests, the corre- sponding backrest must be partially folded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 135. Insert the headrest bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It should not be possible to remove the headrest from the backrest. Move the backrest until it engages properly in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 135.

WARNING Remove the rear headrests only when it is necessary to fit a child seat. After removing a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

134

Seats and headrests

Seat functions

Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest

Fig. 129 Rear seat: folding the backrest.

Fig. 130 In the luggage compartment: levers for remote release of the left part 1 and right part 2 of the rear seat backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each part can be lowered forward separately to extend the luggage compartment.

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the unlock button Push the headrest down as far as it will go page 133. Pull the unlock button Fig. 129 1 for- ward and lift the backrest at the same time. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button 2 is visible.

Folding down the backrest from the boot with the unlocking levers Push the headrest down as far as it will go page 133. Open the rear lid page 108. Pull the unlocking lever Fig. 130 of the part of the backrest to fold down. The corresponding part of the backrest will be unlocked or will be folded forward. If necessary, close the rear lid page 108.

Folding up the rear seat backrest Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the lock until it engages . It should not be possible to see the red mark of the unlock button 2 . Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.

The backrest must be properly engaged. If necessary, adjust the headrest.

WARNING Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. When folding down the rear seat, always make sure there are no people or animals in the backrest area. Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest while driving. Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest. When lowering or lifting the rear seat backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of its path. For the rear seat belts to offer the neces- sary protection all the parts of the rear backrest must be properly engaged. This is particularly important in the case of the centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose backrest is not properly engag- ed they will be thrown forwards, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sud- den driving or braking manoeuvre. When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is not properly engaged nobody else can travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child).

135

Operation

CAUTION Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- cle and other objects if the rear seat back- rest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. Before folding the rear seat backrest for- ward, always adjust the front seats so that neither the headrests nor the cushions of the rear backrest can hit them. Before folding the rear seat backrest, al- ways make sure there are no objects in the movement area of the backrest.

Front centre armrest

Fig. 131 Front centre armrest

To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards in the direction of the arrow Fig. 131, setting by setting.

To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest position. Then lower it down.

To move the armrest horizontally, move it for- ward Fig. 131 or backward as much as pos- sible in the direction of the corresponding ar- row.

WARNING The front centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries. Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Never let anyone sit on the centre arm- rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even a child. This position is incorrect and may cause severe injuries.

Transport and practical equipment

Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage in the vehicle, in a trailer page 325 and on the roof page 143. When doing so, please consider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly as possible. Always place equipment and heavy ob- jects in the boot . Position heavy items in the boot as far for- ward as possible. Take into account the maximum authorised weight per axle, as well as the maximum au- thorised weight of the vehicle page 383. Secure the objects to the fastening rings of the boot using appropriate chains or belts page 140. Also place small objects safely. Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into account the pressure adhesive of the tyres page 360.

136

Transport and practical equipment

In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys- tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa- ry page 364.

WARNING Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri- ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. Partic- ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy- ing and they are thrown across the inside of the vehicle. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: Place all objects inside the vehicle safe- ly. Secure all objects, little and large. Place the objects in the cabin in such a way that they can never reach the airbag deployment areas while the vehicle is in motion. Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Place the objects in such a way that they never force any occupant of the vehicle to sit in an incorrect position. When transporting objects that take up a seat, never let anyone use that seat. Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects loose in open storage compartment of the vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat or on the dashboard. Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin and store them safely.

WARNING The transport of heavy object changes ve- hicle handling and increases braking dis- tance. Heavy objects that are not properly placed or secured may cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries. Never put too much load in the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour and brak- ing ability. When transporting heavy objects, the driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due to the displacement of the centre of gravi- ty. Always distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly and horizontally as possible. Always place heavy objects in the boot before the rear axle and as far away from it as possible. Objects in the luggage compartment that are unsecured could move suddenly and modify the handling of the vehicle. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual.

WARNING Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- pecially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death. Close and lock all the doors and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTION Electrical wires or, depending on the fea- tures, the antenna embedded into the rear windows could be damaged, even irrepara- bly, if they are in contact with objects.

Note Straps for securing the load to the fasten- ing rings are commercially available from accessory shops.

137

Operation

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 132 In the luggage compartment: remov- ing and fitting the shelf.

Fig. 133 In the luggage compartment: remov- ing and fitting the shelf.

Removing Detach the cord loops Fig. 132 B from their hooks A .

Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- ports Fig. 133 by pulling it upwards and then take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un- der the luggage compartment double floor page 138.

Fitting Insert the cover horizontally so that the re- cess fits onto the axis of the supports Fig. 133 and press down until it engages. Hook the loops Fig. 132 B to the rear lid.

WARNING Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car- ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in- jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob- jects or in bags on the rear shelf. Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted. An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not cor- rectly seated and it may be bent or dam- aged. If the luggage compartment is overloa- ded, remove the tray.

Note Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment cover, rear visibility is not reduced.

Store the rear shelf

Fig. 134 In the luggage compartment: covers for storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 135 In the luggage compartment: fitting the rear shelf.

138

Transport and practical equipment

Depending on the equipment, once the lug- gage compartment shelf has been removed, it can be stored under the boot floor.

Remove the left and right covers Fig. 134. Place the rear shelf in the corresponding housing Fig. 135. Put the left and right covers in their original position.

Variable luggage compartment floor

Fig. 136 Variable luggage compartment floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 137 Variable luggage compartment floor: inclined position.

Variable floor in high position To move from the low position to the high position, lift the floor using the handle Fig. 136 1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position To move from the high position to the low position, lift the floor using the handle Fig. 136 1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . Now let the front part fall to the floor and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest; lower the floor at the same time with the handle 1 .

139

Operation

Variable floor in the tilted position When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit area.

Lift the variable floor in the high position us- ing handle Fig. 136 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until it folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself. Rest the floor on its housings Fig. 137 (ar- rows).

Variable floor with folded seats To move from the high position to the low position, lift the floor using the handle Fig. 136 1 and pull it back a little. Push the variable floor towards the folded rear seats with the handle 1 using some downward pressure so that the moving part of the floor is flush with the backs of the rear seats.

WARNING Always secure objects, even when the luggage compartment floor is properly lif- ted. Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor.

Only objects that do not weigh than ap- proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage com- partment floor.

CAUTION The maximum weight that can be loaded on the luggage compartment variable floor in the top position is 100 kg. Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 138 In the luggage compartment: fasten- ing rings.

There are fastening rings Fig. 138 on the front and rear of the boot to secure loose ob-

jects and luggage with fastening belts and cords.

In order to use the fastening rings, they must be lifted beforehand.

WARNING If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be launched across the passen- ger compartment and cause serious or fa- tal injuries. Always use belts or straps that are suita- ble and in good condition. Tighten the belts and straps in a cross layout over the load placed on the boot floor and secure them to the fastening rings safely. Never exceed the maximum tensile load of the fastening rings when securing ob- jects. Make sure that, particularly for flat ob- jects, the upper edge of the load is higher than the fastening rings. Depending on the features, take into ac- count the instruction panels on the boot on how to place the load. Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.

140

Transport and practical equipment

Note The maximum tensile load that the fas- tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN. Belts, straps and securing systems for the appropriate load can be obtained from specialised dealerships. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. The fastening rings are rendered unusa- ble for versions with a spare wheel.

Net bag*

Fig. 139 In the luggage compartment: net bag hooked up at floor level.

Fig. 140 In the luggage compartment: rings 1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.

The luggage compartment prevents light luggage from moving. The net bag has a zip and can be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug- gage compartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggage compartment floor If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded first page 140.

Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings 1 and 2 Fig. 139 . The bag zip

should be facing upwards.

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh- old Secure the short net hooks to the fastening rings Fig. 140 1 . The bag zip should be facing upwards.

Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag The hooked up net bag is taut .

Release the net bag from the fastening rings. Store the net bag in the luggage compart- ment.

WARNING To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten- ing rings of the boot it must be stretched out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly the hooks could cause injuries. Always secure the bag hooks properly so that they do not suddenly release from the fastening rings when hooking or unhooking them. On hooking or unhooking them, protect your eyes and face in case the hooks are released suddenly. Always hook up the net bag hooks in the described order. If a hook is unfastened suddenly, this may cause injuries.

141

Operation

Bag hooks

Fig. 141 In the luggage compartment: bag hooks.

There may be hooks for hanging bags on both sides of the luggage compart- ment Fig. 141.

The retaining hooks have been designed to secure light shopping bags.

WARNING Never use the hooks to hang luggage or other objects. In case of sudden braking or an accident, the hooks could break.

CAUTION Each hook is designed for a maximum load of 2.5 kg.

Trapdoor for transporting long ob- jects*

Fig. 142 In the rear seat backrest: opening the trapdoor.

Fig. 143 In the luggage compartment: opening the trapdoor.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, there is a tailboard for transporting long items in the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before they are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav- el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard Lower the centre armrest. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow and push the tailboard cover Fig. 142 1 down and forwards. Open the rear lid. Insert the long objects through the gap from the luggage compartment. Secure the objects with the seat belt. Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The red mark on the luggage compartment side should never be visible. Close the rear lid. Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

Note The tailboard can also be opened from the luggage compartment. To do so, press the release lever down, in the direction of the arrow, and the cover upwards Fig. 143.

142

Transport and practical equipment

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in the roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof carrier system should be disassembled. When they are not used. When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING Always secure the load properly using belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition. Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen- tre of gravity and driving performance. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

CAUTION Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- er system before entering a car wash. Vehicle height is increased by the instal- lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system and the load secured on them. For this pur- pose, check that your vehicle's height does not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- ple, for underpasses or for entering garage doors. Cross bars, the roof carrier system and the load secured on them should not inter- fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. On opening the rear lid make sure that it does not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environment When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Securing the crossbars and the roof carrier system

Fig. 144 Attachment points for the roof railings for the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of special roof carrier systems. For safety rea- sons, special fixtures must be used to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly. Always take the as- sembly instructions that come with the cross- bars and the roof carrier system in question into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- ings. The distance between crossbars Fig. 144 A should be between 70 and 90 cm and the distance between the crossbars

143

Operation

and the brackets of the roof railings B must be 15 cm.

WARNING Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- bars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries. Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account. Check threaded joints and attachments travelling and if necessary tighten them af- ter you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threa- ded joints whenever you stop for a rest. Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system.

Note Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carri- er system carefully and keep them in the vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- stalled .

Maximum authorised cargo on the roof The maximum authorised cargo permitted to be transport on the roof is 75 kg. This figure comes from the combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on the roof .

Always check the weight of the roof carrier system, the cross bars and the weight of the load to be transported and weigh them if necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load Distribute loads uniformly and secure them correctly .

Check attachments Once the cross bars and roof carrier system have been installed, check the bolted con- nections and attachments after a short jour- ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- cy.

WARNING Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- hicle's maximum authorised weight. Never exceed the load capacity of the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even if the maximum authorised roof load has not been reached. Secure heavy items as far forward as possible and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.

WARNING If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause accidents and injuries. Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for small or light items.

WARNING Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- cured could be thrown across the cabin in

144

Transport and practical equipment

the event of sudden braking or manoeu- vring. This may cause severe injuries as well as loss of control of the vehicle. Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or heavy items in open storage compartments of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the cover behind the rear seats, or inside pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi- cle. Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi- cult the use of the pedals. This may cause loss of control of the vehicle and increases the risk of severe injuries. Make sure that nothing prevents you from using the pedals at any time. Always secure the mat in the footwell. Never place other mats or other type of covers on the factory-fitted mat. Ensure that no objects can fall into the driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo- tion. When the vehicle is stationary, remove the objects in the footwell.

WARNING If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This

could lead to severe burns and damage to the vehicle. Before moving a seat, make sure there are no lighters in the moving part area of the vehicle. Before closing a storage compartment, make sure there are no lighters in the clos- ing area. Never leave a lighter inside a storage compartment or any other surface of the vehicle as it could ignite due to the high temperatures on such surfaces, particular- ly during the summer.

CAUTION Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob- jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat and cold could damage them or render them useless. Objects made from transparent materi- als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, magnifying glasses or transparent suction pads stuck to the windows can concentrate sunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 145 On the front passenger side: glove compartment.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the CD player and SD card reader are located in the glove compartment. Its operation is de- scribed in page 195.

Opening and closing the glove compart- ment Opening: Pull the handle Fig. 145 and open the glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up- wards.

WARNING If the glove compartment is left open, the risk of causing severe injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu- vring increases.

145

Operation

Always keep the glove compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Folding table*

Fig. 146 Front left seat: folding table.

Fig. 147 Front left seat: folding table with drinks holder.

Depending on the model version, at the rear of the front seats, there may be plane-style

folding tables for passengers in the rear seats.

Opening the folding table Pull the table up, in the direction of the ar- row, until it catches Fig. 146.

Folding the table or adjusting its inclina- tion The foldable table can be used at different inclinations.

Press the unlocking lever under the table Fig. 147 1 and keep it that way. Adjust: Adjust the inclination of the table by pressing the lever. Fold: Push the table downwards while pressing the lever.

Drink holder A drink holder is built into the folding table 2 .

With the foldable table extended, remove the drink holder 2 following the direction of the arrow. To store the drink holder, insert it into the table against the direction of the arrow.

WARNING The table must always be closed while driving to decrease the risk of injuries.

Object holder under front seats*

Fig. 148 Storage compartment under the front seats.

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle and take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until it engages.

WARNING If the drawer is left open, it could prevent use of the pedals. This may cause serious accidents and injuries. Always keep the drawer closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer and any objects in it could fall into the driv- er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

CAUTION The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

146

Transport and practical equipment

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart- ments and supports in other parts of the vehi- cle:

In the centre console. In the top of the glove compartment in vehi- cles that do not have a CD reader. The load of the compartment should not exceed 1.2 kg. Other storage compartments are found in the rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats.

There are hangers on the struts of the doors and the rear.

WARNING Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's visibility, which may cause serious acci- dents and injuries. Always hang clothes from hangers in such a way that the driver's visibility is not affected. Only hang light pieces of clothing from the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets of these pieces of clothing. Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could interfere with the function of the head-protection airbags.

Drink holder

Introduction

The storage compartments of the driver and passenger doors contain a bottle holder.

The folding tables of the front seats contain more bottle holders page 146.

WARNING Incorrect use of the bottle holders may cause injuries. Never put hot drinks in the drink holders. In the event of sudden braking or an acci- dent while driving, hot beverages in the bottle holders might spill and cause burns. Ensure that no bottles or other objects are dropped in the driver footwell while driving, as they could get under the pedals and obstruct their working. Never place glasses, food or other heavy objects drink holders. These heavy objects may be thrown across the cabin in the event of an accident and cause serious in- juries.

WARNING Closed bottles may explode inside the ve- hicle due to cold or heat. Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle if the temperature inside is very high or very low.

CAUTION Do not leave open cans in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may damage the vehicle and its electrical sys- tem.

Note The inside elements of the drink holders can be extracted for cleaning.

Front drink holders

Fig. 149 Centre console: front drinks holders.

There are two cup holders in the centre con- sole Fig. 149.

147

Operation

Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 150 12 volt power socket: 1 in the centre console, 2 in the luggage compartment. The USB power socket is located at the rear of the centre console 3 .

Fig. 151 On the left side of the luggage com- partment: 230 volt power socket.

In the centre console Remove the cover from the socket, located on the centre console Fig. 150 1 . Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.

In the luggage compartment* Lift the power socket cover Fig. 150 2 . Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.

USB power sockets Depending on the equipment and the coun- try, the vehicle may also have USB connec- tions exclusively for charging or as a power socket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats Fig. 150 3 . These connectors can work at a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

Maximum power consumption

Power socket Maximum power con- sumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 watts (300 watt peaks)

Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket.

Make sure that the maximum power con- sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex- ceeded. The power consumption of devices is shown on the model plate.

When connecting two or more electrical de- vices at the same time, make sure that their total consumption never exceeds 190 watts .

230 volt power socket* With the engine running, the power socket Fig. 151 activates automatically as soon as a connector is plugged in. If there is enough power available, the socket can still be used while the engine is off Connect an electrical device: Open the cov- er and insert the plug into the power socket as far as possible to unlock the built-in child lock. The socket only supplies power once the child lock is unlocked.

LED on the power socket

Steady green light:

The childproof lock is unlocked. The socket is ready to operate.

Flashing green light:

The ignition is switched off, but there is enough power available to continue supplying the socket with current for a maximum of 10 minutes. If the connector is un- plugged before this time elap- ses, the socket is disconnected and cannot be used again until the ignition is switched on again.

148

Transport and practical equipment

LED on the power socket

Flashing red light:

There is an anomaly, e.g. dis- connection due to a current surge or overheating.

Disconnection due to overheating When the temperature exceeds a certain val- ue, the 230 volt socket inverter is automati- cally disconnected. The disconnection pre- vents overheating when the power consump- tion of the connected devices is excessive or the ambient temperature is very high. The 230-volt power supply can be used once again after a cooling time. First unplug the connector of the connected device and then plug it back in again. This prevents the elec- trical device from being switched on again if this is not wanted.

WARNING The electrical system is under high voltage! Do not spill liquids onto the socket. Do not plug adapters or extension cords into the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise, the integrated child lock will be unlocked and the power socket will operate. Do not insert conductive objects (a knit- ting needle, for example) into the 230 volt power socket.

WARNING The power socket works only when the igni- tion is on. Improper use may cause serious injury or even fire. Children should there- fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if the button is also left behind. Otherwise there is a possibility that they may be in- jured.

CAUTION Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

CAUTION 230 volt power socket: Do not leave devices or connectors

that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) hanging directly from the power sock- et.

Do not connect neon lamps. Only connect devices to the socket if

the device and socket voltage match. The built-in overload disconnect func-

tion prevents any electrical devices that require a high start-up current from turning on. In this case, unplug the electrical device's power supply and re-try the connection after about 10 seconds.

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a battery discharge. Should the connected appliance over- heat, immediately switch it off and discon- nect it from the socket. Before switching the ignition on or off, un- plug the appliances from the USB ports to protect them from any damage caused by fluctuations in voltage. Some appliances may not work properly when connected to the 230 volt sockets due to a lack of power (watts).

149

Operation

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cooling

Related video

Fig. 152 Air conditioning

Introduction

Depending on the vehicles equipment, sever- al systems may have been fitted:

The manual air conditioning and the Cli- matronic cool and dehumidify the air. They operate most effectively with the windows and the sunroof closed.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.

Dust and pollen filter The dust and pollen filter with its activated charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against impurities in the air taken into the ve- hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changed regularly so that air conditioner performance is not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollu- tion, the filter must be changed more fre- quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNING Reduced visibility through the windows in- creases the risk of serious accidents. Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fog- ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev- erything outside. Only drive when you have good visibility. Always ensure that you use the air condi- tioning, heater or rear window heating to maintain good visibility to the outside. Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

WARNING Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly re- sulting in a serious accident. Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.

CAUTION To replace the pollen filter, always visit a service centre. Switch the climate control or air condi- tioner off if you think it may be broken. This will avoid additional damage. Have the cli- mate control or air conditioning checked by a specialised workshop. Repairs to the climate control or air con- ditioning require specialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Note When the cooling system is turned off, air coming from the outside will not be dried. To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recommends leaving the cooling system (compressor) turned on. To do this, press the button. The button lamp should light up. The maximum heat output required to de- frost windows as quickly as possible is only

150

Air conditioning

available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not im- paired, and to prevent the windows from misting over. The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in

the luggage compartment designed for this purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob- structing these slots with any kind of ob- ject. Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air conditioning system leaves residue on the evaporator, producing a permanent un- pleasant odour.

It is advisable to turn on the air condition- ing at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consulted to check the system. When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a moment.

Climatronic* controls

Fig. 153 In the centre console: Climatronic con- trols.

Automatic mode Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa- bled when the ventilation is modified manual- ly.

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool- ing system.

Temperature 1 / 2

The temperature of the right and left sides can be adjusted separately using the adjust- ers. The selected temperature is shown on the display of the climate control panel.

Synchronisation: press button so that settings on the driver's side apply to the pas- senger side. Use the temperature regulator

for the passenger side to set a different tem- perature.

Blower The power of the fan is automatically adjus- ted.

The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.

151

Operation

Air distribution / / The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. It can also be manually distributed to the de- sired zone by pressing the corresponding button:

The airflow is directed towards the chest The airflow is directed towards the foot- well. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

Maximum cooling power The recirculation of air and the cooling sys- tem turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to the position .

Defrost/demist function The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di- rected at the windscreen and air recirculation

is automatically switched off. To defrost the windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi- fied at temperatures over approximately +3C (+38F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

Infotainment system: The climate control operation and settings menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maxi- mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating conditions are re-establish- ed.

Air recirculation page 155

Seat heating page 156

Switching off Press button or manually set the fan to .

152

Air conditioning

Manual air conditioning controls

Fig. 154 In the centre console: Manual air condi- tioning controls.

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool- ing system.

Temperature 1

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Blower Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power.

At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioning are disconnected. Level 6 is the maximum.

Air distribution / / / / Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to the desired zone:

The airflow is directed towards the chest The airflow is directed towards the chest and the footwell area.

The airflow is directed towards the foot- well. The airflow is directed towards the wind- screen and the footwell area.

Defrost/demist function When control 3 is in position the air flow is directed at the windscreen and air recircula- tion is disconnected automatically or not ac- tivated. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as pos- sible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling sys- tem will automatically switch on.

Maximum cooling power When the control is in position air re- circulation and the cooling system are con- nected automatically and the air flow is auto- matically adjusted to position .

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maxi- mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating conditions are re-establish- ed.

Air recirculation page 155

Seat heating page 156

153

Operation

Operating the Climatronic through the Easy Connect system*

Fig. 155 Easy Connect screen: Climate control menu.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possible to perform various adjustments to the Clima- tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu Press the button of the Climatronic control panel.

On the screen you can view and change the current settings, such as, for example, the temperature set for the driver and passenger sides. Temperatures up to +22C (+72F) are shown with blue arrows, and temperatures over +22C (+72F) with red arrows.

To switch a function on or off, or to select a submenu, you must press the corresponding function button.

Function button: Function

OFF: Climatronic is switched off.

ON: Climatronic is switched on.

SYNC: Synchronise driver and front passenger tem- peratures.

SETTINGS The air conditioning settings submenu is opened. The following settings can also be adjusted:

Automatic supplementary heater: to activate/deactivate the automatic activation of the auxiliary heating for colder countries (only for engines with auxiliary heating). With the op- tion deactivated, depending on the outside tem- perature the heating may need more time than normal to reach a comfortable temperature.

Automatic windscreen heating:* to switch the automatic windscreen heating on and off page 157.

Automatic air recirculation: to switch automatic air recirculation on and off page 155.

Back : Close the submenu.

*: The auxiliary heater submenu opens.

*: It enables manual switching on or off of the windscreen heater.

: It enables activation and deactivation of the PureAir and opens the submenu.

Climate control usage instructions

The interior cooling system only works when the engine is running and fan is switched on.

Economic use of the air conditioning When the air conditioning is switched on, the compressor consumes engine power and has influence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quick- ly by opening the windows and the panoram- ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Change the temperature unit (Climatron- ic) The temperature display can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of the Infotainment system using the Infotain- ment button > Settings > Units.

The cooling system cannot be activated If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on, this may be caused by the fol- lowing:

The engine is not running. The fan is switched off. The air conditioner fuse has blown.

154

Air conditioning

The outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +3C (+38F). The air conditioner compressor has been temporarily switched off because the engine coolant temperature is too high. Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a specialised work- shop.

Special characteristics If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak!

Note After starting the engine, any residual hu- midity in the air conditioner could mist over the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func- tion as soon as possible to clear the wind- screen of condensation.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must remain open.

Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in the required direction to open and close the air

vents. When the thumbwheel is in the posi- tion, the corresponding air vent is closed. Change the air direction using the ventila- tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable air vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in the rear area of the passenger compartment.

Note Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- sitive objects should never be placed in front of the air outlets as they may be dam- aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high, selecting manual air recirculation mode for a short period refreshes the vehicle interior more quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is switched off when the button is press- ed or the air distributor turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculation mode on and off Press the button to connect or discon- nect manual air recirculation.

Climatronic automatic air recirculation mode With the automatic air recirculation mode ac- tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in- terior is enabled. If the system detects a high concentration of hazardous substances in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched on automatically. When the level of impurities drops to within a normal range, recirculation mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasant smells.

Automatic air recirculation is activated and deactivated in the climate control menu page 154.

The air recirculation will not connect auto- matically in versions without humidity sensor and in the following external conditions:

The outside temperature is lower than +3C (+38F). The cooling system is switched off and the outside temperature is below +10C (+50F). The cooling system is switched off, the out- side temperature is below +15C (+59F) and the windscreen wipers are switched on.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Intro- duction on page 150.

155

Operation

If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, con- siderably limiting visibility. Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

CAUTION Do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on in vehicles with an air condi- tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the cooling system vaporiser and on the acti- vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen filter, leading to a permanently un- pleasant smell.

Note Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti- vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant odours from entering the vehicle interior when it is in reverse and while the automat- ic windscreen wiper is working.

Seat heating*

With the engine on, the seat cushion and the seat backrest can be heated electrically.

Control seat heating Press buttons or on the control panel to turn on the seat heating as high as possi- ble. Press buttons o repeatedly to adjust it to the required level. To turn off the seat heating, press button or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

If the ignition is switched on again in approx. the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating is automatically turned on to the level set the last time.

Cases in which the heat seating should not be switched on Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the following conditions are met:

The seat is not occupied. The seat has a cover. A child seat has been installed on the seat. The seat cushion is wet or damp. The outdoor or indoor temperature is great- er than +25C (77F).

WARNING People who cannot perceive pain or tem- perature because of medications, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a limited perception of these, may suffer

burns to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat heating. People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating. If an abnormality in the device's temper- ature control is detected, have it checked by a specialist workshop.

WARNING If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can adversely affect the operation of the seat heating, increasing the risk of burns. Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater. Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp. Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat. Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest. Liquids, sharps objects and insulating materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop.

156

Air conditioning

For the sake of the environment The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces- sary fuel waste.

Windscreen heating*

Fig. 156 Windscreen humidity and tempera- ture sensor.

The heated windscreen is comprised of a set of heated wires placed between the layers of the windscreen which, when electric current is supplied to them, heat up and cause the temperature of the glass to rise.

Its function is to assist the air-conditioning system to prevent the windscreen from mist- ing up or to demist it faster if it does mist up.

The system can be switched on manually or automatically.

Manual activation Press the button of the Climatronic control panel. Press the function button to switch the windscreen heating on or off.

Automatic activation To facilitate use of the heated windscreen it can turn on automatically.

The Climatronic control panel can detect the danger of the windscreen misting thanks to its temperature and humidity sensors, switching the system on or off accordingly. Moreover, it will also be activated automatically when the button is pressed on the Climatronic control panel.

Adjust it as follows for it to switch on automat- ically:

Press the button of the Climatronic control panel. Press the SETTINGS function button on the infotainment system. Switch the function on or off by pressing the Automatic windscreen heating function button.

157

Operation

auxiliary heating (additional heating)*

Introduction

The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve- hicle's tank and can be used while you are driving and when the vehicle is stationary.

The auxiliary heater can be switched on using the fast heating button of the air conditioning controls, with the remote control or by previ- ously programming a departure time in the auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment sys- tem.

In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched on, you can defog the windscreen and leave it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be- fore you start driving.

If the outside temperature is very high, the ve- hicle interior can be ventilated with the en- gine off using the auxiliary heater.

WARNING The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death. Never switch on the auxiliary heater or leave it running in enclosed spaces or areas with no ventilation.

Never programme the auxiliary heater so that it switches itself on and is running in an enclosed space or an area with no ventila- tion.

WARNING The components of the auxiliary heater are extremely hot and could cause a fire. Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with easily flammable materials that might be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.

CAUTION Never place food, medicines or other tem- perature-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other objects sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air com- ing from the vents.

Switching the auxiliary heater on and off

Connection The independent heating can be connected in the following ways:

Press the fast heating button on the air con- ditioning control panel page 151. The control lamp of the button will light up.

Press button on the radio-operated re- mote control page 159. Automatically scheduling a departure time page 160.

Disconnection The independent heating can be switched off in the following ways:

Press the fast heating button on the air con- ditioner's control panel . The control lamp on the button turns off. Press button on the radio-operated re- mote control page 159. Automatically at the scheduled departure time or after the programmed operating time has elapsed page 160. Automatically when the control lamp (fuel level indicator) lights up page 336. Automatically when the 12-volt battery charge drops too low page 353.

Things to note Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will continue to operate for a short period of time in order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys- tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes.

158

Air conditioning

Radio-operated remote control

Fig. 157 Auxiliary heating: radio-operated re- mote control.

Fig. 157 Switch the auxiliary heater on

Switch the auxiliary heater off Control lamp

If the buttons of the remote control are press- ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxili- ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of range or when the control lamp is flashing.

To switch on and off the independent heating, the button must be pressed and held for ap- proximately 1 second.

Control lamp on the remote control When the buttons are pressed, the control lamp on the remote control 1 provides the user with different information:

1

It lights up for approx. 2 seconds The auxiliary heater has been

switched on with button . The auxiliary heater has been switch-

ed off con with button .

Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds No on signal has been received. The

remote control is out of range. Move closer to the vehicle.

No off signal has been received. The remote control is out of range. Move closer to the vehicle.

Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds The independent heating is blocked.

Possible causes: the fuel tank is almost empty, the 12-volt battery charge is very low or there is a fault.

It lights up for approx. 2 seconds (then in green or in red): The re-

mote control battery is almost flat. How- ever, the on or off signal has been re- ceived.

(then flashes green or red): The re- mote control battery is almost flat. No on or off signal has been received.

Flashes for around 5 seconds The remote control battery is flat.

No on or off signal has been received.

In green:

In red:

In green:

In red:

In green:

In orange

In orange

In orange:

Changing the battery of the radio-operat- ed remote control When pressing the buttons, if the control lamp of the remote 1 flashes for approx. 5 orange or does not light up, the batteries must be replaced.

The battery is located beneath a cover on the back of the remote control.

To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot- tom and slide it down. Remove the old battery. Insert the new battery. When doing so, take into account the polarity and use batteries of the same type . Replace the battery cover by inserting the tabs at the top and pressing the bottom.

Range The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remote control, when fitted with new batteries, has a range of several hundred metres. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged bat- teries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.

WARNING Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- ter or any other button battery can cause serious and even fatal injuries within a very short time.

159

Operation

Always keep the remote control, keyrings with batteries, the spare batteries, button batteries and all other batteries over 20 mm out of reach of children. If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek immediate med- ical attention.

CAUTION The radio frequency remote control con- tains electronic components. Therefore, avoid getting it wet and exposing it to knocks or direct sunlight. The use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote con- trol. For this reason, always replace the used battery with another of the same volt- age, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environ- ment. The remote control battery may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions regarding disposal. Care should be taken so as not to oper- ate the remote control unintentionally so as to prevent the auxiliary heater being switched on accidentally.

Programming the auxiliary heater

Before programming it, check that the vehi- cle's date and time are set correctly .

The auxiliary heater is programmed in the Auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment system.

Open the Auxiliary heater menu. Press the button of the Climatronic control panel. Press the function button.

Function button: function

Switch off: The auxiliary heater is immediately switched off.

Heat, Ventilate: Set to heat or ventilate the vehi- cle interior when the auxiliary heater is switched on. Press the function button to select the desired mode.

Set: Opens the Auxiliary heater menu.

Function button: function

Departure time 1, Departure time 2, Departure time 3: Three different de- parture times (hh.mm) may be programmed. If the auxiliary heater should only be switched on a certain day of the week, this can also be selected.

Duration: The duration determines the oper- ating time of the auxiliary heater when switch- ed on using the fast heating button on the air conditioning controls. The duration is also used to calculate the departure time for the manual air conditioner. It can be set between 10 and 60 minutes at 10-minute intervals.

The programmed departure time determines the approximate time it should take to reach the temperature set in the vehicle. The start of the heating operation is determined automat- ically depending on the outside temperature.

Checking the programming When a departure time is activated and the ignition is switched off the control lamp of the fast heating button lights up for approxi- mately 10 seconds.

WARNING Never programme the auxiliary heater so that it switches itself on and is running in an enclosed space or an area with no ventila- tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide

160

Air conditioning

can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death.

Usage instructions

The auxiliary heater exhaust system located below the vehicle must be kept clear of snow, mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes must be able to exit freely. The emissions generated by the auxiliary heater are re- moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath the vehicle.

On heating the vehicle interior, depending on the outside temperature, the warm air is first directed at the windscreen and then to the rest of the vehicle interior through the air vents. Directing the diffusers towards the windows for example can affect air distribu- tion.

When the auxiliary heater is not switched on The auxiliary heater requires about as much power as the dipped beam headlights. If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the auxiliary heater switches off automatically and cannot be switched on. This avoids prob- lems when starting the engine. The heating must be activated every time you want to set off. Similarly, the departure time must reactivate each time.

The control lamp (fuel level indicator) lights up.

Note Noises will be heard while the auxiliary heater is running. When the air humidity is high and the in- side temperature low, condensation from the heating and ventilating system may evaporate when the auxiliary heater is switched on. In this case, steam may be re- leased from underneath the vehicle. This does not mean that there is a vehicle mal- function. If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater may be restricted if the fuel tank level is low (just above the reserve level). If the auxiliary heater is used a number of times for a long period of time, the 12-volt battery will lose its charge. To recharge the battery, the vehicle must be driven for a number of kilometres from time to time. As a guideline: the journey should last approx- imately as long as the heater was connec- ted. At temperatures below +5 C (+41 F), the auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto- matically when the engine is switched on. The auxiliary heater is switched off again after a certain time.

161

Infotainment System

Infotainment System

Introduction

Safety warnings

Safety warnings regarding the Info- tainment system

Only operate the infotainment system and its various functions when the traffic situation really permits this.

WARNING Before starting the trip, you should famili- arise yourself with the different infotain- ment system functions. High audio volume may represent a dan- ger to you and to others. Hearing may be impaired if the volume is too high, even for short periods of time. Changes to the Infotainment system set- tings should be made when the car is stop- ped, or by a passenger.

WARNING Current traffic requires maximum attention from public road users. Distracting the driv- er in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Operating the Infotainment

system can distract your attention from the traffic. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow you to hear sounds from outside the vehicle at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens and horns).

WARNING The volume level may suddenly change when you switch audio source or connect a new audio source. Lower the base volume before connect- ing or switching audio sources.

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the navigation system may differ from the current traffic situation. Traffic signs and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and dis- plays provided by the navigation system.

WARNING Connecting, inserting or removing a data medium while driving can distract your at- tention from the traffic and cause an acci- dent.

WARNING Place the connecting cables of external equipment so that they do not interfere with the drivers mobility.

WARNING External devices that are loose or not prop- erly secured could move around the pas- senger compartment during a sharp ma- noeuvre or accident. Avoid placing external devices on the doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or near the area marked AIRBAG or between these areas and the occupants. They could cause serious injury in an accident, espe- cially when the airbags inflate.

WARNING The armrest* must always remain closed during the journey as it could restrict the drivers movements.

WARNING Opening the CD or DVD player can lead to injuries from invisible laser radiation. Have CD or DVD repaired only by a spe- cialist workshop.

162

Introduction

CAUTION The Infotainment system can be damaged by the incorrect insertion of a data storage device or the insertion of an incompatible data storage device. When inserting a data storage device, make sure it is correctly positioned. Applying force may irreparably damage the memory card slot locking mechanism. Only use compatible memory cards. When inserting and removing CDs and DVDs, always hold them at right angles to the front of the CD/DVD drive without tilt- ing so as not to scratch them. If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is already in the unit or being ejected, the CD/DVD drive may be damaged. Always wait until the data medium is completely ejected.

CAUTION Foreign objects stuck to a CD or DVD, or if it is not round, the player may be damaged. Only clean, standard 12 cm CDs or DVDs should be used. Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel off and damage the drive.

Do not use printable data media. Prin- ted labels and coverings may peel off and damage the CD/DVD drive.

Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu- larly shaped CDsor DVDs.

Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker than normal CDs.

CAUTION The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam- aged if the volume is too high or the sound is distorted.

Note For the proper functioning of the Infotain- ment system it is important that the date and time set in the vehicle are correct.

163

Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media System Plus / Navi System / Navi System Plus

Fig. 158 Overview of the controls

Radio Mode (change of band frequency page 187 Touchscreen page 168 Navigation Mode page 212 Media mode (audio sources) page 195 Phone Mode page 231

1

2

3

4

5

Voice control page 174 Full Link page 177 Vehicle settings page 89, page 227 Main menu page 167 Volume. Off/on page 167 Proximity sensor page 170

6

7

8

9

10

11

Settings button (search and selection) page 167

12

164

Introduction

Main menus

Fig. 159 Menu summary.

165

Infotainment System

Radio page 187

RADIO main menu page 187 RDS radio data services page 188 Digital radio mode page 189 Memory buttons page 190 Save station logos page 191 Select, tune and save stations page 191 SCAN automatic playback page 192 TP traffic information page 192 Setup page 193

Media page 195

Data and file formats page 195 Playback order page 198 page 198 Change the media source page 200 Change track page 201 Selecting an album by cover page 201 Selecting a track from a track list page 202 Data bank view page 203 Insert or remove a CD or DVD page 203 Memory card page 204 External data storage device connected to the USB port page 204 External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multi- media socket page 205 External audio source with Bluetooth page 205 Images page 210 Setup page 211

Navigation page 212

New destination page 214 Route options page 215 page 216 My destinations page 216 Special destinations (POI) page 218 View page 218 Split screen page 219 Map display page 219 Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide page 220 Predictive navigation page 221 Import vCards page 221 Importing Personal POI page 222 Navigation with images page 222 Road signs page 222 Route guidance in Demo mode page 222 Setup page 223 Offroad mode page 224

Vehicle

Instrument panel page 227 Sport page 227 Offroad page 228 Consumers page 228 Driving data page 229 Ecotrainer page 229 Vehicle status page 230

Traffic page 220

Traffic information (TP) page 192 Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide page 220

Telephone page 231

Bluetooth page 232 Tethering page 233 Function buttons page 234 Enter number page 236 Agenda page 237 Short messages (SMS) page 238 Call list page 239 Quick dial keys page 239 Setup page 240

Sound page 173

Full Link page 177

Requirements page 178 Activation of Full Link page 179 Tethering of portable devices page 180 MirrorLink page 181 Apple CarPlay page 181 Android Auto page 182 Frequently Asked Questions page 183

SEAT Md. Climate page 183

WLAN access point page 184

Images page 210

Control page 154

Setup page 171

166

Introduction

General instructions for use

Introduction

Fig. 160 Related video

If the setup is changed, this may change the display on the screen and the Infotainment system may behave in a manner different to that described in this manual.

Note Just press a button or the screen to use the infotainment system's functions. The equipments software depends on the market in question, so it is possible that not all of the function buttons or described functions are available. The equipment is not faulty if a function button is missing. Due to country-specific legislation, cer- tain functions may not be available on the screen when the vehicle is travelling above a certain speed. Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi- cle may provoke noise in the speakers. Restrictions on the use of devices using Bluetooth technology may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact the local authorities. On vehicles with ParkPilot, the audio vol- ume is automatically lowered when reverse gear is selected. The volume can be low- ered in the menu Sound > Volume.

Diagram of the menus

Fig. 161 Main menu

The Infotainment system touchscreen can be used to select the different main menus.

Press the Infotainment button to open the menus summary.

The display of the touchscreen's main menu can be switched between grid and carou- sel and vice-versa using the menu Settings > Screen page 171.

Note Depending on the infotainment version, there may be more icons on the second page. In this case, to see the remaining icons press the function button Fig. 161 (arrow) or slide your finger horizontally across the screen.

Rotary push buttons and infotain- ment buttons

Rotary/push buttons The left rotary push button is the on/off button if pressed and the volume knob if turned.

The right rotary pushbutton is the search but- ton if turned and the selection button if press- ed.

Infotainment buttons The Infotainment buttons are used by press- ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

When the system is turned on, it starts up with the volume at which it was turned off, as long as it does not exceed the preset maximum start-up volume. Select Sound > Volume.

167

Infotainment System

The unit will switch off automatically when the key is removed from the ignition or when the on/off button is pressed (depending on the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In- fotainment system is switched on again, it will switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note The Infotainment system is a part of the vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi- cle. If the battery has been disconnected, the ignition must be activated before switching on the Infotainment system.

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume or muting the sound Raise the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel upward .

Lower the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel downward .

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol- ume bar on the screen. The volume can be controlled using the steering wheel controls. In this case, the changes in volume are dis-

played on the instrument panel by a volume bar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settings and adjustments. Select > Sound > Vol- ume.

Muting the Infotainment system sound Turn the volume control anti-clockwise until it displays . OR: press the left wheel of the multifunction steering wheel.

Playback is paused while in Media mode (ex- cept AUX). The screen displays .

Operation of the function buttons and the instructions on the screen

Fig. 162 View of some of the function buttons on the screen.

Fig. 163 Sound setup menu

Active areas of the touchscreen that call up a certain function are called function buttons. These buttons are operated by pressing them on the screen or holding them down.

The function buttons appear in this manual as a function button and a button symbol inside a rectangle .

These activate functions or open submenus. The currently selected menu is displayed in the title bar Fig. 162 A of the submenus.

Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se- lected.

Increase or decrease the size of the im- ages displayed on the screen The size of the navigation map image and im- age views can be enlarged or reduced. To do this, slide 2 fingers across the screen to sepa- rate them or bring them together.

168

Introduction

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operation and effect

A The title bar shows the selected menu and other function buttons.

B Press it to open another menu.

C

The scroll bar is shown on the right. Scroll the bar by sliding your finger vertically on it page 169, Open list entries and search in lists.

D

Movable cursor: Move the cursor by slid- ing your finger across the screen.

OR: Press a point on the screen where you want the sound to be directed.

Fixed crosshair: Press on the arrows to move the sound around according to your preferences.

OR: Press the central button to centre the stereo sound in the centre of the passen- ger compartment

Press it on some lists to move up a level, one by one.

BACK

Button to return to the previous menu or move up through the folder structure.

When pressed, a pop-up window opens (options window) which displays other setup options.

/ Some functions are activated or deac- tivated by pressing this box.

Display and function buttons: operation and effect

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

Press to close a pop-up window or an in- put window.

/ Press them to change the setup adjust- ments one at a time.

Move the scroll button across the screen by sliding your finger.

Open list entries and search in lists

Fig. 164 Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated by pressing them on the screen or by using the settings button.

Mark list entries using the setup button and open them Turn the adjustment knob to search and se- lect from the list. Press the setup button to activate the marked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen) The scroll bar is shown on the right and its size depends on the entries in the list Fig. 164 1 .

On the bar: Press above or below the mark or slide your finger vertically over the mark until you reach the desired position.

Input window with on-screen key- pad

Fig. 165 Input window with on-screen keypad.

169

Infotainment System

The on-screen keypad is used for functions such as entering an memory name, selecting a destination address or entering a search term for searching long lists.

The input line with cursor is located in the top bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed here.

Input windows for free text input In the input masks for open text, you may en- ter letters, numbers and characters in any combination.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry (e.g. selection of a destination address) It is only possible to enter a sequence of let- ters, numbers and characters that matches a stored entry.

Matches are suggested on the input line Fig. 165 4 In the case of compound names, it is necessary to enter a space.

Overview of the function buttons*

Function icon and text: operation and ef- fect

Letters and digits

Press them to copy them into the input line.

1

Press to change the keypad to anoth- er language. Keypad languages can be selected from the menu System settings > Speech.

Function icon and text: operation and ef- fect

2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.

3

If there are fewer than 99, it shows the number of entries that can be selec- ted. Pressing opens the list according to the entry.

4 Scroll bar, the size of which depends on the number of matching entries.

5

If the button is held down, special characters based on that letter are displayed. Press the desired charac- ter to enter it. Some special charac- ters can be written out instead (e.g. AE for ).

Space bar

Deletes characters on the input line from right to left.

Press and hold to delete several char- acters.

BACK Close the input window.

Proximity sensor 3 Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.

The Infotainment system is equipped with an integrated proximity sensor Fig. 158 11 .

The screen switches from display mode to automatic operation when your hand moves

toward it. In operation mode, the function but- tons are automatically highlighted to facili- tate their use.

Motion sensors (gesture control)* 3 Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.

Depending on the version, the infotainment system has motion sensors that can be used to change certain functions, e.g. next station, next memory bank, previous track, etc.

Press the infotainment button > Set- tings > Screen > activate/deactivate proximity sensor. If the sensors are active, when you move your hand close to the screen the silhouette of a hand will be displayed in the lower right cor- ner.

With this function the system switches to the previous or next station, track, memory bank, etc., when you move your hand from left to right, or vice-versa, in front of the screen. An audible warning also sounds.

170

Introduction

Additional information and display options

The displays appearing on the screen may vary depending on the settings, and may differ from those described here.

The status bar on the screen can display, for example, the current time and outside tem- perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com- pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 166 Initial configuration wizard

It will help you to set up your Infotainment system the first time you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainment system, the initial setup screen will appear Fig. 166 if any parameters have not been

set or if the NEVER function button has not been pressed.

Function button: function

CLOSE Closes the Configuration Wizard, and the main menu or last mode in which you used the Infotainment system will appear.

NEVER

Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment sys- tem. To configure the system go to: System settings and select Con- figuration wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

A If the system includes navigation, the date and time are set automatically by the GPS.

B Search and save the radio stations with the best reception at that time in all available bands.

C Link your mobile phone to the Infotain- ment system.

D a) Add your home address using your current position or by manually enter- ing an address.

PREVIOUS NEXT

Previous or next parameter to config- ure. When a parameter has been config- ured, the only way to reconfigure it is by clicking on it on the main menu, not by using the Previous/Next buttons. When you configure a parameter, will be displayed over it.

Function button: function

FINISH

Once one or more settings have been applied, finalise the configuration in the main menu of the wizzard. If you have not set all the parameters, the Initial Configuration Wizard will start the next time you turn the Info- tainment system on.

a) Only valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.

Menu and system settings

The settings that can be selected varies de- pending on the country and the equipment in question, and on the vehicle's equipment.

Press the Infotainment button and then press the SETTINGS function button.

Press the function button of the main menu or the functions for which you want to change the settings. All settings are automatically applied when the menus are closed.

Function button: function

Screen : To change the screen settings.

Menu : To select the main menu display mode (Mosaic or Carousel ).

171

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) : If this function is active and the infotainment system is not used, the screen will automatically switch off after ap- prox. 10 seconds. Pressing the screen or pressing one of the infotainment buttons will turn the screen on again.

Brightness : To select the brightness level of the screen.

Day / Night : To select the type of display (Day, Night or Automatic).

Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a function button is pressed is active.

Proximity sensor : The proximity sensors are active. Also see page 170, Proximity sensor.

Show clock in standby mode : In standby mode, the time is displayed on the infotainment system screen.

Time and date : Change the time and date settings.

Clock time source : To select the time source (GPS or manual).

GPS : The time and date can be selected using the Time zone function button. In this case, the Time and Date function buttons for manual

entry will not be active.

Manual : The time and date can be set manual- ly using the Time and Date function buttons.

Time : To set the time manually.

Time zone : To adjust the desired time zone.

Function button: function

Time format : To select the time display format (12 or 24 hours).

Date : To set the current date.

Date format : To select the date display format (DD.MM.YYYY , YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY ).

Language : To select the desired language for texts and phrases in the voice control system.

Additional keypad languages : To select additional key- board languages.

Units : To set the units of measurement of the vehi- cle's displays: distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption and pressure.

Data transfer for SEAT apps

Data transfer for SEAT apps : This allows data to be exchanged between the vehicle and SEAT apps. They are not personal data.

Operation via apps : Change the level of interaction with apps.

Deactivate: This limits specific functions that require a higher level of security. Confirm : Allows 100% of functions of the app,

and certain specific actions on the Infotain- ment system have to be confirmed. Allow . Allows all available functions to be exe-

cuted from the app.

Voice control : To change the voice control settings page 174.

Function button: function

Remove safely : To eject the data medium (SD/USB card) from the system. After correctly ejecting the data storage device from the system, the function button becomes inactive (grey colour).

Factory settings : When the original factory settings are restored, all inputs and settings that are made are deleted, depending on the selected settings.

Bluetooth : To change the Bluetooth page 240 settings.

WLAN a): To change the WLAN access point settings page 208.

System information : Display of the system information (device number, hardware and software versions).

Update : To update the navigation data, do page 212 No remove the memory card while the navigation data are being installed.

Copyright : Information about copyright.

Configuration wizard : Opens the Infotainment systems initial configuration wizard.

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.

Note For the proper functioning of the Infotain- ment system it is important that the date and time set in the vehicle are correct.

172

Introduction

Volume and sound settings

The settings that can be selected varies de- pending on the country and the equipment in question, and on the vehicle's equipment.

Press the Infotainment button and then press the Sound function button. Press the main menu function button for the settings that have to be changed. All settings are applied instantly.

Overview of screen and function buttons

Function button: function

Volume : To change the volume settings.

Warnings : To set the playback volume of warn- ings, such as traffic announcements.

Navigation announcements : To set the playback volume of audio driving recommendations.

Voice control : To set the playback volume of voice control.

Maximum switch-on volume : To set the equipment's maximum switch-on volume.

Speed-dependent volume adjustment (GALA): To set the extent to which the volume is adjusted de- pending on the speed. The volume of the audio will increase automatically as the speed of the vehicle increases.

Entertainment fading when parking : To adjust the desired reduction in audio volume when ParkPi- lot is active.

Function button: function

Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Adjusts the playback volume when the navigator is speaking.

Volume : To set the playback volume of audio sources connected via the AUX-IN multimedia jack (Low, Medium or High). Also see page 173, Overview of screen and function buttons.

Bluetooth audio : To set the playback volume of the audio sources connected by Bluetooth

(Low, Medium or High). Also see page 173, Overview of screen and function buttons.

Equaliser : To adjust the sound properties.

Balance - Fader : To adjust the sound distribution. The cursor indicates the current sound distribution in the passenger compartment. To modify the sound distri- bution, briefly press on the desired position in the passenger compartment view or use the arrow keys for a step-by-step modification. To centre sound dis- tribution in the passenger compartment view, press the central function button located between the ar- rows.

Sound focus : Optimizes the sound in the passenger compartment.

Subwoofer *: Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer.

Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a func- tion button is pressed is active.

No navigation announcements during calls : During a tel- ephone conversation, audio driving recommenda- tions will not be given.

Adjust the playback volume of external audio sources If you need to increase the playback volume for the external audio source, first lower the base volume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audio source is very low, increase the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input volume to medium or high.

If the sound from the connected external au- dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input vol- ume to medium or low.

173

Infotainment System

Voice control

How it works

Fig. 167 Voice control: main screen

Many of the radio, media, telephone and nav- igation functions can be changed by voice commands.

The voice control of the infotainment system will only be available for the language selec- ted in System settings page 171.

Voice control settings page 176.

Start and stop voice control To activate voice control, briefly press the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the infotainment system. When activating voice control, a dialogue start tone will sound and the main voice con- trol screen will be displayed, Fig. 167, (the

main screen will appear in the format selec- ted in Voice control settings page 176). The spoken indications guide you through the following dialogue. Speak the desired command and follow the instructions in the dialogue. Often a func- tion can be activated by different spoken commands. If in doubt, try speaking a com- mand or say Help. When an action is taken (e.g., call a con- tact), the voice control ends automatically and you must activate it again if you want to continue with it. There are certain commands after which the voice control does not end, and it waits by saying Next command?. To manually end voice control, press and hold the button until the corresponding confirmation signal sounds, or briefly press the button twice, or press the function but- ton in the upper right corner of the screen. You can also end the voice control by speaking the following commands: Stop or Cancel.

Voice control help It is recommended to listen to the Help the first time you use the voice control.

Activate voice control . Say the command Help to start it in the lan- guage indicated System Settings , and fol- low the instructions in the dialogue. The Help

command can also be spoken followed by a function of the infotainment system, such as Help with navigation.

Interacting with the dialogue mode Icons in upper left corner:

The system waits for a user's command.

The system has recognised a command and will act shortly. The system transmits a spoken com- mand and confirms the command that has been given. The system is in paused mode. (max. 3 minutes).

Hide or show the voice control menu Fig. 167.

Operation during the dialogue While the infotainment system transmits a spoken instruction, the symbol will be dis- played on the screen.

You can stop the speech by pressing the upper left icon on the screen or button and voice recognition will resume for the user.

IMPORTANT: The system will ONLY recog- nize a command when the symbol is displayed as active on the panel or on the touchscreen.

/

174

Introduction

If you make a mistake when speaking a com- mand, or pronounce it incompletely and it has no effect, you may repeat the command. The symbol remains activated.

Briefly press button to repeat the com- mand.

Voice control instructions Follow the instructions shown below for opti- mal operation of the voice control.

Speak slowly and clearly if possible. The system will not recognise words that are un- clearly pronounced, or words and numbers that are missing syllables. Telephone numbers should be spoken digit by digit, or by blocks units, tens or hundreds. Speak at a normal volume, without exag- gerated pronunciation or long pauses. Avoid outside and nearby noise (for exam- ple, conversations inside the vehicle). Close all doors, windows and the sliding sunroof. Do not direct the air from the outlets to- wards the roof of the passenger compart- ment. If you are driving at high speed, talk a little louder.

By activating voice control the system takes you to the main screen Fig. 167, which will display the contexts in which the system op- erates and the main commands.

From here you can command the system based on the context that you want to oper- ate, or give a voice command directly.

When selecting each of the contexts (Naviga- tion, Telephone, Radio, Media, Voice control) a menu will displayed listing the main com- mands, and providing brief explanations of how to give each of them, as a help mode.

Voice control (RADIO)

Effect Voice command

LISTEN TO THE RADIO Listen to the radio

SELECT STATION Station STATION NAME 1

Set station

SELECT FREQUENCY Frequency 87.9

Set frequency

CHANGE BAND Band FM

Change band

Voice control (MEDIA)

Effect Voice command

SOURCE SELECTION Play Jukeboxa)

Listen to CD

MUSIC SELECTION Select track / album / ar- tist / genre

Effect Voice command

PLAY SIMILAR TITLESa) Play similar titles

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Voice control (TELEPHONE)

Effect Voice command

CALL CONTACTS

Call Name Surname Home

Call Name Surname Mo- bile

CALL NUMBERS Call 01234

Call number

CALL LIST Show all calls

Missed calls

REDIAL Redial

CALL MAILBOX Call mailbox

SMS Read out text message

SERVICE Breakdown call

INFORMATION Information call

175

Infotainment System

Voice control (NAVIGATION)*

Effect Voice command

ENTER THE ADDRESS Enter address

Guide to City, Street, numbera)

SEARCH FOR SPEC. DESTINATIONa)

Search for car parks

Search for restaurants near destination

HOME ADDRESS Home address

LAST DESTINATIONS Last destinations

NAVIGATION TO CON- TACTS

Navigate to Name Sur- name

ROUTE GUIDANCE Start route guidance

Route information

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Voice control

Effect Voice command

VOICE CONTROL

Pardon?

Back

Main menu

Cancel voice control

Pause voice control

Effect Voice command

HELP Help

What can I say?

VOICE BUTTON

Note Voice control is not available when parking

Voice control settings

Press the infotainment button > Set- tings > Voice control.

When closing a menu, the changes will be made automatically.

Function button: function

Example commands (infotainment system) : Display voice control examples on the infotainment system screen.

Example commands (instrument cluster) a): Display voice control examples on the instrument panel.

Voice control session start tone : a signal will sound when activating voice control. Press to deactivate the signal.

Voice control session end tone : a signal will sound when deactivating voice control. Press to deactivate the signal.

Function button: function

Input tone in voice dialogue : the input tone to confirm an order is activated.

End tone in voice dialogue : the end tone to confirm an order is deactivated.

a) Available depending on equipment

176

Connectivity

Connectivity

Data transfer

Introduction

This communication can allow data to be read and/or written.

From the menu SETTINGS > Data trans- fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to activate/deactivate the function and a drop- down menu called Operation via apps which controls the level of interaction be- tween the apps and the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description

Fig. 168 Related video

The Full Link connection is made through a USB cable.

The Full Link system brings together technol- ogies that allow communication between the Infotainment System and mobile devices:

MirrorLink

Android Auto Apple CarPlay

Interfaces To access the Full Link system, press the info- tainment button or press the infotainment button and then select the Full Link context.

WARNING Any applications that are not suitable or execute incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. SEAT recommends the use of the Apps that SEAT provides for this vehicle. To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must activate the option Settings > Data transfer for SEAT apps. The interaction level of the Apps on the system must be: Allow. Protect the mobile terminal with its appli- cations from improper use. Never make modifications to the applica- tions. Consult the instruction manual for the mobile terminal.

WARNING The use of applications while driving can distract your attention from the traffic. Dis- tracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobiles forbidden, it must be switched off at all times. The radiation pro- duced by the mobile when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam- age caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor quality or are defective, the inadequate program- ming of the applications, the insufficient coverage of the network, the loss of data during transmission or the improper use of mobiles.

Note The use of Full Link technology could in- crease the amount you pay for data. SEAT recommends having a high battery charge on the device when connected to Full Link. SEAT recommends that to use Full Link, the Date and time should be correctly

177

Infotainment System

configured. Select Settings > Time and date. SEAT apps are designed to communicate with the vehicle and interact with it through the Full Link connection. You can find further information on the technical requirements, compatible devi- ces, suitable applications and availability at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 169 Message on Infotainment system screen.

If your vehicle does not have Full Link, you can purchase it as an accessory at your SEAT dealer Fig. 169.

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 170 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not have Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it as an accessory at your Authorised Serv- ice. Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror- Link, Android Auto or Apple CarPlay

1

2

websites to confirm whether your phone is compatible with the system. Mirror Link Check smartphone compatibility:

www.mirrorlink.com/phones MirrorLink 1.1 or higher Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de- vice.

Android Auto Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto: www.android.com/auto/ Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher Install Android Auto app Apple CarPlay Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay:www.apple.com/ios/carplay iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone: Use the approved USB cable supplied with the phone.

3

178

Connectivity

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 171 Full Link Setup

Fig. 172 Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not necessary to establish the connection be- tween the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces- sary to enable all of the app features1).

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

Switch on the Infotainment system Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's USB port using a USB cable page 242. In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se- lect Activate data transfer for SEAT apps Fig. 171.

Finally, a message will appear stating that data transfer will commence when the device is connected. Please note that data is trans- ferred over connections between your vehi- cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec- ted, the technology compatible with your de- vice can be used.

Note Depending on your smartphone, it may have to be unlocked for the connection to occur.

What should I do if it does not con- nect?

Restart the mobile device.

Check the USB cable. Check whether the USB cable is damaged. Check that neither connection (USB/micro USB) is damaged or worn.

Check that the USB ports are correctly connected. Check that the USB port of the vehicle and the device are not damaged and/or deteriorated. Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle). Try with another compatible mobile device. Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT au- thorised service. Have the mobile device repaired or replace it.

1) Using the data connection to transfer the smartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi- tional charges. Please check the charges with your operator.

179

Infotainment System

Tethering of portable devices that support MirrorLink , Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay technolo- gies

Fig. 173 Full Link menu

When you enter Full Link for the first time, the technologies available for pairing the porta- ble device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys- tem will offer you the technologies available for establishing a connection.

In the event of simultaneous connections be- tween two devices with different operating systems, a choice will be presented for which one to make the connection with Fig. 173.

View of the device list iPhone devices only support Apple Car- Play.

There are some Android devices that support MirrorLink and Android Auto.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec- ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link Settings

Function button: function

Activate data transfer for SEAT apps : allows the ex- change of information between the vehicle and ap- plications authorised by SEAT.

Last Mode If the telephone connection is terminated on- ly by unplugging the cable, the next time the device is connected, the session will start without the user having to take any action1).

Information Consult the mobile device manual.

Depends on each technology:

Availability in a country Third party applications

1. 2.

For further information:

MirrorLink: www.mirrorlink.com

Apple CarPlay: www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Android Auto: www.android.com/auto

Note In order to use Android Auto technology it is necessary to download the Android Auto application, located on Google Play. Only compatible applications can be used, in accordance with the technology connected.

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be un- locked in order to establish the connection.

180

Connectivity

MirrorLink

Fig. 174 Function buttons in the general view of compatible applications.

Fig. 175 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink is a protocol which enables com- munication between a device and the Info- tainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operate content and functions on the device from the screen of the infotainment system.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving, only specially adapted applications can be used in Full Link technology descrip- tion on page 177.

Requirements In order to use MirrorLink, the following re- quirements must be met:

The device must be compatible with Mirror- Link. Depending on the device that is used, a suitable application must be installed for the use of MirrorLink.

Initiating the connection In order to initiate the connection with the device, just connect it to the Infotainment sys- tem via the USB cable. A pop-up screen will appear, which will re- quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages

Function button: function

Full Link To return to the Full Link main menu.

CLOSE APPS

Press to close the open apps. Then press the apps to be closed or the Close all function button to close all the open ap- plications.

Function button: function

1 : 1 Press to change to the mobile device screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

Fig. 175 1 Press to return to the MirrorLink

main menu.

Fig. 175 2 Press to display all the function buttons in the lower or upper right-hand margin of the screen.

Fig. 175 / OR: Right adjust- ment button

Allows buttons 1 and 2 to be hidden or shown.

MirrorLink setup

Function button: function

Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows : Allows MirrorLink

pop-up windows in applications that support it.

Apple CarPlay* 3 Valid for compatible iPhone mobile tele- phones. Also, iPhone mobile telephones only support Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay is a protocol which enables communication between a device and the in- fotainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operate content and functions on the device from the screen of the infotainment system.

181

Infotainment System

Requirements In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following requirements must be met:

Make sure that you do not have Apple CarPlay restricted on your device, at: Set- tings > General > Restrictions > CarPlay > ON. The mobile device must be compatible with Apple CarPlay.

Initiating the connection In order to initiate the connection with the de- vice, just connect it to the Infotainment sys- tem via the USB cable.

A pop-up screen will appear, which will re- quest that you accept the device. If you start the session using Apple CarPlay technology, it will not be possible to pair another device via Bluetooth. The fol- lowing message will appear in the main Phone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlay first to connect a different mo- bile phone.

Holding down the button will start the Apple voice engine.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto* 3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Android Auto is a protocol which enables communication between a device and the in- fotainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operate content and functions on the device from the screen of the infotainment system.

Requirements In order to use Android Auto, the following requirements must be met:

The mobile device must be compatible with Android Auto. The Android Auto application should al- ready be downloaded and installed on the mobile device.

Initiating the connection In order to initiate the connection with the de- vice, just use the USB cable to connect it to the infotainment system and follow the in- structions on the device to be paired.

The first connection to Android Auto must be done while the vehicle is stationary. Once the first pop-up window about ac- cepting data transfer between the car and the device has been accepted, a message will appear requesting that you check your

mobile device for the confirmations needed to pair it with the Infotainment system. If you are starting the session using Android Auto technology, the device also automati- cally connects to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth and it will not be possible to pair another device via Bluetooth.

Holding down the button will start the Android voice engine.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- ment system, press the button.

Note Some devices require a change in the USB connection mode in order to use Android Auto. Make sure that your device is in Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) mode before it is connected to the Infotainment system.

Note Android Auto requires the use of Google services, as well as certain basic applica- tions of the Android system. Make sure that you always have Google services updated in order to use this tech- nology.

182

Connectivity

Frequently asked questions about Full Link

What connection method is used? USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? No. The USB cable supplied with the device should be used.

Is it possible to navigate? Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link technologies if the technology is available in your country and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Link system navigator (via a device) instead of anoth- er navigator? Advantages: Daily updates. Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages? With certified applications, you can reply, not send.

What applications will be visible while driving? Depending on the technology: for MirrorLink: Apps certified by SEAT and the CCC, for Android Auto: Apps selected by Google, for Apple CarPlay: Apps selected by Apple.

Where can I find compatible Apps? Compatible apps are listed at the following links: www.mirrorlink.com/ www.android.com/auto/ www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Where can I download the apps? On Google Play for Android Auto/MirrorLink and on Apple Store for Apple CarPlay.

If Full Link stops working, where can I go to repair it? If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal- er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should see your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified? The WhatsApp situation depends on the technology.

Is MirrorLink available in my country? Yes, MirrorLink is available in all countries and re- gions where SEAT is located.

What are the differences between MirrorLink, Android Auto and Apple CarPlay? MirrorLink is not compatible with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay, as they are different technologies. They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto is designed for mobile devices with the Android oper- ating system, and Apple CarPlay for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink be installed in a previous SEAT model? No, it is not possible.

Where can I find more information about Full Link? If you have any questions, please see our Innova- tion/Connectivity sections on our website: www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re- sponde@seat.es

SEAT Media Control*

Introduction

Fig. 176 Related video

The SEAT Media Control1) app can be used to remotely operate some partial functions in Radio, Media and Navigation mode. Informa- tion can be exchanged between a device and the Infotainment System.

1) Availability depends on the country. 183

Infotainment System

The functions are operated by means of a Tablet or partially by a mobile phone.

Operating requirements: A tablet or mobile phone. The app must be available on the corre- sponding device. There must be a WLAN connection between the Infotainment System and the device. Se- lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN > Share connection over WLAN > Config- uration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti- vated:

From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans- fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to activate/deactivate the function and a drop- down menu called Operation via apps which controls the level of interaction be- tween the apps and the system. Select Menu > Settings > Data transfer from mo- bile devices.

You can obtain information about technical requirements on the SEAT website or at SEAT dealerships.

Telephone functions do not form part o this app.

Data transmission and control functions

Fig. 177 SEAT Media Control Main menu

With SEAT Media Control you can operate the Infotainment System from other places in the vehicle in Radio and Media modes and, depending on the country and the equip- ment, you can exchange the following infor- mation between a device and the Infotain- ment System:

Navigation destinations. Traffic information. Social media contents. Audio transmission. Vehicle data. Location-specific information, for example, POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction

The Infotainment System can be used to share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi- ces page 185, Configuration for sharing a connection over WLAN.

The Infotainment System can also use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro- vide Internet to the devices connected to the hotspot (WLAN client) page 185, Config- ure Internet access.

Note Data transmission may incur charges. Due to the high volume of data exchanged, SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar- iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op- erators can provide the relevant informa- tion. The exchange of data packages may generate additional costs, depending on your mobile phone rate, particularly if you are abroad (for example, roaming rates).

184

Connectivity

Configuration for sharing a con- nection over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Press the Infotainment button and then press the Settings menu. Activate the wireless network. To do so, press the WLAN function button. Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the device that is to be connected. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers instruction man- ual. Activate the mobile device assignment on the Infotainment System. To do so, press the Enable WLAN connection button and acti- vate the checkbox. Enter and confirm the network key dis- played on the device.

The following settings can also be made on the menu Share connection:

WPA2 encryption auto- matically generates a network key.

Network key automatically generated. Press the function button to manually change the network key. The

Security level:

Network key:

network key must have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63.

WLAN Network name (maximum of 32 characters).

Ac- tivate the checkbox to deactivate the visibility of the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create a ciphered local wireless network quickly and simply.

Establish the connection with the wireless network (WLAN) page 208. Press the WPS button on the WLAN router until the warning light on the router starts flashing. If the WLAN router does not support WPS the network must be configured man- ually.

SSID:

Do not send network name (SSID):

OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router starts flashing. Press the WPS button on the WLAN device. The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Configure Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to establish an internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Activate and check the wireless hotspot on the external device. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers instruction manual. Press the Infotainment button and then press the Settings menu; OR access Media or SEAT Md. Ctrl. and press the SETTINGS menu. Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLAN connection and check the verification box. Press the Find function button and select the device you want from the list.

1) This function depends on the equipment and the country in question.

185

Infotainment System

If necessary, enter the network key of the device in the Infotainment System and con- firm with OK.

To manually enter the net- work settings of an external (WLAN) de- vice.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.

Note Due to the large number of devices on the market, it is not possible to guarantee fault- free operation of all functions.

Manual settings:

186

Operating modes

Operating modes

Radio

Related video

Fig. 178 Radio mode

RADIO main menu

Fig. 179 RADIO main menu.

Fig. 180 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button to open the Radio main menu Fig. 179.

RADIO main menu function buttons

Function button: function

1 Memory keys (1 to 18 memories, 3 banks (screens) page 190)

BAND Select the band.

STATION LIST List of radio station that can be tuned.

MANUAL Selecting the frequency manually.

VIEW Selecting the information shown on the screen. Only available in DAB mode.

SETTINGS Settings menu for the current frequen- cy band.

/ Previous or next station that is stored or on the station list. See Settings page 193.

Function button: function

Scan Stops the station search (visible only if it is running page 193).

Indications and possible icons

Display: Meaning

A

Frequency or name of the station or radio text. The name of the radio sta- tion and the radio text will only be dis- played if RDS is active.

RDS off The RDS radio data service is deacti- vated.

TP Traffic information can be retrieved: select Radio > Settings > Traffic programme (TP).

No stations with traffic news are avail- able.

The radio station is stored on a memo- ry button.

Note The AM and DAB bands will be available according to countries and/or equipment. In this case, the BAND function button will not be displayed. Being underground, in tunnels, in areas with tall buildings or mountains can inter- fere with the radio reception.

187

Infotainment System

Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehi- cles with a window aerial. Radio stations are responsible for the content of the information they transmit.

Radio data services RDS (FM band)

Fig. 181 Standard representation: FM station listing menu

The RDS (Radio Data System) or radio data service offers additional FM information such as the display of the station name, automatic station tracking (AF), texts broadcast by radio (Radio text), traffic announcements (TP) and the type of station (PTY).

Depending on the country and the equip- ment in question, RDS can be deactivated in the FM Settings menu page 193.

In general, no radio data services are avail- able without RDS.

Station name and automatic station track- ing If the RDS function is available, the names of the stations can be displayed on the RADIO main menu and on the Station list.

FM stations temporarily transmit other con- tent on different regional frequencies under the same name (for example, Station 3).

In general, automatic station tracking takes charge of switching to the frequency with the best reception of the station that is tuned at any given time, while driving. However, this may cause a regional broadcast to be inter- rupted.

Automatic frequency switching and automat- ic station tracking can be deactivated in FM Settings page 193.

Set a station name In certain cases the station name is exces- sively long. This text can be locked / unlocked by pressing on the name of the station for about 3 seconds until an audible warning is

heard (a point will flash to the right and left of the station name).

Radio text Some stations that have RDS transmit addi- tional information in text, the so-called radio text.

The radio text is displayed in the upper half of the screen above the memory buttons Fig. 179 A .

The radio text display can be deactivated in the Settings page 193.

Order of the station list The stations available at any given time are displayed on the station list screen (STA- TIONS function button). This list can be sorted by broadcast group, genre or alphabetically Fig. 181.

Note The RDS functionality will be limited in some countries for infrastructure reasons, and traffic announcements (TP), automatic station tracking (AF) and station type (PTY) may not be available.1)

1) Depends on the market and unit in question. 188

Operating modes

Digital radio mode (DAB, DAB + and DMB audio)*

Fig. 182 Display of memory buttons in DAB mode.

Fig. 183 Station information display in DAB mode.

The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB + and DMB audio transmission standards.

In Europe, digital radio is transmitted over band III frequencies (from 174 MHz to 240 MHz).

The frequencies are called channels and have an abbreviation (eg 12 A ).

In a channel, several available DAB stations are grouped together in an ensemble.

Starting the Digital radio mode In the RADIO main menu, press the BAND function button and select DAB .

The last DAB station that was selected will be played, if it can still be tuned in that location.

The selected DAB station is shown in the top bar of the screen. The selected station en- semble is shown below Fig. 182.

Additional DAB stations (Secondary Serv- ice Components) Some DAB stations temporarily or perma- nently offer additional stations (for example, for the transmission of sporting events).

DAB stations containing additional stations are identified on the station list by the symbol .

Select additional stations Press the name of the main station on the DAB main menu to select an additional sta-

tion. Or, select the additional station from the station list.

On the DAB main menu, the name of the ad- ditional tuned station is displayed next to the abbreviated name of the main DAB station.

Additional stations can not be saved.

Automatic station tracking DAB radio is not currently available every- where. DAB radio mode displays the areas without DAB coverage .

If the DAB station that is being listened to can no longer be tuned (e.g. there is no DAB cov- erage), the infotainment system tries to find and tune the same station in the different available frequency bands. If the station can not be found again, the radio sound is muted. Automatic station tracking can be activated in the DAB Settings in the following modes page 194:

DAB - DAB station tracking: The radio tries to tune to the same station on an alternative DAB frequency. To allow station tracking, both DAB stations need to broadcast the same station identification, or to signal the other corresponding DAB station through DAB. DAB - FM Automatic switching: The radio tries to tune to the same station in the FM fre- quency band. To allow station tracking, the DAB station and the FM station need to

189

Infotainment System

broadcast the same station identification, or to signal the other corresponding FM station through DAB. When the corresponding FM station has been found, FM is displayed be- hind the name of the station. If the corre- sponding DAB station becomes available again, it returns to DAB mode after a while and the FM identification is concealed. Switch to a similar station: This allows service providers to indicate alternative sta- tions with similar content. In this way, if the ra- dio loses coverage of a DAB station and does not find an alternative FM or DAB frequency, it is possible to tune to a station with similar content.

Radio text Some stations transmit additional text infor- mation, the so-called radio text.

Radio text is displayed in the upper half of the screen above the memory buttons Fig. 182 or on the Station Information or Radio text screens of the Display menu page 190.

The radio text display can be deactivated in the DAB Settings page 194.

Slideshow Some stations transmit additional visual infor- mation in the form of images.

These images are displayed as a slideshow on the Stations or Slideshow screens of the Screen menu page 190.

The slideshow can be displayed in full screen by pressing on the current image.

Screen Menu The function buttons refer to the menu that is displayed when the View button is pressed Fig. 182.

Function button: function

Preset list : Viewing the preset buttons Fig. 182.

Station List : Simultaneous display of radio text and slideshows instead of memory keys Fig. 183.

Radio text : The radio text is displayed instead of the memory buttons.

Slideshow : Slideshows are shown in full screen mode.

Note Not all DAB stations broadcast radio text and slideshows.

Memory buttons

Fig. 184 RADIO main menu.

In the Radio main menu, you can store sta- tions from all available frequency wave- lengths on the numbered function buttons. These function buttons are called memory buttons.

Storing the station on the memory buttons See: Preset stations page 192.

Change the memory bank (screens) Move your finger over the screen from left to right or vice-versa. OR: Press one of the function buttons Fig. 184 A

190

Operating modes

Selecting the station from the memory buttons Press the memory button corresponding to the desired station.

The stored stations can only be played by pressing the corresponding memory button provided it can be received at your current location.

Storing the station logo on the memory buttons Saved stations can be assigned logos page 191.

Save station logos

Save automatically (only in FM and DAB mode) When a station is saved, the station logo is automatically assigned.

If there are 2 or more logos in the database, there is the option to choose the appropriate one.

Saving manually Station logos can be imported from a com- patible data medium (for example, memory card or memories with a USB port).

Press the function button Settings and then Station logos . Press the stored station button that you want to use to store a station logo. Select the source in which the logo has been memorized (for example, SD Card 1 ). It is recommended that the logos should be put in the root directory of the memory unit. Select the station logo. Repeat the process to assign other logos; press the infotainment key to return to the Radio main menu. If you want to change the logo of a memory button where a button has already been saved, it must first be deleted from the button in question.

Note Not all stations are in the database, so it is not always possible to assign logos auto- matically.

Select, tune and save stations

Selecting stations

Select the sta- tion using the arrow keys

Press the function button or Fig. 179. This switches between stations available for tuning page 193.

Selecting stations

Selecting sta- tions from the station list

Press the Stations Fig. 179 func- tion button to open the station list.

Browse the list and tune to the sta- tion you want by pressing it.

Press the BACK Fig. 180 function button to close the list. If it is not used, the list will close auto- matically after a while.

Manually tuning a station frequency

Display the frequency band

Press the Manual function but- ton Fig. 179.

Changing the frequency step by step

Turn the adjustment knob.

OR: Press the + or keys on the dial displayed on the screen.

Quickly track the frequency band

Press and hold one of the arrow buttons on the left of the multifunc- tion steering wheel. Releasing the button switches to the next radio station that can be tuned.

OR: Keep your finger on the scroll button in the frequency band and move your finger to move the but- ton.

191

Infotainment System

Manually tuning a station frequency

Hide the fre- quency band

Briefly press the settings button.

Selecting a station using the mem- ory button also ends the manual selection of frequencies. If no oper- ations are performed, the frequen- cy band is hidden after a while.

Presetting stations

Saving the sta- tion that is be- ing listened to.

Press and hold the desired preset button Fig. 179 until an audible signal is heard.

The tuned station is stored on a preset button.

Saving a sta- tion from the stations list

Press the Stations Fig. 179 func- tion button to open the station list.

The stations that are already stor- ed on a memory key are marked on the station list with the symbol Fig. 180.

Select the desired station by pressing and holding it down on the screen. A screen opens for sav- ing the station on the memory but- tons.

Press the memory key where the station will be saved.

A sound is heard and the station is saved on the memory button. Re- peat the process to continue sav- ing other station on the list.

Presetting stations

Delete preset stations

The Settings menu can be used to delete all of the saved stations together, or separately page 193.

Automatic playback (SCAN)

When automatic playback is active, all tune- able stations in the selected frequency band are played for approximately 5 seconds each.

Start and end automatic playback

Start automatic playback

Press the Settings function button and then select Scan .

End automatic playback

Press the function button to stop automatic playback on the station that is being played.

Automatic playback also ends when a station is selected man- ually using the memory buttons, or when the screen is changed.

Traffic information (TP)

It is only possible for traffic information to be tracked with the TP function if the station in question can be tuned. Stations with the traf- fic information function are shown on the RA-

DIO main menu and on the station list with the symbol TP Fig. 179 and Fig. 180.

Some stations without their own traffic infor- mation support the TP function by broad- casting traffic announcement from other sta- tions (EON).

Activating and deactivating the TP func- tion In the Settings (FM, AM, DAB) menu, activate or deactivate the Traffic programme (TP) function button by

pressing it page 193.

Active TP function and station selection Traffic announcements are played in Audio mode.

If a station without the TP function in FM mode is selected, the radio tries to find stations with this function in the background. If none are found, it will be displayed half way up the left hand side of the screen .

In AM mode or in Media mode, a traffic sta- tion is automatically tuned in the background as long as there is one available. Depending on the situation this operation may take some time.

192

Operating modes

Incoming traffic announcement In Audio mode, traffic announcements are played automatically when they are received.

While the traffic announcement is playing, a pop-up window is displayed and the radio switches, if necessary, to the traffic informa- tion station.

Media mode is interrupted and the volume is set as adjusted page 173.

The volume of the traffic announcement can be changed with the volume control . The modified volume remains as set for subse- quent warnings.

Press the Cancel function button to end the current travel warning. The TP function re- mains active. OR: Press the Deactivate function button to end the current traffic announcement and deactivate the TP function permanently. The function can be reactivated in the Settings menu.

Settings (FM, AM, DAB)

FM settings Select the FM frequency band by pressing the infotainment key .

OR: Press the BAND function button and se- lect the FM frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to open the FM settings menu.

Function button: function

Sound : Sound settings page 173.

Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable stations in the selected frequency band are played for approximately 5 seconds each page 192.

Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons and . The setting applies to all frequency bands (FM, AM and DAB).

Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be- tween all of the saved stations in the selected frequency band.

Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch between all of the tuneable stations in the selec- ted frequency band.

Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of traffic information stations) is active page 192.

Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta- tions.

Station logos : To assign or delete manually the sta- tion logos saved in the memory keys page 191.

Radio text : The radio text is active page 188, Ra- dio text.

Advanced settings a): Radio data services (RDS) set- tings.

Function button: function

Autostore station logos a): The stations saved on the memory buttons are automatically assigned ra- dio station logos if they are available in the info- tainment system. Also see page 191.

Station logo region a): This allows the vehicle's re- gion (country) to be selected. This optimizes the automatic assignment of station logos. The op- tion also allows the system to select the region automatically.

Automatic frequency control (AF) a): Automatic sta- tion tracking is active. When there is no check in check box , the function button RDS regional will be inactive (grey).

Radio data system (RDS) a): The Radio Data System (RDS) is deactivated page 188. If there is no check in check box , the traffic information station (TP), radio text, station name and pro- gram type functions will not be available.

RDS regional a): Set the RDS automatic station tracking page 188.

Fixed : Only alternative frequencies of the set station with an identical region program are set.

Automatic : It always changes to the frequen- cy of the set station that has the best signal at the time, even if a regional broadcast that is in progress is interrupted.

a) This depends on the country and unit in question.

AM settings Select the AM frequency band by pressing the infotainment key .

193

Infotainment System

OR: Press the BAND function button and se- lect the AM frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to open the AM settings menu.

Function button: function

Sound : Sound settings page 173.

Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable stations in the selected frequency band are played for approximately 5 seconds each page 192.

Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons and . The setting applies to all frequency bands (FM, AM and DAB).

Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be- tween all of the saved stations in the selected frequency band.

Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch between all of the tuneable stations in the selec- ted frequency band.

Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of traffic information stations) is active page 192.

Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta- tions.

Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on memory buttons page 191.

DAB settings Select the DAB frequency band by pressing the infotainment button .

OR: Press the BAND function button and se- lect the DAB frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to open the DAB settings menu.

Function button: function

Sound : Sound settings page 173.

Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable stations in the selected frequency band are played for approximately 5 seconds each page 192.

Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons and . The setting applies to all frequency bands (FM, AM and DAB).

Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be- tween all of the saved stations in the selected frequency band.

Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch between all of the tuneable stations in the selec- ted frequency band.

Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of traffic information stations) is active page 192.

Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta- tions.

Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on memory buttons page 191.

Radio text : The radio text is active page 188, Ra- dio text.

Advanced settings : DAB services settings.

Function button: function

Autostore station logos a): Station logos are as- signed automatically when the radio stations are stored on the memory buttons page 191.

DAB traffic announcements : DAB traffic announce- ments are played in the same way as TP traffic announcements in any equipment mode.

Other DAB announcements : DAB announcements (news, sports information, weather, warnings, etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode is ac- tive.

DAB - DAB station tracking : Automatic station track- ing within the DAB frequency range is active.

Automatic DAB - FM switching : Switching to the FM frequency band is permitted for automatic sta- tion tracking.

Switch to a similar station : This allows service pro- viders to indicate alternative stations with similar content.b)

a) This depends on the country and unit in question. b) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

194

Operating modes

Media

Introduction

Fig. 185 Related video

Audio or image sources containing files in dif- ferent media are known as media sources.

These audio files can be played through the corresponding players or the infotainment system's audio inputs.

Only supported files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored.

Copyright Consider the legislation on the intellectual property of audio and video files.

Note MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technolo- gy and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. This product is protected by certain Mi- crosoft Corporation copyright and proper- ty rights. The use or commercialization of technology of this type outside the config- uration of this product, without a licence

from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft branch is prohibited. The infotainment system only plays com- patible undamaged audio files; other files are ignored. Check the list of compatible devices on the SEAT website.

Requirements for data media and files

The factory-fitted CD and DVD players are class 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6 / VDE 0837.

Only standard 12 cm CD/DVDs and 32 mm x 24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm memory cards can be inserted in the infotainment system.

Any playable file formats on the list will here- inafter be known as audio files. A CD con- taining these types of audio files is called an audio data CD.

195

Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Navi System Plus

Data media Playback requirements

Audio files Video files

Optical discs: Audio CD (up to 80 min). Standard video DVD and compatible audio DVD. CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) with the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system. DVD +/- R / RW up to a maximum of 4.7 GB and double layer DVD up to max. 8.5 GB in the Joliet file system (single session only); UDF. Memory cards: SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB). SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems. USB data media: Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications. FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system. Different generations of iPodsa), iPadsa) and iPhonesa). MTP players with the trademarks PlaysForSure or Ready- ForVista.. Jukebox (internal SSD memory).

Digital Audio Specification. MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or variable transfer rate. WAV files (.wav). WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer rates of up to 384kbit/s. AAC files (.m4a,.m4b and.aac) without copy protection. OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s. FLAC files (.flac). Matroska container files (.mka).

v Maximum resolution 720 x 576 pixel and 25-30fps (frames per second). MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 formats (.mpg,.mpeg,.m2ts,.avi and.mkv) with a maximum resolution of 352x288 pix- els. ISO MPEG-4 format (.mp4,.m4v,.avi,.mov,.3gp and.mkv). MPEG-4 ASP DivX format 4, 5 and 6 (.avi,.divx and.mkv). Xvid MPEG-4 format (.avi and.mkv). MPEG-4 H.264 format: (.mp4,.m4v,.mov,.3gp,.avi,.m2ts,.mkv,.flv,.f4v and.webm). Windows Media Video 9 format (.wmv,.asf,.mp4,.m4v,.mov,.3gp and.avi). MJPEG format (.avi,.mov,.mp4 and.m4v). Theora format (.ogv).

Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats. Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries. File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters. On DVD, a maximum of 1000 files per medium and directory. On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per directory. On the Jukebox (SSD), a maximum of 3000 files.

Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions page 205.

Playing audio files via Bluetoothb). The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth profile page 205.

Playing audio files over WLAN. The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions page 208

a) iPod, iPad and iPhone are protected trademarks of Apple Inc. b) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

196

Operating modes

Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi System

Data media Requirements for playing audio files

Optical discs: Audio CD (up to 80 min). CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) with the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.

Memory cards: SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB). SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems.

USB data media: Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications. FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system. Different generations of iPodsa), iPadsa) and iPhonesa). MTP players with the trademarks PlaysForSure or ReadyForVista..

Digital Audio Specification. MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or varia- ble transfer rate. WAV files (.wav). WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer rates of up to 384kbit/s. AAC files (.m4a,.m4b and.aac) without copy protection. OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s. FLAC files (.flac).

Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats. Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries. File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters. On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per di- rectory.

Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions page 205.

Playing audio files via Bluetoothb). The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth profile page 205.

Play audio files through WLAN. The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions page 208

a) iPod, iPad and iPhone are protected trademarks of Apple Inc. b) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Read and bear in mind the instruction manual for the external data storage device.

Limitations and indications Dirt, high temperatures and mechanical damage can cause data media to fail. Con- sider the indications provided by the manu- facturer of the data media.

Quality differences between data media pro- duced by different manufacturers can cause playback interference.

Consider copyright legislation!

The configuration of data media or of the equipment or programs used for recording may cause some tracks or data media to be

unreadable. On the Internet, for example, can be found information about the best way to record audio files or data media (compres- sion rate, ID3 tag, etc.).

The reading speed can vary considerably depending on the size, the usage status

197

Infotainment System

(copying and deleting processes), the struc- ture of the folders and the type of files of the data media used.

Playlists only establish a certain playback order. The files are not saved in them. Play- lists cannot be played if the files on the data media are not saved to the path to which the playlist refers.

A cover can only be displayed when the name starts with Cover , Folder or Al- bum.

Note Do not use memory card adaptors, USB extension cords or USB hubs! SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio- ration or loss of files on data storage devi- ces.

Playback order of files and folders

Fig. 186 Example of the structure of an audio data CD.

The audio files stored on data media are often arranged by file folders and playlists to establish a certain playback order.

Depending on their name on the data media, tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu- merically and alphabetically.

The illustration shows an example of a con- ventional audio data CD, containing tracks , folders and subfolders Fig. 186.

In this case the tracks will be played as fol- lows1):

Tracks 1 and 2 in the root directory (Root) of the CD Tracks 3 and 4 in the first F1 folder of the CD root directory Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of fold- er F1. Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of subfolder F1.1 Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of folder F1 Track 8 and 9 in the second folder F2

Note The playback sequence can be modified by selecting the different playback modes page 199. Playlists do not play automatically, they have to be selected directly from the track selection menu page 202.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1) The Mix/repeat including subfolders function must be active in the Media settings menu page 211.

198

Operating modes

MEDIA main menu

Fig. 187 MEDIA main menu.

Using the Media main menu, different media sources can be selected and played.

Press the infotainment button to open the Media Fig. 187main menu.

It will continue playing the last media source selected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicated on the dropdown list when pressing the SOURCE function button Fig. 187.

If there is no available media source, the Me- dia main menu is displayed.

MEDIA main menu function buttons

Function button: function

SOURCE

The media source that is being played. Press to select another me- dia source.

JUKEBOX a): Internal hard drive (SSD) page 206.

CD/DVD :a) Internal page 203 CD and DVD drive.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memo- ry card page 204.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data stor- age device connected to the USB port page 204.

AUX : External audio source con- nected to the AUX-IN multimedia socket page 205.

BT AUDIO : Bluetooth audio page 205.

WLAN *: External audio source con- nected by WLAN page 208

SELECTION Depending on the level, track list, folders or source.

/ Changes track in Media mode or fast forward/rewind.

Playback stops. The function button changes to .

Function button: function

Playback is resumed. The func- tion button changes to .

a)

Play similar tracks. Creates a virtual playlist that in- cludes tracks with a similar rhythm to the one being played if available using Gracenote.

SETTINGS Opens the menu Media Set- tings.

REPEAT

Repeats all the tracks that are on the same memory level as the track being played at that moment. If in the Media Settings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the sub- folders.

REPEAT

Repeat the current track.

MIX

Random playback of tracks that are at the same memory level as the current track. If in the Media Set- tings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the sub- folders.

a) Only available for the Navi System Plus model.

199

Infotainment System

Indications and symbols of the MEDIA main menu

Display: Meaning

A

Information about the artist name, al- bum name and song title.

Audio CD: track information if availa- ble via Gracenotea). If no data is available, it only displays Track and the corresponding order number.

B

Album cover. The system prioritizes the display as follows: 1st Cover embedded in the file(s). 2nd Image in the file folder. 3rd Image provided by the Grace- note databasea)

4th Icon of the connected device.

If playing a video file, by pressing the icon (cover) it can be played on full screen.

C The playing time so far and time re- maining in minutes and seconds.

RDS offb) The RDS radio data service is deacti- vated. The RDS can be activated in the FM settings menu.

TPb) The TP function is active and can be tuned in.

b) There is no traffic news station availa- ble.

Display: Meaning

b) DAB not available.

a) Gracenote is a database available on the Infotain- ment system hard drive that contains information on the tracks of different artists and albums. In order for the user to benefit from the functions offered by Gracenote, the tracks must contain the artist and/or album data (only available for the model: Navi Sys- tem Plus. b) Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note When the media source is inserted, play- ing will not start automatically; it is neces- sary for the user to select the source. Nor will the media source change when it is ejected. In order to see the different covers inside of the same album/folder, make sure that the tracks contain different information about the Artist or Album in its metadata. If not, you will see the same cover for all of tracks contained in the same album/folder.

Switching the Media source

Fig. 188 MEDIA mode: switching media source.

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment system. From the Media main menu, press the SOURCE function button Fig. 188 and se-

lect the desired media source. OR: from the Media main menu, press the Infotainment button repeatedly to cycle through the available media sources.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources not selected are shown as deactivated (in grey).

When a Media source that has already been played is selected again, playback is re- sumed from the point at which it was stop- ped.

Note The Media source can be changed in the Track list view: select Media > View.

200

Operating modes

Changing track in the MEDIA main menu

Fig. 189 MEDIA main menu.

The tracks of the Media source that is being listened to can be changed successively us- ing the arrow buttons.

The arrow buttons cannot be used to exit a playlist or start the playback of a playlist. Both actions have to be performed manually from the track selection menu page 202.

Control through the MEDIA main menu

Action Function

Briefly press the func- tion button once.

At the start of the current track. If the track has been played for less than 3 seconds, it returns to the start of the previous track.

Action Function

Press the function but- ton twice in a row.

If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds, it returns to the start of the previous track. If the first track is being played, pressing the but- ton goes back to the last track on the data media that is being played.

Briefly press the func- tion button once.

To the next track. It changes the last track to the first track on the data media that is being played.

Press and hold function button .

Rewind.

Press and hold function button .

Fast forward.

Slide your finger hori- zontally over the screen.

Change to the previ- ous/next track, with the same playback times as changing tracks with the keys or .

Selecting an album by cover

Fig. 190 Selection by cover.

Clicking on the current cover Fig. 189 1 will display all of the album covers available in the active Media source Fig. 190.

It is possible to browse through all the albums by sliding the covers right or left, by using the bottom horizontal scroll bar, or by using the settings button.

The cover selection view closes after approx- imately 5 seconds of inactivity and the Media main menu is displayed again.

201

Infotainment System

Selecting a track from a track list

Fig. 191 Media Mode: list of folders of a Media source.

Fig. 192 Media Mode: list of tracks of a Media source.

Open a list of tracks Press the SELECT function button on the MEDIA main menu Fig. 189 to open the track list. The track that is playing is highligh- ted Fig. 192.

Search the track list and press the track you want.

If there is track information available, the track (on audio CDs) or the file name (MP3) is displayed instead of Track + num.

Overview of the function buttons in the track list

Function button: function

A Open the Sources menu. Select anoth- er Media source by pressing.

B

Indicates the media source being ex- plored. If pressed, it goes to the root of the device shown on the icon.

JUKEBOX a): Internal hard disk of the info- tainment system (SSD) page 206.

CD/DVD :a) Internal page 203 CD and DVD drive.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memory card page 204.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data storage de- vice connected to the USB port page 204.

BT AUDIO : External Media Player con- nected via Bluetooth page 205.

AUX : Audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket. page 205

WLAN *: External audio source connec- ted by WLAN page 208

Function button: function

C Press the function button to open the top folder of the Media source.

Start playback of the first track.

Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on the same memory level as the track being played at that moment. If in the Media Settings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is

enabled, it also includes the subfolders page 211.

Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are on the same memory level as the track being played at that moment. If in the Media Settings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is

enabled, it also includes the subfolders page 211.

CLOSE To close the tracks list.

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.

Note Tracks, folders and playlists can also be selected by turning the setting button, and they can be played or opened by pressing it.

202

Operating modes

Data bank view

Fig. 193 Media Mode: data bank view

On the track list, click the Show database view option. The content of the current Media source will be listed by Playlists , Artists , Albums , Genres , Tracks and Videos

Fig. 191.

When selecting one of the folders Artists , Albums or Titles , a search button is displayed

in the upper right corner (magnifying glass) that allows searching within the selected cat- egory page 169, Input window with on- screen keypad.

To return to the folder view, press the Show folder view option on the SELECTION

menu.

Insert or remove a CD or DVD 3 The DVD drive is only available for model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 194 Slots for data storage devices in the glove compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating the unit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert or change the data storage device before mov- ing off!

The CD and DVD drives can play audio CDs and DVDs and audio data CDs and DVDs.

Insert a CD or DVD Insert a CD or DVD into the slot Fig. 194 3 with the printed side facing up- wards, until the equipment inserts it automati- cally.

Ejecting a CD or DVD Press button 1 .

The CD or DVD in the drive will be ejected and must be removed within approximately 10 seconds.

If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, it is automatically retracted for security rea- sons without activating the CD mode.

Unreadable or defective CD or DVD If the data on an inserted CD or DVD cannot be read or a defective CD or DVD is inserted, the corresponding warning appears on screen.

Depending on the equipment, unreadable CDs or DVDs are automatically ejected 3 times and reinserted to start another three read attempts before this indication is dis- played.

Note Uneven road surfaces and strong vibra- tions can cause playback to jump. When the temperature inside the equip- ment is too high, loading and playback of CDs and DVDs is disabled. If after inserting a number of different or DVDs and receiving the CD or DVD drive error, every time, contact a specialised workshop.

203

Infotainment System

Inserting or ejecting a memory card

Depending on the features and the country, the vehicle may have one or two slots for SD cards.

Inserting a memory card Insert the compatible memory card, with the cut corner first and the contacts facing down, into slot Fig. 194 2 , until it clicks into place.

Removing a memory card The inserted memory cards must be pre- pared for removal.

From the main Media menu, press the SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- tings menu or press the infotainment button and then press Settings, to open the System settings menu. Press the Remove safely function button. A dropdown menu appears with the following options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function button disables it. Press the inserted memory card. The mem- ory card jumps to the eject position. Remove the memory card.

External data storage device con- nected to the USB port

Depending on the features and the country, the vehicle may have one or two USB con- nections page 242.

Where this manual refers to external data storage devices, this means USB mass stor- age devices containing supported audio files, such as MP3 players, iPods and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored.

Further operation of the external data medi- um (changing track, selecting tracks and playback modes) is described in the appro- priate chapters of this manual page 195.

Instructions and restrictions Compatibility with Apple devices and other media players depends on the unit.

The USB port supplies the usual USB volt- age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks larger than 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32 file system in some circumstances. You will find the necessary software and information on the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions and limitations regarding requirements for media sources.

iPod, iPad and iPhone Depending on the country and equipment, iPods, iPads or iPhones can be connec- ted via the device's own USB cable to the ve- hicles USB port and used as audio sour- ces.

After connecting an iPod, iPad or iPhone, the list views specific to the iPod are dis- played at the top selection level (Play- lists, Artists, Albums, Tracks, Podcasts etc.).

Possible error messages after connecting external data media

Error message Cause and actions to take

Source is not supported.

It is not possible to play the external data media or es- tablish communication with the adapter cable that is used.

Check that the external data media is connected and op- erates correctly. If possible, update the exter- nal data media software.

Device not re- sponding.

Communication interrupted.

Check that the external data media is connected and op- erates correctly.

204

Operating modes

Error message Cause and actions to take

Due to the large number of different data storage de- vices and various iPod, iPad and iPhone genera- tions available, it is not possible to guarantee fault- free operation of all functions described here.

Disconnecting Data media be prepared for disconnection.

From the main Media menu, press the SET- TINGS button to open the Media Settings menu or press the infotainment button and then press Settings, to open the System settings menu. Press the Remove safely function button. A dropdown menu appears with the following options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function button disables it. Now the data storage device can be dis- connected.

Note Do not connect an external media player at the same time to play music via Blue- tooth and via the USB port with the In- fotainment system, as this could cause playback limitations. If the external player is an Apple device, it cannot be simultaneously connected by USB and by Bluetooth.

If a connected source is not recognized, disconnect and reconnect it. If the data cannot be played, the corresponding indi- cation will be displayed.

External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multimedia socket

Depending on the equipment and country there may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket page 242.

The connected external audio source cannot be operated with the infotainment system's controls.

Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN multimedia socket Connect the external audio source to the AUX-IN multimedia socket. Start playback on the external audio source. In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE function button and select AUX .

The playback volume of the connected ex- ternal audio source should be adjusted to the volume of the other audio sources page 173.

Information on operating an external au- dio source connected to the AUX-IN multi- media socket

Operation Effect

Selection of another au- dio source from the Info- tainment system.

The external audio source continues to run in the background.

Stopping playback on the external audio source.

The infotainment system remains in the AUX menu.

Remove the connector from the AUX-IN multi- media jack.

The infotainment system remains in the AUX menu.

Note Please read and observe the manufac- turer's instruction manual for the external audio source. Interference noise may be heard if the ex- ternal audio source is powered from the 12- volt power socket of the vehicle.

Connect an external audio source via Bluetooth

In the Bluetooth Audio mode, audio files that are playing on a device connected by Blue- tooth can be listened to on the infotainment system.

205

Infotainment System

Conditions The Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP Bluetooth profile. In the Bluetooth Settings menu the Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be

on. Select Telephone > Settings > Bluetooth

Starting Bluetooth audio transfer Activate Bluetooth visibility on the external Bluetooth audio source. In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE function button and select BT audio . Press Search for new device in order to con- nect an external Bluetooth audio source for the first time page 232. OR: Select a Bluetooth external audio source from the list. Please refer to the instructions on the screen of the Infotainment system and on the Bluetooth audio source regarding the rest of the procedure.

You may need to manually start playback on the Bluetooth source.

When the Bluetooth device is disconnected, the infotainment system remains in Blue- tooth audio mode.

Controlling playback The extent to which the Bluetooth audio sys- tem can be operated through the infotain- ment system depends on the connected Bluetooth device.

Note Due to the large number of possible Blue- tooth audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all de- scribed functions. Always switch off the warning and serv- ice tones on a connected Bluetooth audio source, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele- phone, to prevent possible interference noise and malfunctions. To play music, do not link the external media player simultaneously to Bluetooth

and the USB interface of the infotainment system, as this can cause limitations during playback. The system response time may vary, de- pending on the connected external play- back device. If the external player is an Apple device, it cannot be simultaneously connected by USB and by Bluetooth.

Jukebox (SSD) 3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 195 Manage Jukebox

The jukebox is located on the hard drive of the Infotainment system (SSD1)).

Compressed audio files (MP3 and WMA) and some video files (Podcasts, AVIs, etc.) can be imported from different data storage devices to the jukebox and this used to play them.

The files will only be copied when the engine is running. Copying copy-protected CDs and DVDs is prohibited

Importing files In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func- tion button and then select Manage Jukebox . Press the IMPORT function button.

1) Solid-State-Drive (SSD). 206

Operating modes

Select the desired source from the Select source menu.

The data storage device is prepared. This op- eration may take a few seconds.

Activate the checkboxes to the right of the files or folders to be imported. If Select all is activated, all files and folders on the data storage device will be imported. Press the IMPORT function button.

Depending on the selection, all files and fold- ers will be imported with the indicated name to the Jukebox.

If no track information is available, the audio files will be placed in the following folders:

Audio data CD Album Unknown albums Ttulo.mp31)

Artists Unknown artists Unknown albums Ttulo.mp31)

Functions and progress display during the copying operation While copying, an animation is displayed along with the progress percentage on the import screen.

Audio data CD: It is not possible to copy and play files at the same time.

Press the Cancel function button to end the import of the whole track that is currently be- ing imported. To obtain information on the status of the import, press the Information function button. Press the BACK function button to close the import screen with the progress informa- tion. When the file import ends, a message will appear.

Deleting files In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func- tion button and then select Manage Jukebox . Press the DELETE function button. Activate the checkboxes to the right of the files or folders to be deleted. If Select all is activated, all the files and folders on the data storage device will be de- leted.

Press the DELETE function button. The files and folders will be deleted according to the selection made. When the files have been deleted, a mes- sage will appear. Press the BACK function button to close the menu.

Opening stored audio and video files Change to Jukebox (SSD) content.

When storing the tracks, they are stored un- der different categories and lists according to the information available.

The tracks saved can be checked and opened from these lists according to different categories.

Jukebox Playlist Artist Album Music genre Title Video Non-playable files (an unsupported file has been imported).

1) The name and extension of the file are exam- ples.

207

Infotainment System

Note If the Infotainment system cancels a copying operation, check the storage space on the internal hard drive and check the data storage device. Due to copyright laws, before any change in ownership of the Infotainment system, all files stored on the jukebox must be deleted. There are several possible reasons why files may be shown as inactive (grey): files that cannot be imported (e.g. images), files that are already stored in the Jukebox or files that take up more space than availa- ble in the internal memory.

Connect an external audio source via WLAN*

WLAN allows wireless connection between an external audio source and the Infotainment system.

To use this connection, the device being con- nected must have an app compatible with the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi- cation protocol.

Conditions Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed on the device.

Having the Enable WLAN connection op- tion active, which can be found in the wireless connection configuration. Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain- ment system using a password generated by the system. Pairing must be done from the device to be connected.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer Start the UPnP app or the app for the play- back of the WLAN audio source. In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE function button and select WLAN . Please refer to the instructions on the screen of the Infotainment system and on the WLAN audio source regarding the rest of the procedure.

Controlling playback The extent to which the WLAN audio can be controlled via the Infotainment system de- pends on the connected WLAN device and the app that is used.

Note The Infotainment system does not pro- vide an internet connection, it only estab- lishes a wireless connection between the mobile device and said system. Via the WLAN, only the connection be- tween the device and the Infotainment sys-

tem can be guaranteed, its operation de- pends on the application itself.

WLAN settings

To access the WLAN settings the ignition must be switched on.

Select the Media main menu by pressing the infotainment key . Press the SETTINGS function button to open the Media settings menu. Press the WLAN function button, then the Share connection over WLAN button will appear along with information about the use of WLAN. Press the function button Share connec- tion over WLAN, then you can Enable WLAN connection and access the WLAN network Configuration. Press the Configuration function button to configure the WLAN network.

Function button: function

Enable WLAN connection : To turn on/off the WLAN net- work.

Security level: WPA2 encryption automatically generates an 8 character network key.

208

Operating modes

Function button: function

Network key : Network key automatically gener- ated. Press the function button to manually change the network key. The network key must have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63.

SSID : Name of the WLAN network of the infotain- ment system.

Do not send network name (SSID) : Activate the checkbox to deactivate the visibility of the WLAN network.

To save the changes made to the configura- tion of the mobile access point, press the SAVE button.

Video DVD mode 3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 196 DVD main menu.

Fig. 197 DVD mode control menu.

Regional code of video DVD Quite often, the playback of DVD video is limited to certain regions (for example, to the US and Canada) by so-called region co- des. These DVDs can only be played on units that are coded for the same region.

The unit's DVD drive is configured to read the regional code for the region in which the vehi- cle was originally sold.

Starting the DVD mode Insert a compatible DVD in the DVD drive.

The reading of DVD data may take a few sec- onds.

The DVD's intro (short initial sequence) is played. Next, the different DVD menus are displayed.

Controlling a DVD menu Briefly touch the screen to activate the function buttons in the DVD mode main menu Fig. 196.

Function button: function

SOURCE Display and selection of the source.

DVD MENU To display the control menu and re- turn to the main DVD screen Fig. 197.

A Chapter display.

B Displays play time duration and re- maining play time.

C

: Move the control menu window.

: Minimise the control menu win- dow.

: Maximise the control menu win- dow.

: Close the control menu.

D Use the arrow buttons to browse the DVD menu. Confirm the selection by pressing OK .

E Press to open the DVD main menu.

/ To move to the next or previous chapter.

Playback stops. The function but- ton changes to .

209

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Playback is resumed. The func- tion button changes to .

SETTINGS This menu contains the Video (DVD) settings.

Note The visual appearance of the DVD film menus and the menu options which it offers are the responsibility of the DVD manufac- turer. The difference in behaviour of some films when using the same mode is the responsi- bility of the DVD manufacturer. You may not be able to play video DVDs which you have burned yourself. The Infotainment system screen only dis- plays the image when the vehicle is stop- ped. Whilst in motion, the screen discon- nects (the image), but the audio remains active.

Video settings (DVD) 3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

While in the DVD mode press the SETTINGS function button and then select the Video set- tings (DVD) option.

Function button: function

Format : To select the screen format. If Automatic is selected, the optimal format for the screen is set au- tomatically.

Audio channel : To select the language of the voice in- structions.

Subtitles : To select the subtitle language.

Enter/change PIN for parental settings : Parental settings password.

Child protection : To select the level of protection you want to associate with DVD playback.

The options within the Video Settings (DVD) menu may vary depending on the DVD or the chapter that is playing.

The available audio channel languages and subtitles depend on the DVD that is inserted.

All or part of the content of a video DVD can be protected by a password (PIN) if the DVD allows parental settings. In addition, you can choose the restriction level based on age, with 1 being the least restrictive (all audien- ces) and 8 the most restrictive (adults).

Images

Fig. 198 Images main menu.

Using the Images menu, image files can be viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide- show.

The image files must be stored on a compati- ble data storage device.

Press the Infotainment button and then select the Images context. Press the SOURCE function button to select the source where the pictures in question are located.

Function button: function

SOURCE Selection of the source.

SELECTION Opens a list of image files.

210

Operating modes

Function button: function

The image viewed was obtained via GPS localisation and upon pressing this function button, the navigator menu opens to start a route to this destination.

/

Rotate the image view 90 left or right, or by swiping your fingers across the screen in a circular direc- tion.

Reset the view of the image.

To stop the playback of a slideshow. The function button changes to .

To continue the playback of a slide- show. The function button changes to .

/ Change image PREVIOUS or NEXT , or by sliding your finger horizontally across the screen.

SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu.

Enlarging or reducing the view Slide 2 fingers across the screen, moving them further apart or closer together. OR: turn the settings button.

Requirements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu- tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

Image settings

Open the Image settings menu Press the SETTINGS function button in the main Images menu.

Function button: function

Image view : To adjust the image view format.

Automatic: Images scale to the size of the screen (the image may not be displayed com- pletely).

Complete: The images are displayed fully on the screen.

Display time : To adjust the display time of images during a slideshow.

Repeat slideshow : The active slideshow is repeated infinitely.

Media settings

Select the MEDIA main menu by pressing the infotainment key . Press the SETTINGS function button to open the Media settings menu.

Function button: function

Sound : Sound settings page 173.

Manage Jukebox a): To import files to the jukebox or to delete existing files page 206.

Mix/repeat including subfolders : Subfolders are inclu- ded in the selected playback mode page 195.

Bluetooth : Bluetooth settings page 240

WLAN a): WLAN settings page 208.

Video settings : Settings for playing DVD videos or files.

Remove safely : To prepare external data media for ex- traction or disconnection. See also page 204, In- serting or ejecting a memory card and page 204, External data storage device con- nected to the USB port .

Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of traffic information stations) is active page 192.

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.

211

Infotainment System

Navigation1)

Introduction

Fig. 199 Related video

General information A GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite system locates the current position of the ve- hicle. The vehicles sensors measure the dis- tance travelled. The measurements are com- pared with the stored detailed map resour- ces, according to road indications stored in them. Traffic reports, if any, will also be taken into account in the route calculation (dynam- ic route guidance page 220). Using all the data available, the Infotainment system cal- culates the optimum route to the destination.

The destination is defined by entering an ad- dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta- tion or hotel.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep- resentations will guide you to your destina- tion.

Depending on the country, some functions of the infotainment system will not be available on the screen when travelling higher than a certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance with legislation.

CAUTION The navigation announcements may be in- accurate (e.g. due to out-of-date data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re- ceive any data from GPS satellites (tunnels, garages), navigation can still continue using the vehicle sensors.

Possible limitations in navigation In areas that are not or are only partially digi- tised (e.g. insufficient definition of one-way streets and road categories), the Infotain- ment system will still attempt to provide route guidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga- tion data, it may not be possible to determine the exact position of the vehicle. This may mean that navigation is not as precise as usu- al.

Navigation area and update of navigation data Road layouts change continuously. There- fore, if the navigation data are not updated, then errors or inaccuracies may occur.

SEAT recommends updating navigation data on a regular basis.

Updating and using navigation da- ta from an SD card

3 Only available for the model: Navi System

The SD card is factory fitted in slot 2 for SD cards.

Navigation data that is currently valid for this unit in order to allow all functions to be used in full.

Updating navigation data The current navigation data can be downloa- ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor- ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet at www.seat.com.

1) Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus. 212

Operating modes

Using navigation data Insert the memory card page 204. Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains naviga- tion data, the following message appears: The source contains the navigation database. Navigation can be started.

Note The inserted memory card must be pre- pared before it is ejected page 204. Navigation is not possible without the SD card. Do not remove the memory card while the navigation data is in use. This could damage the memory card! The navigation memory card cannot be used as a memory for other files. SEAT recommends using only the original SEAT cards. The use of other memory cards could limit its operation.

Updating and installing navigation data

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

The Infotainment system is equipped with an internal navigation data memory. The re- quired navigation data are already installed on the system.

The Infotainment system always requires the navigation data that is currently valid for this unit in order to allow all functions to be used in full. Using an old version may lead to errors during navigation.

Updating navigation data To update navigation data visit our website: www.seat.com.

The navigation data must be installed after downloading. Navigation is not possible from the memory card.

Installing navigation data The installation process takes about 2 hours.

If the Infotainment system is switched off, the installation process is paused and will auto- matically resume when switched back on.

Switch the ignition on.

Insert the memory card containing the nav- igation data page 204. Press the infotainment key > Settings > System information. Press UPDATE to import the stored naviga- tion data. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

Once installed, the memory card can be re- moved. The memory card must be prepared for removal page 204.

CAUTION Do not remove the memory card while the navigation data is being installed. The memory card may be irreparably dam- aged!

Note The navigation memory card may not be used as memory storage for other files. The Infotainment system will not recognise the files saved on it. SEAT recommends a CLASS 101) memory card for the use of navigation data. The use of other memory cards could limit its oper- ation.

1) The speed class of an SD card. 213

Infotainment System

Navigation main menu

Fig. 200 Navigation main menu

Navigation functions can only be used if the navigation data for the area where the vehi- cle is driving is available in the infotainment system.

The Navigation main menu allows you to se- lect a new destination, call up a previously used or stored destination and search for points of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu Press the Infotainment button to open the last menu that was open in navigation. If the Navigation main menu is not dis- played, press the infotainment button again until the main navigation menu is dis- played. OR: Press the function button to return menu by menu to the Navigation menu.

Navigation main menu function buttons and indicators

Function button: function

A The split screen is displayed page 219.

B Messages and function buttons on the map display page 219.

New destination : To enter a new destination page 214.

ROUTE : During route guidance page 216.

MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina- tions page 216.

POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta- tions and restaurants) within a particular search area page 218.

VIEW To modify or activate or deactivate the split screen and show POI Fig. 200 A page 218.

SETTINGS Open the Navigation Settings menu.

New destination (entering the des- tination)

Fig. 201 Search screen.

In the Navigation main menu, press the New destination function button. Press the Options function button and se- lect the required type of destination (Search, Address, POI or On map). Using voice control*, if you say Town, street and number, without pauses, and then the in- struction Start Route Guidance a route to the given destination will start.

Search Search for addresses and Points of Interest using the keypad to enter them Fig. 201.

For cities, post codes and points of interest, the full details must be entered. You can also

214

Operating modes

search for points of interest by names or cat- egories. When necessary, enter the name of the city to refine the search.

Fig. 201

A Press to open the cursor buttons (, ), which allow you to move within the text.

Steering When narrowing down the destination ad- dress, please note that every entry restricts the available range of subsequent selections.

To enter an address press the function but- tons in the following order:

Country, City (or postcode), Centre (starts the route to the centre of the indicated city), Street, Number, Junction, Last desti- nations, Start (starts route guidance to the selected destination).

On the map Select the destination on the map or enter it using GPS coordinates and confirm with OK .

Function button: function

Store : Store the point of interest in the destination memory page 216.

Edit : Edit the destination or enter another one.

Function button: function

Route options : Setting route options, see Naviga- tion Settings > Route options.

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point of interest.

After starting route guidance

Fig. 202 Route calculation.

When starting route guidance, the route is calculated based on the data that have been selected in the Route options menu.

Three alternative routes are proposed Fig. 202. These 3 routes correspond to the selectable route options: Economical, Fast and Short.

Economic route. Fastest route.

Blue route Red route

Shortest route to the destina- tion, even if it results in longer travelling time.

Select the desired route by pressing it.

The route criteria settings in the Route op- tions menu are modified accordingly.

If a route is not selected, the route guidance starts automatically after approx. one minute according to the setting selected in Route options.

Once the route has been calculated, the sys- tem gives the first navigation announcement. Up to 3 navigation announcements are given before a turn.

Press the adjustment knob to listen to the last audible navigation instruction.

The indicated distances depend to a great extent on the type of road and the traffic speed. On motorways, for example, naviga- tion announcements are received much earli- er than in urban traffic.

The corresponding navigation announce- ments are also given on roads with several lanes that split, and on roundabouts, for ex- ample: Leave the roundabout at the second exit.

A navigation announcement informs you when you have reached your destination.

Orange route

215

Infotainment System

A navigation announcement informing you that you have reached the destination area is given if the exact destination cannot be reached.

During dynamic route guidance, you re- ceive information about reported traffic con- gestion on the route. An additional navigation announcement is given if the route is recalcu- lated.

During a navigation announcement, you can change its volume using the button .

For other announcement settings, select Navigation > Settings > Navigation announcements.

Note If you miss a turning during route guid- ance and are currently unable to turn back, keep on driving until the navigation system offers a new route. The quality of the announcements and recommendations depends on the naviga- tion data available and any reported traffic problems.

Route

In the Navigation main menu, press the Route function button.

The Route function button is only displayed with route guidance activated.

Function button: function

STOP GUIDANCE : Aborts current route guidance.

ENTER DESTINATION : To enter a new destination or a new stopover page 214.

CONGESTION AHEAD : To exclude a section of the route. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route func- tion button and then CANCEL CONGESTION .

CHANGE ROUTE a): The map of the calculated route appears and by holding a finger on the route and dragging the finger across said map, the route is changed to the road(s) that you want and the new route is then recalculated.

ROUTE DETAILS : View route information.

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

My destinations (destination mem- ory)

Fig. 203 List of saved routes.

The stored destinations can be selected from the My destinations menu.

Press the My destinations function button in the main Navigation menu. Select the desired function button. STORE POSITION , Routes , Destinations , Last destinations or Home address .

Store position By pressing the STORE POSITION function button, the current position is stored as a Flagged destination in the Destination memory.

To save the stored position permanently as a flagged destination, change the name of the position in the destination memory. Oth- erwise, the saved position is overwritten when another flagged destination is saved.

Mark the Flagged destination in the destination memory. Press the Store function button.

The name can be changed in the following input window. Press the function button to store the destination.

Routes In the Route mode, you can define various destinations (final destination and stopovers).

216

Operating modes

The starting point of a route is always the vehicles current position. The destination is the end point of a route. Stopover destina- tions are driven to before the destination.

In the Navigation main menu, press the My Destinations. function button. Press the Routes function button.

If you have not stored any routes or want to create a new route, press the New route func- tion button and then follow the instructions as for a new destination, before pressing Store .

Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol- lowing function buttons:

Function button: function

Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance.

Function buttons and indications in the New route or Edit menu

Function button or message: function or meaning

Stopover.

Destination.

... Estimated time of arrival.

... Calculated distance to destination.

... Estimated travelling time.

... Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display the function buttons.

Delete destination.

Starting route guidance direct to the selected destination. The stages are omitted.

Opening the detailed view of the desti- nation in question.

Available function buttons.

New desti- nation Add a new destination.

Destina- tions

Adding a new destination from My destinations.

Storing To store the created route in the route memory.

Start Start route guidance.

Calculate To update the calculated distance and estimated arrival time.a)

Stop To stop active route guidance.b)

Moving a stopover or a destination to another position on the list. Press and drag to move the destination.

a) Only displayed with route guidance activated and when a destination has been added to the tour. b) Only displayed with route guidance activated.

Last destinations List of last destinations.

My destinations Press the Options function button and se- lect the desired function button.

Function button: function

Destination memory : View of destinations stored man- ually and from imported vCards page 221, Im- porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites : List of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : List of phone book contacts that have a stored address (postal address).

Home address Only one address or position can be stored as the home address at any one time.

Pressing will start guidance to the stored home address.

If a home address has not yet been stored, an address can be assigned.

217

Infotainment System

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current position as the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manually.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga- tion settings > Manage memory menu.

Special destinations (POI)

Fig. 204 Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the memory are divided into different categories. Each category of special destinations has a sym- bol assigned to it.

If special destinations inherent to the system have been imported page 222, Importing Personal POI the My points of interest (Personal POI) category.

In the Map settings menu, you can indicate the special destinations that you want to dis- play on the map. Up to 10 categories can be selected.

Selecting a point of interest on the map

Function button: function

1 There are several points of interest in the area. Press this symbol to open a list of points of in- terest.

2 The only point of interest in this zone. Press the symbol to open the detailed view of the point of interest.

Quick POI search In the Navigation main menu, press the POIs function button and the three main catego- ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the name of the point of interest to be searched using the new destination keypad, or press Search nearby on the map table on

page 219.

View

In the Navigation main menu, press the View function button.

Function button: function

Map display in two dimensions (con- ventional).

Map display in three dimensions (bird's eye view).

The places of interest and well-known buildings are also shown in detail and in colour.

a) To display the destination on the map.

a) To display the route on the map.

Auto / Day / Night

To switch between day and night for- mat.

SPLIT SCREEN Show the split screen page 219.

POI Show special destinations.

a) Only displayed with route guidance activated.

218

Operating modes

Split screen

Fig. 205 Split screen displayed.

The split screen Fig. 205 A shows the in- formation detailed below:

Pressing the name displays a menu with the following options:

Function button: function

Audio : Current audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current di- rection and position of the vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres, POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings up additional information

FREQUENT ROUTES a): Information on the user's most frequent routes.

Function button: function

Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and GPS status (satellite reception).

a) Only shown when route guidance is not active or when predictive route guidance is active.

Press the function button to close the split screen.

At any moment during navigation, pressing inside the map will make a pop-up menu ap- pear with the following functions:

Function button: function

Clicking on the map : Shows the details of the selected point, street name or coordinates

Only when you press on an icon on the map:

POI : name of the point of interest (when only one appears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you press on the map on various POIs grouped to- gether).

FAVOURITE : name of the favourite.

HOME ADDRESS : Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

Add stopover : only when you have an active route.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but only for the area around the point selected on the map.

Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 206 Messages and function buttons on the map display.

Function buttons and messages on the map display. To activate function buttons and , press function button .

Function button: function

Current altitude indicator.

To centre the vehicle position on the map.

To centre the destination on the map. On- ly displayed if either Display destination on map or Display route on the map is se- lected page 218.

To change the orientation of the map (north-facing or direction of travel). Only available in 2D mode.

219

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Map scale. To change the scale, turn the adjustment knob or move two fingers to- gether or apart on the screen.

Selecting automatic scaling. If the func- tion is active, the symbol is displayed in blue.

Briefly increases the scale of the map (zoom) The selected scale is displayed again after a few seconds.

Mute or repeat the last announcement, change the announcement volume.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip- ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are displayed. Select Navigation > Settings > Map > Show road signs.

Traffic bulletins and dynamic desti- nation guidance (TRAFFIC)

Fig. 207 Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receives traffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back- ground, if a traffic information station is tuned.

Traffic bulletins are displayed on the map with symbols page 220, Traffic reports on map (selection) and they are required dynamic destination guidance page 220, Dynamic route guidance.

List of available traffic reports Press the Infotainment button and then select the Traffic context.

Dynamic route guidance In order for dynamic route guidance to func- tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the route options.

If a traffic report is received that affects the route being travelled, an alternative route will be searched for if the system calculates that time can be saved.

If, on the other hand, the alternative route does not save time, the route will continue with the traffic jam. In both cases, an an- nouncement will be made.

Shortly before reaching the announced traf- fic jam, it is indicated again.

Avoiding a traffic jam by following the instruc- tions of a traffic bulletin does not always save time, for example, if alternative routes are congested. The effectiveness of dynamic navigation depends on the traffic bulletins that are received.

The rest of the route that has to be travelled can be manually excluded to force its recal- culation page 216.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning

: Slow traffic

: Traffic jam

220

Operating modes

Symbol: Meaning

: Accident

: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)

: Slippery road surface

: Danger

: Road works

: Strong wind

: Road closed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic incidents that do not affect the calculated route calculated are displayed in grey.

The length of a traffic jam on the calculated route is shown by a red line.

Incidents that affect the calculated route and that have led to the recalculation of the route are shown in orange.

The position of a symbol indicates the start of the traffic jam if it is precisely specified in the traffic bulletin.

Predictive navigation

Fig. 208 Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, the system detects and stores in the background routes that are frequently followed, without them being active destination routes.

This function has no navigation announce- ments unless the user requires them, getting them by pressing the settings button.

On the main screen of the Navigation menu, in the pop-up window, press the FREQUENT ROUTES button. To display fre-

quently followed routes press the Show on map button Fig. 208.

Importing vCards (electronic busi- ness cards)

Importing vCards to the destination mem- ory Insert the data storage device with the stor- ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment system page 195. In the Navigation main menu, press the SETTINGS function button. In the Navigation settings menu, press the Import destinations function button. Select the data carrier with the vCards saved in the list. Press Import all vCards from this folder . Confirm the import notice with the OK function button.

Saved vCards will now be in the destinations memory page 216.

Note Only one address per vCard can be impor- ted. In the event any vCards have multiple addresses, only the main address will be imported.

221

Infotainment System

Importing Personal POI

Importing the Personal POI to a points of interest destination memory Insert the data storage device with the stor- ed Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain- ment system page 195. Press the infotainment key and then se- lect Settings > Manage memory. Press Update my POIs and then press UP- DATE and Next to import Personal POIs. Confirm the import notification with the OK function button.

The stored Personal POI are now in the points of interest destination memory page 218.

The stored Personal POI can be deleted in the Navigation settings menu.

Navigation with images

Fig. 209 Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting route guidance Press the Infotainment button and then select the Images context. Press the SOURCE Fig. 209 function but- ton and select the data storage device where the images are stored. If the image displayed was taken using GPS localisation, the function button will appear. Press to start guidance to a destination.

Road signs indication

The road sign indication must be active in the Navigation settings menu page 223.

If there are road signs stored in the navigation data for the route you are driving on, the sys-

tem can display them on the map (e.g. a speed limit).

Take into account the age of the navigation data and the limitations of the navigation sys- tem page 212 !

Recognition of road signs

Some vehicles have a road sign recognition camera. If the vehicle has road sign recogni- tion and it is active, road signs detected by the system will be displayed on the map, along with additional information.

Read and take into account the information and indications of the road signs recognition system page 78.

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigation settings menu, an additional pop-up win- dow opens when you start route guidance.

Pressing the Demo mode function button starts a virtual route guidance to the desti- nation you have entered. If you press the Normal function button, a real route guidance starts.

The development and operation of virtual route guidance is compatible with the

222

Operating modes

development and operation of real route guidance.

Virtual route guidance is repeated after reaching the fictitious destination and re- starts from the starting point, if it is not inter- rupted beforehand.

When the starting point of the Demo mode is manually set in the Navigation settings menu, the virtual route guidance starts from that position.

A manually entered starting point is overwrit- ten with the current location of the vehicle, if the vehicle starts moving.

Note Deactivate the Demo mode after use, oth- erwise you will always have to select whether to start a virtual route or normal route before starting route guidance.

Navigation settings

In the Navigation main menu, press the SETTINGS function button.

Function button: function

Route options : To make the route calculation adjust- ments.

Function button: function

Suggest 3 alternative routes : After starting route guidance, 3 alternative routes are proposed page 215.

Route : Route type selection.

Economical : Route calculation, taking econom- ic aspects into account.

Fast : The fastest route to the destination.

Short : The shortest route to the destination, even if it results in longer travelling time.

FREQUENT ROUTES : Information on the user's most frequent routes.

Dynamic route : Dynamic route guidance activates when a TMC is received page 220.

Avoid motorways and highways : Motorways will be excluded from the route calculation wherever possible.

Avoid ferries and motorail trains : Ferries and motorail trains will not be taken into account for the route calculation, wherever possible.

Avoid toll roads : Toll roads will be excluded from the route calculation, whenever possible.

Avoid tunnels : Tunnels will be excluded from the route calculation, whenever possible.

Avoid routes requiring toll stickers : Mandatory toll stickers (stickers certifying that the toll has been paid) will be excluded from the route calculation whenever possible.

Function button: function

Show available toll stickers a): To mark the available toll stickers on the list ( Avoid routes requiring toll stickers must be active). Routes requiring toll stickers will be taken into ac- count in the route calculation if it is marked that the toll sticker is available.

Include trailer : Calculate the route and arrival time, depending on whether a trailer is being tow- ed.

Map : To adjust the map display settings.

Show road signs : The road signs stored in the navi- gation data for the road you are driving on are dis- played during route guidance page 222.

Lane guidance : During route guidance, an addi- tional indication is displayed to recommend a lane when driving, and when turning on roads with several lanes. Only if the data bank contains infor- mation about the area that is being driven through.

Show favourites : The destinations saved as favour- ites on the map are displayed ().

Show POIs

Select categories for POIs : To select the POI cate- gories shown on the map page 218.

Show brand logos for POIs : Displays logos of the selected special destinations categories (e.g. displays logos of service stations).

Manage memory : To make adjustments to the stored destinations.

223

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Sort contacts : To select the sequential order of agenda entries recorded with postal addresses, see also page 216.

Define home address : To assign or edit a home ad- dress, see also page 217.

Delete my POIs : To delete special destinations stored in the POI destinations memory page 222.

Update my POIs : To update stored POIs page 222.

Import destinations (SD/USB) : To import digital busi- ness cards (vCards) into the destination memory page 221.

Delete user data : To delete stored destinations (e.g. Last destinations or the Destination memory).

Navigation announcements : To change the navigation announcements settings.

Volume : To adjust the volume of audible driving recommendations.

Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Set the volume of the active audio source during naviga- tion announcements.

No navigation announcements during calls : During a telephone conversation, audio driving recommen- dations will not be given.

Function button: function

Note: My POIs : Audible warning when approaching a special destination.

Fuel options : To change fuel related settings.

Select preferred petrol station : The brand of the se- lected service station is given priority in special destination search results.

Fuel warning : The fuel warning is active.

If the fuel level reaches the reserve, an appropri- ate warning is generated that enables the service station search.

Version information : Information about stored naviga- tion data.

Maximum speeds : Shows the speed limits, depending on the road, of the country that is being driven through.

Advanced settings : For making advanced changes to the navigation settings.

Time display : Indication during route guidance.

Time of arrival : The estimated time of arrival at the destination is displayed.

Running time : The envisaged travelling time to the destination is displayed.

Status line : View during route guidance.

Destination : The calculated distance to the destination is shown.

Function button: function

Next stopover : The calculated distance to the next stopover is shown.

Note: National border crossed : Indication of the speed limits of the country in question when crossing a border.

Demo mode : When the Demo mode is active and route guidance is started, a virtual guide to the en- tered destination may be started page 222.

Define demo mode starting point : If the Demo mode is active and the vehicle is stopped, a fic- titious starting point can be set for the virtual route guidance.

Waypoint mode b): To start Offroad navigation.

a) This functionality will depend on the country. b) Only available on model: Navi System Plus.

Navigation in Offroad mode*1)

Introduction

Offroad* navigation is a function for offroad driving that provides directions in non-digi- tised areas at low speeds.

1) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus 224

Operating modes

Non-digitised areas are areas about which the system does not have information for the streets or terrain. It does not detect streets, buildings or natural limits such as mountains or rivers, although they may be shown on the map.

Offroad* navigation is not suitable for driving on conventional roads as it does not detect one-way streets, motorway entries or similar.

Offroad Navigation Menu

Fig. 210 Offroad Navigation Menu start

Press the SETTINGS function button in the main Navigation menu.

In the menu, press the Waypoint mode function button. The Offroad Navigation menu opens Fig. 210.

Function buttons in the Offroad Navigation menu

Function button: function

RECORD : Initiates the plotting of an Offroad tour.

MEMORY : Opens a list allowing the selection of a stored Offroad tour.

EXIT : Ends Offroad navigation.

Recording an Offroad tour

Fig. 211 Recording an Offroad tour

An Offroad tour is formed by a series of stor- ed waypoints.

Starting recording In the Offroad Navigation menu, in the pop- up window press the RECORD pop-up button. In the pop-up window, the user is able to plot the tour with a given destination or start

plotting the route without giving a final desti- nation. Starts plotting the route.

The offroad markers can be recorded by in- dicating a manual waypoint.

In the Offroad Navigation menu, press the ADD WAYPOINT function button. The tour way-

points defined manually are shown on the map by a marker.

Ending recording Press the STOP RECORDING function button in the main Offroad Navigation menu.

Managing stored Offroad tours

Fig. 212 Offroad Navigation menu, stored tours

Press the MEMORY function button in the Offroad Navigation menu.

225

Infotainment System

A list of stored Offroad tours opens, if there are any.

When a tour is selected, the following icons will appear Fig. 212:

Export the tour to an SD card. Edit the name of the tour. Delete the tour. Load tour

Function button: function

IMPORT : allows the import of an Offroad route in .GPX format.

Loading an Offroad tour When the Offroad tour is selected, press Play and the selected tour will be loaded onto the Navigation system.

Creating an Offroad tour

Fig. 213 Offroad route guidance mode

Start route guidance Loads the stored Offroad tour. Starting off in a stored route is not detected by the system automatically.

Setup

Function button: function

Invert : Reverses the direction of the stored Offroad tour.

Next point : Starts the Offroad tour from the nearest point.

Start : Starts the complete Offroad tour.

When route guidance starts, the system switches to the map view.

Stopping route guidance Press the Options button on the screen and then press Stop .

End waypoint navigation Press the EXIT function button in the Off- road Navigation menu

WARNING Terrain features are disregarded during route guidance Drive slowly and following the instructions in order to perform the ma- noeuvre as far as possible! The general direction of travel is indica- ted straight ahead by direction arrows in the Infotainment System pop-up window Fig. 213 A .

Note If an Offroad tour is being recorded, this is automatically stored if Offroad navigation is discontinued.

226

Operating modes

Vehicle Menu

Introduction to using the Vehicle menu

Pressing button of the infotainment system accesses its main menu with the following options:

VIEW RADIO or MEDIA (to control playback in ra- dio or media mode) HDC (shown if the descent assistant* is ac- tive page 261) PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen) SETTINGS page 89

With the function button VIEW you can ac- cess the following information:

INSTRUMENT PANEL page 227 SPORT* page 227 OFFROAD* page 228 CONSUMERS page 228 DRIVING DATA page 229 ECOTRAINER page 229 VEHICLE STATUS page 230

Instrument panel* 3 Valid for vehicles equipped with the SEAT Digi- tal Cockpit

Fig. 214 Instrument panel

Press the Instrument panel button to choose from the various display options and custom- ise the information that appears in the SEAT Digital Cockpit page 70.

Automatic View Pre-set information depending on the Driving mode.

Classic View The needles are displayed at full length.

Views 1, 2, 3 Customise the information that appears in the digital cockpit. The user chooses which to

display, and in what order, by moving a finger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can be memorised by existing the menu or keeping the View button pressed.

Sport*

Fig. 215 SPORT menu

Fig. 216 SPORT Menu Lap timer

227

Infotainment System

Press the infotainment button . Press the VIEW function button and select SPORT.

If the corresponding equipment is available, the following information appears in the Sport option Fig. 215:

Instantaneous power expressed in kW G forces Turbo pressure, expressed in bar (bar), kilopascals (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). Press the Settings button to change the units of pressure page 171 Coolant temperature Oil temperature

Only 3 of these items of information can be displayed at the same time, but the user chooses which to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Press the Next button to bring up the Lap timer menu which is described below Fig. 216:

Analogue lap timer New timing is started by pressing on the surface of the digital lap timer +. Stop lap timer/Lap time.

1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

1

2

3

The analogue lap timer's time is stopped for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds, the ana- logue lap timer shows the real time again. Statistics/delete last lap time.

Offroad*

Fig. 217 Offroad CAR Menu.

Press the infotainment button . Press the VIEW function button and select OFFROAD.

If the corresponding equipment is available, the information that appears is the following:

Compass. Turning angle of steered wheels. Coolant temperature. Lubricating oil temperature

4

5

1. 2. 3. 4.

Only 2 of these items of information can be displayed at the same time, but the user chooses which to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Consumers

Fig. 218 Convenience consumers.

Access information about the vehicles main convenience consumers. It is shown via a consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h).

228

Operating modes

Driving data

Fig. 219 Driving data.

The on-board computer has 3 memories. They can be used to display: distance, time, average speed, average consumption and range.

1. Since start Indication and storage of distance travelled and consumption values between the ignition being turned on and it being turned off.

2. Since refuelling Display and storage of the values for the jour- ney and the consumption. By refuelling, the memory will be erased automatically.

3. Long-term The memory records the values for a specific number of partial trips, up to a total of 19

hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi- nutes, or 1999.9 km (mi) or 9999 km (mi), de- pending on the model of instrument panel.

When one of these values is reached (de- pending on the version of the instrument pan- el), the memory is automatically deleted and starts counting again from 0.

Ecotrainer

Fig. 220 CAR Ecotrainer menu.

Fig. 221 Driving style symbols.

Open the ECOTRAINER Menu While the vehicle is stopped, press the Info- tainment button . Press the VIEW function button and select ECOTRAINER.

Provides information about your driving style. The information on driving style is only evalu- ated and displayed when moving forward.

ECO points: indication on driving style Indicates driving style efficiency since start on a scale of 0 to 100. The higher the value displayed, the more efficient the driving style. Press on the display for more information. Statistics are shown for the last 30 minutes of driving from the start. If 30 minutes have not elapsed, the values of the last trip are shown in grey.

229

Infotainment System

l/100 km: Average fuel consumption Shows the average fuel consumption. The value is calculated using the kilometres trav- elled since start as a reference. Press on the display for more information. Statistics are shown for the last 30 minutes of driving from the start. If 30 minutes have not elapsed, the values of the last trip are shown in grey.

Eco tips: Tips on how to save fuel Press the ECO tips button to get advice on how to save fuel. These tips can only be con- sulted while the vehicle is stopped.

Efficient driving style assessment The representation uses different elements to show driving style efficiency.

Indication Fig. 220: Meaning

1 To the left of the columns are different symbols that provide information about the current driv- ing style table on page 230.

2

The white column is an indication of where the efficiency graph starts (from left to right). It shows the position of the evaluation that is currently being performed.

3

Bars to illustrate acceleration. The position of the car represents acceleration. If the speed is constant, the car remains in the central zone. If it accelerates or brakes, the car moves backwards or forwards respectively.

Indication Fig. 220: Meaning

4

Columns representing driving style efficiency. Horizontally, the columns represent retrospec- tive driving efficiency, and move from left to right approximately every 5 seconds. The high- er the columns, the more efficient the driving style. The colour of the sky represents the average of the last 3 minutes. The colour changes from grey (less efficient) to blue (more efficient).

Symbols Fig. 221: Meaning

A Thinking ahead. Sudden changes in accelera- tion lower the efficiency of the driving style.

B Gear recommendation.

C Current speed has a negative impact on fuel consumption.

D Ecological driving style.

Vehicle status

Fig. 222 Standard representation: vehicle sta- tus.

Fig. 223 Standard representation: vehicle sta- tus.

Press the Vehicle status button to access infor- mation on the Vehicle status messages and Start-Stop system.

230

Operating modes

The Vehicle status messages are dis- played Fig. 222, in addition to being speci- fied on the corresponding button.

According to the parties affected by these messages, they will be shown in different col- ours (depending on their importance) on the vehicle's screen.

To access the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System screen, press the Previous or Next keys.

From this same menu, use the SET button to store the tyre pressures.

Note The values shown on the figures Fig. 218, Fig. 219, Fig. 222 and Fig. 223 are in- dicative and may vary depending on the equipment.

Telephone

General information

Fig. 224 Related video

Telephone functions can only be used if there is a mobile phone connected by Bluetooth to the infotainment system page 233.

To do this, the phone must have the Blue- tooth function activated.

The instructions shown on the screen for the telephone menus will depend on the mobile telephone used.

Only use compatible Bluetooth devices. For further information on compatible Bluetooth

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or check on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele- phone and of any accessories.

If you detect any operating issues between your mobile telephone and the Infotainment system, restart your mobile by switching it off and on again.

Some functions and setup can only be per- formed when the vehicle is stopped and are not available on all mobile telephones.

You may experience poor reception or may be cut off in areas where the signal is weak.

Most electronic devices are shielded against HF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, the electronic equipment may not be protected from the HF signals of the telephone man- agement system. This may cause interfer- ence.

WARNING General, mandatory, legal and country- specific instructions and laws for the use of mobile phones inside the vehicle must al- ways be considered.

WARNING Speaking by telephone and using the mo- bile telephone management system whilst driving can distract you from the road and cause an accident. In areas of little coverage your call may be cut off and you may not be able to make even emergency calls.

WARNING Mobile telephones may interfere with and alter the correct operation of pacemakers if they are carried directly over them. Maintain a minimum distance of at least 20 centimetres between the aerials of the mobile telephone and the pacemaker. Do not carry your switched-on mobile telephone in your breast pocket directly over the pacemaker. If you suspect interference, switch off the mobile telephone immediately.

CAUTION High speeds, poor weather or road condi- tions and the quality of reception can all

231

Infotainment System

affect the audio quality of a telephone con- versation in the vehicle.

Note Restrictions on the use of devices using Bluetooth technology may apply in some countries. For further information, contact the local authorities. If you wish to connect a device via Blue- tooth, consult the safety warnings in its in- struction manual. Only use compatible Bluetooth devices. Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi- cle may provoke noise in the speakers. Some networks may not recognise all of the language characters or offer all of the services.

Places with special regulations

In the majority of cases, these places are signposted, but not always clearly. They in- clude, for example:

the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks The lower decks of boats and ferries. In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid gas (such as propane or butane). places where the air is laden with chemi- cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal powder.

all other places where the vehicle engine must be switched off.

WARNING Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a risk of explosion! The mobile telephone can automatically connect to the mobile tele- phone network again if it loses the Blue- tooth connection to the telephone man- agement system.

CAUTION In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile telephones is prohibited, both the telephone and the telephone management system must always be switched off. Interference may be caused with sensitive technical and medical equip- ment, possibly resulting in a malfunction or damage to the equipment.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth technology allows a mobile tele- phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele- phone management system. Prior pairing be- tween the two is required for this purpose.

Some Bluetooth mobile telephones connect automatically when turning on the ignition if a connection has been previously established. Its Bluetooth function must be activated for

this purpose, and there must be no Bluetooth

connection with other devices.

Bluetooth connections are free.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel- ephone management system, a data ex- change takes place via one of the Bluetooth

profiles.

Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the HFP can be used to manage calls through the infotainment system. Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It may require connecting other profiles for managing and controlling playback. Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows phone book contents to be downloaded from the mobile telephone. Message profile (MAP): It allows short messages (SMS) to be downloaded and synchronised.

Note The mobile telephone's button and warning tones should be off. Where necessary, dis- connect the headset from the mobile tele- phone you wish to connect to the system.

232

Operating modes

Pairing and connecting a mobile telephone to the Infotainment sys- tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone via the Infotainment system, it is necessary to pair both devices once.

For your safety, pairing should be done when the vehicle is stationary. In some countries it is not possible to perform the pairing with the vehicle running.

Conditions The ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth function of the mobile phone and the Infotainment system must be active and visible. The keypad lock on the mobile telephone must be deactivated.

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo- bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary to enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone Press the infotainment button > Find telephone > Search results.

OR: Press the infotainment button > Set- tings > Select mobile phone > Search results.

OR: Press the infotainment button > Set- tings > Bluetooth > Find devices> Search results.

OR: Make the connection from the settings menu of the mobile phone itself.

The name of your Infotainment system will be displayed on the main Telephone screen and you can edit this name via the Bluetooth settings menu.

The search process can take up to 1 minute.

As soon as the search is completed, the names of the Bluetooth devices found are displayed on-screen.

Select the Bluetooth device you want to connect. Additional data may need to be en- tered. Use your mobile telephone to enter and confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis- play of the infotainment system. If more Bluetooth profile pairing requests are received on the mobile telephone, make sure to reply to them.

OR: Compare the PIN code shown on the dis- play of the Infotainment system with the one shown on the mobile phone. If they match, confirm on both devices.

Now, the infotainment system and the mobile phone will be connected to each other.

When the pairing has been finalized correct- ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The phone book, call list and SMS messages stor- ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once the requests have been accepted in the mo- bile phone. After downloading, the data will be available on the Infotainment system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele- phones You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to the Infotainment system, but the number of si- multaneous connections varies:

Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo- bile phones simultaneously connected to the hands-free profile, and one of them as Blue- tooth audio. Navi System Plus: two mobile phones simul- taneously connected to the hands-free pro- file and one of them or a third one connected to the Bluetooth audio.

When the Infotainment system is switched on, it connects to the last connected mobile tele- phone. If it is not possible to connect to this

233

Infotainment System

mobile telephone, the system will try to con- nect to the next mobile telephone on the list of paired devices.

The maximum range of the connection is ap- prox. 10 metres. The connection will be inter- rupted if this distance is exceeded. The con- nection is automatically re-established as soon as the device is once again within Blue- tooth range.

If the maximum number of paired devices is reached and you want to pair another one, the system will automatically replace the least recent one with it. If it is to replace an- other one, the user must delete that one first. Do do this:

Press the SETTINGS function button in the telephone context. Press the function button Bluetooth set- tings > Paired devices. In the list of linked devices, press the func- tion button after the mobile phone to be deleted, and then press Delete to confirm the process.

WARNING Do not perform the pairing and connection process while driving. This may cause an accident!

Note Check that there are no requests pending acceptance in your mobile phone. If there are, this could block some of the functions in the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 225 Phone main menu.

Assign a user profile The phonebook, the call lists and the speed dial buttons are assigned to a user profile and remain stored on the telephone management system. This information will be available ev- ery time the mobile telephone is connected.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi- nutes for the data from the linked mobile phone to be available in the system. The next time that the mobile telephone is connected the phonebook is updated automatically.

If the mobile phonebook has been modified while connected, a manual update of the phonebook data can be started from the User profile settings menu.

Telephone management can store a maxi- mum of 4 profiles for mobile phones. If you wish to pair another mobile phone, the oldest user profile will be replaced.

Telephone management system function buttons Press the infotainment button to access the Telephone main menu.

Function button: function

1 Name of connected mobile tele- phone. Press the icon to the left to connect another mobile phone.

2 Speed-dial buttons, connected tel- ephone contacts favourites.

3

To change to another telephone connected to the hands-free profile. Only visible when there are two tele- phones connected as hands-free.

DIAL NO. Open the numeric keypad page 236.

CONTACTS To open the phonebook of the con- nected telephone.

Text mes- sage To open the SMS menu.

234

Operating modes

Function button: function

CALLS To open call lists of the connected mobile telephone page 239.

SETTINGS To open the Phone settings menu.

Instructions and symbols of the phone management system

Fig. 226 Active call.

Fig. 227 Conference call.

Display: Meaning Fig. 226

A Name of the mobile operator of the connec- ted device.

B

Stored telephone number or name. If the name stored in the phonebook has an as- signed photo, it can be displayed: select Telephone > Settings > User profile > Show pictures for contacts*.

To accept a call.

To end a call.

OR: To reject an incoming call.

To mute or to reactivate the ring tone during an incoming call.

To mute the microphone during an active call and to reactivate it.

Display: Meaning Fig. 226

The active call is put on hold. While on hold the listener will not hear the conversation. To reactivate it, press the call accept button . To reject it, press the reject button .

Press to add a participant to the active call.

Connected mobile telephone charge status.

Strength of the signal received by the mo- bile telephone.

Multiple calls The telephony management system allows the user to interact with up to three calls on the screen.

Only one of the calls can be active.

Conference call The user can merge several calls into a single one by making a conference call by pressing button . There must be a minimum of two calls for this to work. Once the conference call has started, the user can add up to 5 par- ticipants.

Once the conference call is established, the user can consult the list of participants by pressing on the conference call image Fig. 227 C .

Depending on the mobile device, the call from a conference call participant can be

235

Infotainment System

hung up or excluded from the conference call but kept on a separate call.

WARNING Remember that the driver should not oper- ate the mobile phone while driving.

Note Multi-call and conference call functionali- ties are subject to the services associated with the user's SIM card.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 228 Enter telephone number menu.

Press the DIAL NUMBER function button from the Telephone main menu.

Enter telephone number Enter a phone number with the keypad. Press the function button to make a call.

Select a contact from the list Enter the first few letters of the contact. The available entries appear in the phonebook. Select the desired contact to make the call.

Enter the country code Press the function button 0 for approx. 2 seconds to add the +.

Assistance call Press the function button to obtain help in the event of breakdown.

Information call Press the function button to obtain informa- tion on the SEAT brand and the additional contracted services.

Call mailbox Press the function button to make the call. OR: Press the function button for about 2 seconds to make a call.

Note Breakdown service and information calls can incur an additional cost on your tele- phone bill.

The Roadside Assistance and Information services might not work properly, for exam- ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the connected mobile telephone are in differ- ent countries. If you are not able to use these services contact an authorised SEAT workshop.

236

Operating modes

Phonebook Menu (contacts)

Fig. 229 Contacts Menu.

Fig. 230 Search window.

Once the first pairing is made, it may take some time until the phonebook data1) of the paired mobile are available in the infotain- ment system. Depending on the volume of

data that has to be transferred, the process may take several minutes. It may be necessa- ry to confirm the data transmission on the mobile phone.

The phonebook can also be viewed during a telephone conversation.

If the name saved in the phonebook has an assigned photo, it can be displayed on the list next to the name. To do this, the option Show pictures for contacts in the Phone set-

tings context must be enabled and your mo- bile phone must support this functionality (check the compatibility list) page 240, Phone settings.

In the Telephone main menu, press the Contacts function button to access the con-

tacts list.

Select a contact from the list Search the list and press on the desired contact to make the call. OR: If the contact has several numbers, first press on the contact and then press on the desired number for making the call.

Search for a contact in the search window Press the Search function button Fig. 229 to open the search window.

Enter the name of the contact you are look- ing for in the window Fig. 230. While the characters are being entered, a contact is displayed in the input field. The number of matching results is dis- played to the right of the input field. Press the function button to go to the list. Search the list and press on the desired contact to make the call.

Opening the detailed view of a contact Press the function button Fig. 229 lo- cated next to the entry on the contacts list.

All the telephone numbers are displayed in the detailed view, and where applicable, the address recorded for the contact in question.

Read contact name Press the function button on the detailed list if you want the voice control system to read the name of the contact .

Call a contact Press the desired telephone number on the detailed list to make the call. Press the icon to edit the number before calling.

1) Depending on the device, only contacts in the phone's memory are loaded.

237

Infotainment System

Send SMS to a contact Press the function button on the detailed list.

Start route guidance to a contact's ad- dress1)

If the contacts address data has been saved, route guidance can be started to the con- tact's address.

Press address data in the detailed view to start route guidance.

Note If you edit a number before calling, it will not be saved in the phonebook but only used for the call.

Short messages (SMS) menu

Fig. 231 Short messages (SMS) menu.

If the mobile phone connected to the HFP profile also supports the SMS profile, a new function button will appear in the upper left corner of your Telephone menu, which will al- low you to receive, view and send SMS mes- sages through the infotainment system.

Whether or not the aforementioned functions work correctly will depend on the compatibil- ity of the connected mobile phone.

SMS menu function buttons Press the SMS function button from the Tel- ephone main menu.

Function button: function

New text message

To write and send an SMS (includes the possibility of accessing preset text templates).

Inbox To open the received SMS folder.

Outbox To open the outbox folder. SMS messages that have not been sent are stored here.

Sent To open the sent SMS folder.

Drafts To select a message that has been stored but not sent.

Send contact details

To send the details of a contact from the contact list.

Possible submenu function buttons

Function button: function

READ OUT For the voice control system to read the text of the SMS.

Options Open the Options menu.

Reply with template

To select a text template from a list.

Delete current text message

The SMS is deleted from the Inbox folder.

Telephone number

The sender's telephone number is displayed.

1) Valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus. 238

Operating modes

Function button: function

FORWARD To forward an SMS.

REPLY To reply to an incoming SMS.

Enter number

To enter a telephone number or to select a recipient from the contact list.

Press the Recipients function button to select multiple recipi- ents.

Recipients To select multiple recipients from the contact list.

Delete To delete an SMS.

Calls Menu (call lists)

Fig. 232 Call lists menu.

Press the Calls function button from the Telephone main menu.

Press the FILTER function button. Select the desired call list: All calls , Missed calls , Calls or Received calls .

If a telephone number is stored in the phone book, the saved name is displayed on the call list instead of the number.

If a photo is assigned to the name stored in the phonebook, it can be displayed on the call list next to the name page 240.

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning

Missed calls : Missed and unanswered calls.

Calls : Dialled numbers.

Received calls : Received calls.

Note The availability of the call lists will depend on the mobile phone used.

Quick dial keys

Fig. 233 Quick access to the phone book.

The speed dial keys Fig. 233 1 can be assigned a telephone number from the phone book.

If a photo is assigned to the name stored in the phone book, it can be displayed on the speed dial key page 240 .

All speed dial keys have to be manually edi- ted and will be assigned to a user profile. Up to 12 contacts can be added to the speed di- al keys.

Assign the speed dial keys In the main Telephone menu, press a free speed dial key. Select the desired contact from the list. If the selected contact has several phone num- bers, select the number you want.

239

Infotainment System

Edit assigned speed dial keys Press and hold an occupied speed dial key in the Telephone main menu until the Con- tacts menu opens. Select the desired contact from the list. If the selected contact has several phone num- bers, select the number you want. To close the Contacts menu without apply- ing the changes, press the BACK function button.

Delete assigned speed dial keys The phone numbers stored in the speed di- al buttons can be deleted in the menu User profile settings > Manage favourites page 240.

Make a call with a speed dial button Briefly press an assigned speed dial key in the Telephone main menu to call the tele- phone number stored in it.

Note The contacts stored in the speed dial keys are NOT updated automatically. If a con- tact stored on a speed dial key is modified on the mobile phone, the speed dial key must be assigned again.

Phone settings

In the Telephone main menu, press the SETTINGS function button.

Function button: function

Private mode : Private mode can only be activated during an active call. When private mode is disabled (by default), the calls audio is managed through the vehicle. When private mode is activated, call audio is managed through the mobile phone.

Select mobile phone : From the list, select the mobile phone to be connected to the hands-free profile with the infotainment system. OR: Press Find telephone to connect a new mobile phone.

Bluetooth : Opens the menu Bluetooth set- tings page 240.

User profile : Open the User profile settings menu page 240.

Note Some telephones require a restart to down- load the last added contacts again.

Bluetooth settings

In the main Telephone menu, press the SETTINGS function button and then press the Bluetooth function button.

Function button: function

Bluetooth : Press to deactivate Bluetooth. All active connections are disconnected.

Visibility : Activating and deactivating Bluetooth visi- bility.

Visible : Bluetooth visibility is active.

Hidden : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated. Bluetooth visibility must be active for external pairing of a Bluetooth device with the infotain- ment system. When a Bluetooth audio device is active and playing, visibility is automatically set to Hidden.

Forename : Display or change the Bluetooth name of the infotainment system. This will be the name shown to other Bluetooth devices.

Paired devices : Viewing paired devices. To disconnect and connect Bluetooth devices and Bluetooth pro- files.

Find devices : Search for visible Bluetooth devices that are within range of the infotainment system. The maximum range is approx. 10 meters.

Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : If an external audio source is to be connected to the infotainment system via Bluetooth, this function must be active page 205.

User profile settings

In the main Telephone menu, press the SETTINGS function button and then press the User profile function button.

240

Operating modes

Function button: function

Manage favourites : Edit the speed dial keys.

Occupied speed dial key: Press to delete the stored number.

Free speed dial key: Press to save a phone book number on the speed dial key.

Mailbox number : To enter or change the voice mailbox number.

Sort by : To set the order of appearance of the phone book entries (Forname and Surname or vice versa).

Import contacts : Press to import the phone book of the connected telephone or to update the imported phone book.

Reminder: remember your mobile phone : If a Bluetooth

connection is active with a mobile phone, the mes- sage Do not forget your mobile phone appears when the ignition is switched off.

Show pictures for contacts a): If the contacts in the phone book have been saved with a photo, it can be displayed on the speed dial keys, call lists and phone book .

a) Depending on the mobile phone.

Note Some telephones require a restart to down- load the last added contacts again.

241

Infotainment System

Multimedia

USB/AUX-IN input

Fig. 234 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Fig. 235 Rear part of the centre console: USB connectors.

Depending on the special characteristics and the country, the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the storage compartment area of the centre console Fig. 234.

Depending on the equipment and the coun- try, the vehicle may also have USB connec- tions exclusively for charging or as a power socket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats Fig. 235.

Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger*

Fig. 236 Related video

Fig. 237 In the centre console: pad for the mo- bile phone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes different func- tions that will help to use your mobile device.

They are the Wireless Charger and the Mobile Signal Amplifier.

The Wireless Charger only features the Wireless Charger function.

Wireless Charger The Wireless Charger allows mobile devi- ces with Qi1) technology to be charged with- out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up Fig. 237 .

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo- bile phone wirelessly.

242

Operating modes

Make sure there are no objects between the pad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto- matically. For further information about whether your mobile device uses Qi technol- ogy, check your phone's user manual or visit the SEAT website.

Mobile Signal Amplifier The Mobile Signal Amplifier allows you to reduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoy better reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended that you pair the system and the mobile using Bluetooth and place it on the Connectivity Box pad, for the best reception without hav- ing to handle the mobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle's external aerial:

Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up Fig. 237 .

Make sure there are no objects between the pad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically be ready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING The mobile phone may heat up due to the wireless charging. Think about this before

you pick it up, and take care when removing it. There must be no metallic or other ob- jects between the mobile phone and the housing, to prevent the functionality of the Connectivity Box from being affected.

Note Your mobile device must support the Qi inductive charging interface standard for proper operation. The charging time and the temperature vary in accordance with the device used. The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. Qi technology does not allow you to charge more than one mobile device simul- taneously. No improvement in reception can be guaranteed if there is more than one mo- bile phone on the pad. You are advised to keep the engine run- ning to guarantee proper wireless charg- ing. When a telephone with Qi technology is connected by USB, it will be charged by the means specified by the manufacturer.

243

Driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition lock

Fig. 238 Ignition key positions.

Key positions Fig. 238 Ignition off. Key can be removed from the vehicle. Ignition is switched on. Preheating occurs in diesel vehicles . Starting the engine.

1

2

3

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel Lock the steering wheel: remove the key from the ignition and turn the wheel until it locks. Depending on the country, in vehicles with automatic transmission, in order to re- move the key, move the gear shift to the P po- sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block- ing key and release it. Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into the ignition and turn it at the same time as the steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer- ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Start-Stop system* If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on.

Automatic transmission: before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch- ed off and the selector lever is in position P.

WARNING Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or operate electrical equipment, resulting in an accident. The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a

standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Note If it is difficult to turn the ignition key to the position 2 , move the steering wheel to both sides to release the steering lock. If the vehicle battery is disconnected and reconnected, the key must remain in the position 2 for around 5 seconds before starting up. Vehicles with automatic transmission,de- pending on the country, after switching off the ignition, you can only remove the igni- tion key if the selector lever is in position P (parking lock). Next, the selector lever is locked.

244

Start and driving

Ignition and start button*

Fig. 239 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: start button.

The engine can be started with a start button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the area of the front or rear seats, or on the centre console.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access page 97 system, the engine can also be started with the key in the luggage compart- ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting the vehicle activates the electronic lock on the steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually If you only want to switch on the ignition (without starting the engine), briefly press the start button once without pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal .

The start button text START ENGINE STOP flash- es like a heartbeat when the system is ready for the ignition to be turned on or off.

Automatic ignition disconnection If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni- tion does not switch off automatically. The ig- nition is switched off by pressing the lock but- ton on the remote control or by pressing the sensor surface on the door lever Fig. 95.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on vehicles with the Start-Stop system The ignition is switched off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- matic engine shutdown is active, if:

The driver's seat belt is not fastened, the driver does not step on any pedal, the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if the dipped beam is on, the side light re- mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is enough charge in the battery). If the driver locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out.

Engine restart feature If no key is detected inside the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-

onds to restart it. A warning will display on the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.

WARNING When switching on the ignition, do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine could start immediately.

WARNING If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- out due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury. Never leave any key inside the vehicle when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un- authorised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition and operate any of the electrical equipment.

Note Before leaving the vehicle, always dis- connect the ignition and, if appropriate, take into account the instructions on the screen of the dash panel. If the vehicle is stationary for a long time with the engine off and the ignition on, the vehicle battery might be discharged and it might not be possible to start the engine.

245

Driving

In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until the warning light page 246 goes off before starting the engine. If during the STOP phase you press the START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes. If the indication is displayed on the in- strument panel display Start-Stop system deactivated: Start the engine manually, the START ENGINE STOP button will blink.

Starting the engine

Before starting the engine Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal and keep it it in this position until the engine starts. Vehicles with automatic transmission: put the lever in position P or N.

Vehicles with ignition locks Turn the key to position Fig. 238 2 . Pre- heating occurs in diesel vehicles . Keep turning the key to position Fig. 238 3 without stepping on the accel- erator. Once the engine starts, release the key. When it is released, the key returns to position

2 .

If the engine does not start, stop and wait for around 1 minute to try again.

Vehicles with start buttons Press and hold the brake pedal until the en- gine starts. Press the starter button Fig. 239; do not press the accelerator. There needs to be a valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to start. After starting the engine, the lighting of the START ENGINE STOP button changes to steady lighting, indicating that the engine has started. Once the engine starts, release the start-up button. If the engine does not start, stop and wait for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, perform an emergency start page 248.

Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer than usual to start on cold days. During pre- heating, the warning lamp remains lit. To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat- tery, do not use any other major electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre- heating.

The preheating time depends on the coolant and exterior temperatures. With the engine at operating temperature, or at outside temper- atures above +8C, the warning lamp will light up for about one second. This means that the engine starts immediately.

Starting a diesel engine after having run out of fuel If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal (up to one mi- nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. This is because the fuel system must elimi- nate air first.

WARNING Never run the engine in confined spaces, as the exhaust gases are poisonous. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon- oxide, an odourless and colourless poison- ous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness and result in death.

WARNING Do not get out of the vehicle with the en- gine running, especially if a gear is engag- ed. The vehicle could then suddenly move or something strange could happen that would cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING Never use cold start sprays, they could ex- plode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Doing this risks injury.

246

Start and driving

CAUTION The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to start the engine while driving or if you restart it immediately after switching it off. When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Note Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts. When starting with a cold engine, noise levels may briefly increase. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. When the outside temperature is below +5 C (+41 F), if the engine is diesel, some smoke may appear under the vehicle when the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Turning off the engine

Bring the vehicle to a full stop . With manual transmission, press the clutch all the way down. If the vehicle is automatic, set the selector lever to the P position. Apply the electronic parking brake. Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key to position Fig. 238 1 . Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly press the start-up button Fig. 239.

Emergency disconnection If the engine does not switch off after briefly pressing the starter button, an emergency disconnect will be required:

Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- ond in Ignition and start button* on page 245.

WARNING Never switch off the engine while the vehi- cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- jury. The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off. The brake servo does not work with the engine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. You need more strength to steer when the engine is switch- ed off. If the ignition is switched off, the steering column could be locked, making it impossi- ble to control the vehicle. Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly lock, making it im- possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci- dent!

WARNING Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor- tant if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries.

CAUTION If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- Stop system* switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on. Make sure that the ignition is switched off before leav- ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could discharge. If the engine has been driven at high speed for a prolonged period of time, it may overheat when turned off. To avoid en- gine damage, allow the engine to run for

247

Driving

approximately two minutes in neutral be- fore switching it off.

Note After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It is also possi- ble that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine com- partment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser automatically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the key has to be outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in- strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle cannot be started.

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Note A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 240 On the right of the steering column: emergency start.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, an emergency start-up will be required. The relevant message will appear in the dash panel display. This may happen when, for ex- ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

Immediately after pushing the starter but- ton, keep the key next to the right trim of the steering column Fig. 240, as close as pos- sible to the Kessy logo. The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically.

Instructions for the driver on the in- strument panel display

Press the clutch This message appears on vehicles with a manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the engine without having the clutch pedal pressed. The engine will only start if you press the clutch pedal.

Press the brake This message appears on vehicles with an automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start the engine without having the brake pedal pressed.

Select N or P This message appears if you try to start or stop the engine when the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P or N. The engine can only be started and stopped in those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle can move; doors can only close in po- sition P.

For safety reasons, this driver message ap- pears and an audible warning sounds if the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P after you switch off the ignition. Move the selector lever to the P position, oth- erwise the vehicle could move.

248

Start and driving

Gear change: selector lever in the drive position!

This driver message is displayed when the selector lever is not in the position P when the driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzing sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po- sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Ignition is switched on This driver message is displayed and a buz- zer is sounded when the driver door is opened with the ignition switched on.

My Beat function

For vehicles with a convenience key there is the My Beat function. This feature provides an additional indication of the vehicle ignition system.

When entering the vehicle, the start button Fig. 239 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine start button flashes. With the ignition is switched off, the start button goes off after a few sec- onds.

With the engine running, the start button light stays on, indicating that the engine is running. The time elapsed between the moment the

user starts the engine with the start button button and the lighting changes from flashing to fixed will depend on specific engine size characteristics. When the start button is used to stop the engine, the button starts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the My Beat function also offers additional in- formation:

When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the start button button stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains active even though the engine is off. When the engine cannot be started again with the Start-Stop system, page 249, and needs to be started manually, the start but- ton flashes to indicate this situation.

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has been disconnected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru- ment panel display Start-Stop system deactivated. Start the engine manually

This indication for the driver shows that the Start-Stop system cannot start the engine again.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Function not available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re- paired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel and reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is stopping. The ignition remains switched on. The engine automatically switches back on when required.

249

Driving

In this scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

When the ignition is switched on, the Start- Stop function is automatically activated.

In the Easy Connect system you can find more information about the Start-Stop sys- tem: press the button > View > Vehicle status.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will light up. The engine can be stopped before stopping completely (approximately 7 km/h). When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- gine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox Brake until it is stopped, and keep your foot on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold* system so that the vehicle remains braked. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear in the display. The engine can be stopped before stopping completely (ap- proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the ve- hicle's gearbox).

When you take your foot off the brake ped- al the engine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Auto Hold* system, when the system is active, the engine will not start if you remove your foot from the brake pedal. The car starts when you press the accelerator pedal.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode The driver door must be closed. The driver's seat belt must be fastened. The bonnet must be closed. The engine has reached operating temper- ature. The reverse gear must not be engaged. The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.

The engine does not turn off for various reasons Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri- fies whether certain conditions are met. The engine does not switch off, in the following situations for example:

The engine has not yet reached the re- quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.

The temperature selected on the climate control has not been reached. The interior temperature is very high/low. Defrost function button activated page 150. The parking aid* is switched on. The battery is very low. The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- ing turned. If there is a danger of misting. After engaging reverse gear. In case of a very steep gradient.

is shown on the instrument panel display, as well as on the driver information system* .

The engine starts by itself When stopped, the normal system mode may be interrupted in the following situations. The engine restarts by itself without involvement from the driver.

The interior temperature differs from the temperature selected on the climate control. Defrost function button activated page 150. The brake has been pressed several times consecutively.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access. 250

Start and driving

The battery is too low. High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto- matic gearbox The engine stops when the selector lever is in the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P, the engine will also remain switched off when you take your foot off the brake pedal. In or- der to start the engine up again the accelera- tor must be pressed, or another gear engag- ed or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop- ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the engine from accidentally starting when passing through R.

Additional information about vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will start up again in certain operating conditions if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle ahead drives off again.

WARNING Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is stationary. The operation of the brake and steering will not be fully guaranteed. More force will be needed to turn the steer-

ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an accident and even serious injuries. To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment page 251.

CAUTION The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded areas page 267.

Note In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or increasing the brake force applied. While the vehicle remains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for example. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop. When stopped, the brake pedal must be kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle does not move. If the engine stalls with a manual gear- box, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards

direction must be reached for the system to be in a status to stop the engine.

Manually connecting and discon- necting the Start-Stop system

Fig. 241 Centre console: Start-stop system button.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can switch it off manually.

To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop system, press the button Fig. 241.

The button symbol remains lit up yellow when the system is switched off.

Note The system switches on every time the en- gine is turned off voluntarily.

251

Driving

Manual gearbox

Changing gears

Fig. 242 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever Fig. 242.

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. Move the gearbox lever to the required po- sition. Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is stopped.

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down.

With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it downwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse Fig. 242 R . Release the clutch.

Changing down gears While driving, changing down a gear must al- ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di- rectly below and when the engine speed is not too high . Changing down while by- passing one or various gears at high speeds or at high engine speeds can damage the clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch pedal remains depressed .

WARNING When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released. This also happens if the electronic parking brake is switched on. Never engage reverse gear when the ve- hicle is moving.

WARNING If the gear is changed down inappropriate- ly by selecting a gear that is too low, you may lose control of the vehicle, causing an accident and serious injuries.

CAUTION When travelling at high speeds or at high engine speeds, selecting a gear that is too low can cause considerable damage to the clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc- cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held and it does not engage.

CAUTION To prevent damage and avoid premature wear, please observe the following: Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure applied by your hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector forks. Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped- al; although the pressure may seem insig- nificant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do not need to change gear. Always ensure that the vehicle is com- pletely stopped before engaging the re- verse gear. Always press the clutch to the floor when changing gears. Never hold the vehicle on the clutch on hills with the engine on.

252

Start and driving

Automatic gearbox/DSG au- tomatic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- mitted via two independent clutches. They replace the torque converter found on con- ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- hicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears manually page 255, Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake is not pressed. To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged. The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En- gage the selector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Fig. 243 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever position is shown when the corresponding sign lights up. With the selec- tor lever in the manual gearbox positions M, D and S, the engaged gear is also shown on the display.

Parking lock When the lever is put in this position, the drive wheels are locked. The lever must only be put in P when the vehicle is stationary .

To put the lever in P or take it out of P , the locking button must be pressed and held and the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.

Reverse gear Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling .

To move the lever to position R, the lock but- ton must be pressed and held while pressing the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse lights come on when the lever is in the R posi- tion with the ignition on.

Neutral With the lever in this position, the gear is in neutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) .

Permanent forward drive position The lever in the D/S position enables the gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S, move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever again will select normal mode D. The selec- ted driving mode is shown on the instrument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the best gear ratio. This depends on the engine load, the road speed and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the engine's maximum power output. When accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea- ble.

253

Driving

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun- tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch tiptronic mode page 255, to adapt the gears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lock In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range from being engaged, and prevents the vehi- cle from moving off accidentally.

To release the gear lever lock, press and hold the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the same time, press the lever lock in the direc- tion of the arrow Fig. 243.

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is in positions P or N the following indication will be shown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrake while selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en- gages automatically if the brake pedal is not pressed and the lever is in position N for more than about one second at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph).

Safety interlock for ignition key Once the ignition has been turned off, the key may be removed only if the gear selector is in

position P. While the key is not in the ignition, the selector lever is locked in position P.

WARNING Take care not to press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve- hicle could start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is en- gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident. Never move the lever to R or P when driv- ing. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident or failure. With lever in any position (except P), the foot brake must be pushed down whenever the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed. While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident. As a driver you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is engaged. Switch on the electronic parking brake and select the parking lock (P).

Note If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting gear range D or S again. Should the power supply to the lever be interrupted in position P, it will not be possi-

ble to move the lever. If this should happen the manual release can be used page 259.

Note If the lever lock does not engage, there is a fault. The transmission is interrupted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov- ing. Follow the procedure below in order for the lever lock to engage again: With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again. With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the lever to posi- tion P or N and subsequently engage a gear.

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi- cle does not move forwards or back. Pro- ceed to the next mode: When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engag- ed. Press the brake pedal and engage the gear range again.

If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system malfunction. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked.

254

Start and driving

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*

Fig. 244 Lever in the Tiptronic position

Fig. 245 Steering wheel: automatic transmis- sion levers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option to change gears manually.

When you change to the Tiptronic pro- gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently selected gear. This is possible as long as the

system is not changing gear automatically due to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector lever It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode, both when the vehicle is stopped and while driving.

Starting from the D/S position, move the lever to the right. The instrument panel will show whether the lever is in manual or Tip- tronic mode (e.g. M4). Push the lever forwards + or backwards to move up or down a gear Fig. 244. To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the left.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel paddles* The gearshift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic) positions.

Press the gearshift paddle + to select a higher gear Fig. 245. Press the gearshift paddle to select a lower gear. To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right- hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap- proximately 1 second or move the lever to the left.

If the paddles are not operated for some time and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection position, it will automatically exit from Tip- tronic mode.

CAUTION When accelerating, if a higher gear is not selected, it will automatically change shortly before reaching the maximum per- mitted RPM. Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys- tem will not change until it detects that the engine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selector lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, below -10 C (+14 F), the engine can only start with the selector lever in position P.

Driving down hills Under certain circumstances it may be ad- vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se- lect the gear manually according to driving conditions .

255

Driving

Stop/Park On level ground, just use the lever to engage position P. On slopes you should first apply the parking brake and then set the lever to P. This makes it easier to remove the lever from position P when starting.

If the driver door is opened and the lever is not in position P, the vehicle could move. The following warning is displayed on the instru- ment panel: Gear change: selector lever in the drive position!. Addi- tionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhill Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary, apply the electronic parking brake .

Do not accelerate while a range of gears is engaged to prevent the car from rolling downhill .

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func- tion Once you have engaged a gear, take your foot off the brake pedal and gently press the accelerator.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold function Pull on the electronic parking brake button.

Once you have engaged a gear, gently press the accelerator and pull on the elec- tronic parking brake button.

Back-up programme If all the positions of the lever are shown over a light background on the instrument panel display, there is a system fault and the auto- matic gearbox will operate in with the backup programme. It is still possible to drive the ve- hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se- lected range of gears. Driving in reverse gear may not be possible.

Kick-down The kick-down system provides maximum ac- celeration when the gear selector lever is in the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down, the automatic gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. This takes advantage of the maximum acceleration of the vehicle .

The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Selec- tor lever positions on page 254. Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long

periods, as the brakes can overheat. This reduces the braking power, increases the braking distance or even causes a brake system fault. If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi- cles brakes applied with the brake pedal or parking brake.

WARNING Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

CAUTION If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- pressing the accelerator when a gear has been selected. This could cause overheat- ing and damage the automatic gearbox. If you allow the vehicle to roll with the lever in position N and the engine off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged by lack of lubrication. In certain driving situations or traffic con- ditions, the gears could overheat and be damaged! If the warning lamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as you can and wait for the gearbox to cool page 259.

256

Start and driving

If the gearbox operates with the backup programme, take the vehicle to a special- ised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.

Launch-control program 3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of more than 125 kW, and petrol of more than 140 kW.

The Launch-control programme enables maximum acceleration from a standstill.

Condition: the engine must have reached op- erating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned.

The engine speed for Launch-control is differ- ent on petrol and diesel engines.

To use the Launch-control you must discon- nect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Connect system menu page 89. The warning lamp will stay switched on or will flash slowly depending on whether or not the vehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys- tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and the corresponding text message Stability

control deactivated (temporary) appears on the instrument panel to indicate the deac- tivation status.

With the engine running, switch off traction control (ASR) page 3031). Press the brake pedal with your left foot and hold it down for at least one second. Turn the selector lever to position S or Tip- tronic, or else select the sport driving mode from the SEAT Drive Profile* page 262. With your right foot, press the accelerator down to the full throttle or kick-down position. The engine speed will stabilise at about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING Always adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Only use the Launch control programme when road and traffic conditions permit, and make sure your manner of driving and accelerating the vehicle does not incon- venience or endanger other road users.

Make sure that the ESC remains switched on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of accident! After moving off, the ESC sport mode should be deactivated by briefly pressing the button.

Note After using the Launch control pro- gramme, the temperature in the gearbox may have increased considerably. In this case, the programme could be disabled for several minutes. The programme can be used again after the cooling phase. Accelerating with the launch control pro- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of the vehicle. This can result in increased wear and tear.

downhill assistant*

Downhill speed control is activated when the lever is in the D/S position and the brake is applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag- ed.

1) Vehicles without a driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly. Vehicles with a driver information system: the warning lamp re- mains on.

257

Driving

The assistant attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the brake was applied, within logical limits. It may be necessary to correct the speed by press- ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as far as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep slopes you have to switch to tiptronic mode and change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine braking and take the load off the brake system.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system* page 268, downhill speed control is acti- vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING The downhill speed control cannot defy the laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be maintained constant in all situations. Al- ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certain distances without using the accelerator, which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in- ertia mode to let the vehicle roll.

Activation of the inertia mode Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130 km / h (12 and 80 mph).

Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru- ment panel , the engaged gear and cur- rent consumption will disappear and the word Inertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage and the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertia mode, simply remove your foot from the ac- celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged section with less energy) and inertia discon- nection (= shorter section without the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and emission balance.

If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile page 262, the inertia mode can be activa- ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. In Eco mode, it is activated whenever the oper- ating conditions are met, regardless of the

smoothness with which the foot is removed from the accelerator.

WARNING If the inertia mode has been switched on, take into account, when approaching an obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler- ate in the usual manner: risk of accident! When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: risk of accident! If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode.

Note The driver message Inertia is only dis- played with the current consumption. In in- ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis- played (for example D or E will appear instead of D7 or E7). The inertia mode will be automatically disconnected on gradients steeper than 15%. In the case of the TDI and 2.0l TSI en- gines, the inertia mode will only work in the Eco driving mode.

258

Start and driving

Indications on the instrument panel display

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could be damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to cool with the engine at idling speed and the selector lever in position P. When the warning lamp and the driver message switch off, have the fault corrected by a specialised work- shop without delay. If they do not turn off, do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tance.

Faults in the gearbox Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle and place the lever in the posi- tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You may continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving with restric- tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until switching off the engine

Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special- ist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When the warning lamp switches off, you can con- tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en- gage a gear again.

If the warning was caused by the tempera- ture of the gearbox, this driver message will be displayed when the gearbox has cooled again.

Manual release of the selector lev- er

Fig. 246 Gear selector lever: manual release from the parking position.

In the event of a power failure when starting (e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain locked in position P. To move it to position N to move the vehicle, there is an emergency re- lease device under the centre console, on the right side. Releasing the selector lever re- quires a certain degree of practical skill.

Removing the cover from the selector lev- er Apply the electronic parking brake . Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever boot and twist it upwards over the lever handle.

259

Driving

Releasing the selector lever Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed down Fig. 246. Press the lock button on the selector lev- er and move it to position N. After completing the emergency release, reattach the selector lever boot to the gear- box console.

WARNING Do not move the lever from position P if the parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you still think the car could move, press the brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could move in an unforeseen way and cause an accident or serious injury.

Gear-change recommenda- tion

Selecting the optimal gear

Fig. 247 Instrument panel: gear-change indi- cator (manual gearbox).

Depending on the equipment on the instru- ment panel screen, a recommendation is shown with the gear that should be engaged to optimise consumption.

On vehicles with automatic transmission, the lever must be in Tiptronic mode page 255.

No recommendation will appear if the opti- mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be displayed.

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Changing to a higher gear is rec- ommended.

Changing to a lower gear is rec- ommended.

Information regarding the cleanliness of the particulate filter When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, this systems self-cleaning function recommends the optimal gear for that function page 342.

WARNING The gear change recommendation is an auxiliary function and in no case should be a substitute for careful driving. Responsibility for selecting the correct gear, depending on the circumstances, rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environment Selecting the correct gear can help to save fuel.

Note The recommended gear indication turns off when the clutch pedal is pressed or when

260

Start and driving

the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi- tion.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

Control lamps 3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

It lights up white

Hill Descent Control is active.

It lights up grey

Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Description and operation

Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steep descents by automatically braking all four

wheels, both when moving forward and in re- verse. As the anti-lock brake system remains active, it prevents the wheels from locking. In vehicles with manual transmission, the Hill Descent Control adapts the theoretical speed without slowing the engine below its idling speed.

After starting the descent of a slope below 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini- mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the driver may increase or decrease the speed within the limit by pressing the accelerator or the brake. At this point the function is interrup- ted and, if necessary, it is then reactivated.

Even so, it is imperative that the surface guar- antees sufficient adhesion. For this reason, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its func- tion when, for example, descending a slope with a frozen or slippery surface.

Hill Descent Control is available when the dash panel display shows the message .

Hill Descent Control automatically intervenes if the following conditions are met:

The vehicle engine is running. The Offroad driving profile has been selec- ted page 262. Driving at a speed below 30 km/h (18 mph) (the message is shown on the instrument panel).

The slope of the descent is at least 10% when driving forward and 9% when driving in reverse. The brake and the accelerator are not pressed.

Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press- ing the brake and the accelerator or if the slope is below 5%. The function may be dis- connected manually in the Easy Connect system by pressing the > HDC button.

WARNING Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an accident could occur and cause injury. Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary system that in some situations may not suf- ficiently brake the vehicle when going down a slope. The speed of the vehicle may increase despite the intervention of Hill Descent Control.

Steering

Information relating to different ve- hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adapts electronically to the speed of the car, torque and steering angle.

261

Driving

Even if the power steering fails or the engine is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate the steering wheel as long as the key remains in the ignition lock, but more force must be applied.

Progressive steering Depending on the vehicles features, it may or may not incorporate a progressive steering system.

In city traffic you do not need to turn so much on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressive steering transmits, for example, in bends, a sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy- namic driving sensation.

Steering assist This help assists the driver in critical situa- tions. It recommends turning the steering wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid skidding .

WARNING Steering assist helps the driver in critical situations. The driver is the person who has to control the vehicle's steering at all times.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Faulty steering. Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as possible and in a safe manner. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation. Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have the steering checked. If the warning light does not come on again after re- starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is not necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and re- connected. Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed. When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc- tions.

OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock. Remove the key from the ignition switch and recon- nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru- ment panel display. Do not continue driving if the steering column re- mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek specialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.

WARNING Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- es. If the warning lamps and the correspond- ing messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, causing serious damage or accidents and injuries. Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.

SEAT Driving modes (SEAT Drive Profile)*

Introduction

Fig. 248 Related video

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to choose between the Eco, Normal, Sport and

262

Start and driving

Individual profiles and modes, which modi- fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions, providing different driving experiences.

In addition, the 4Drive version features the Offroad and Snow profiles.

The Individual profile can be configured according to personal preferences. The other profiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the following functions:

Engine Depending on the profile selected, the engine responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac- celerator being pressed. When Eco mode is selected, the Start-stop function is activated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the gear change timing is changed to put the changes at higher or lower revolutions. Eco mode activates the Inertia function, thereby reducing consumption. The rest of the driving modes will activate the inertia use function when the selector lever is not in the S posi- tion, depending on how the accelerator ped-

al is released page 258. When the vehicle is turned on again, the function is activated by default to reduce consumption.

With a manual gearbox, the Eco mode changes the gear changes recommenda- tions to facilitate more efficient driving.

Dynamic chassis control (DCC) DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb- ers to the condition of the road and current driving conditions, according to the pre-set programme.

In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow- ing message is displayed on the instrument screen Fault: shock absorber regula- tion

Steering The power steering varies its driving modes and adapts to the profile selected, thus offer- ing the best behaviour for each situation.

Air conditioning In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con- sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The ACCs acceleration and braking mode varies according to the driving profile page 277.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, the electronic stability Control (ESC) page 301 adjusts to adapt to the terrain.

In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti- vated in the Offroad profile page 261.

Setting the driving profile

Fig. 249 Centre console: Driving Experience button.

You can select the Eco, Normal, Sport, Indi- vidual, Offroad1) and Snow1).

1) Only for 4Drive models. 263

Driving

The desired mode can be selected as follows:

Turn the Driving Experience button until the required profile lights up on the Easy Connect system display as well as on the Driving Ex- perience button Fig. 249. OR: select the required profile on the touch- screen of the Easy Connect system, in the menu that opens up on turning the Driving Experience button.

The features of each profile can be seen by pressing the Profile information function button.

In the Individual profile it is possible to con- figure the characteristics of the vehicle using the Profile setup function button.

An icon on the touchscreen provides informa- tion about the active profile if it is different than Normal. The selector identifies the pro- file chosen by means of a red LED light.

Driving pro- file Characteristics

Places the vehicle in a low state of consumption, facilitating a fuel-saving driving style that is respectful to the environment.

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi- ence, suitable for everyday use.

Driving pro- file Characteristics

Sport

Provides a complete dynamic performance in the vehicle, ena- bling the user a more sporty driv- ing style.

Individual

It allows you to personalise the configuration. The functions that can be adjusted depend on the equipment fitted in the vehicle.

Offroada)

It adjusts the vehicle's parame- ters in order to maintain optimal off-road driving.

Snowa)

It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour for driving on slippery road sur- faces, optimising grip and ma- noeuvrability.

a) Only for 4Drive models.

WARNING When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at- tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause an accident.

Note When the engine is switched off it will store the driving profile that was selected when the ignition was turned off. When re- starting, the engine and gearbox start up in their normal mode. For engine and gear to revert to the desired mode, select the cor- responding drive profile again rotating the

thumbwheel (Driving Experience Button) or on the Easy Connect display. When the vehicle is restarted after using the Offroad or Snow settings, the system is always activated in the Normal profile. Your speed and driving style must always be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf- fic conditions. The Eco profile is not recommended when towing a vehicle.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.

Running-in the engine A new engine must be driven through a run-in period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles). During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bed- ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future engine per- formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate speed (espe- cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce

264

Start and driving

engine wear and increase its useful life. Never drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always engage a lower gear when the engine works irregularly. For the first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note:

Do not use full throttle. Do not force the engine above two thirds of its maximum speed. Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to 1000 miles), gradually increase power until reaching the maximum speed and high engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres page 359. Information about brakes page 297.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and the engine oil consumption reduced.

Four-wheel drive (4Drive) 3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow- er is distributed to all four wheels

General notes On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine power is distributed to all four wheels. The distribution of power is controlled automati- cally according to your driving style and the road conditions. Also see page 301.

The four-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine power. This combination gives the vehicle exceptional handling and performance capabilities, both on normal roads and in more difficult condi- tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per- haps especially for this reason), it is important to observe certain safety points .

Winter tyres Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend that winter tyres or all- season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to give even better braking response.

Snow chains On roads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive page 363.

Changing tyres On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-

ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread depths page 359.

Off-roader? If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: it does not have enough ground clearance to be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as possible.

WARNING Even with four-wheel drive, you should al- ways adjust your speed to suit the condi- tions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driv- ing. Risk of accident! The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no different from a car without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in these conditions. Risk of accident! On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aquaplane and lose contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed to warn the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car. For this reason you should always choose a driving speed suitable for the road conditions. Risk of accident!

265

Driving

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all depend largely on driving style. Consumption can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi- cient driving type. The following section gives you some tips on lessening the impact on the environment and reducing your operating costs at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT)* Depending on vehicle equipment, the active cylinder management (ACT) may deacti- vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv- ing situation does not require too much pow- er. The number of active cylinders can be seen on the instrument panel display. page 72.

Foresight when driving If you think ahead when driving, you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when- ever possible, with a gear engaged. This takes advantage of the engine braking effect, reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis- sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.

Changing gear to save energy An effective way of saving is to change in ad- vance to a higher gear.

Manual transmission: shift up from first to second gear as soon as possible. Choosing the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the highest possible gear appropriate for the driving situation (the engine should continue functioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu- ally and without reaching the kick-down position.

Avoid driving at high speed Avoid travelling at your vehicles top speed, whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis- sion of harmful gases and noise pollution multiply as speed is increased. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling time In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is automatically reduced. In vehicles without the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off the engine, for example, at level crossings and at traffic lights that remain red for long periods of time. When an engine has reached operating temperature, and depending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off for a minimum of about 5 seconds already saves more than the amount of fuel necessa- ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- tant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the en- gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenance Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even before the engine is started. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their optimal operating temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionate amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- ing temperature after about four kilometres (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return to a normal level.

Check tyre pressure Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the correct pressures page 360 to save fuel. If the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump- tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater

266

Start and driving

rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa- ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero- dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re- move it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel.

Save electrical energy The engine drives the alternator, thereby generating electricity. This implies that any increase in power consumption also increa- ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that use a lot of electricity includes the blow- er at a high setting, the rear window heating or the seat heating* page 227.

Note If you have the Start-Stop system, it is recommended that it should not be discon- nected.

It is recommended that you close the windows when driving at more than 60 km/h (37 mph). Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the plate slip. This causes wear and can dam- age the clutch plate. Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the brake. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged. Use the engine brake on downhills by changing to the gear that is best suited for the gradient. Fuel consumption will be zero and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on flooded roads, take the following into ac- count:

The water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork. Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING After driving through flooded zones, brak- ing effectiveness can decrease if the brake discs or pads are damp page 297.

CAUTION Driving through flooded areas may dam- age vehicle components such as the en- gine, transmission or electrical system. Whenever driving through water, the Start-Stop system* must be switched off page 249.

Note Check the depth of the water before en- tering the flooded zone. Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or stop the engine. Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc- tion cause waves that could exceed your vehicle's critical height. Avoid driving through salt water (corro- sion) page 370.

Trips abroad

With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured that lead-free petrol is available throughout the journey page 337, Fuel types. Seek information about service station networks selling unleaded fuel. In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may not be available or the technical services may only be able to make limited repairs.

267

Driving

SEAT importers and distributors will provide information about the technical preparation that your vehicle requires and also about necessary maintenance and repair possibili- ties.

CAUTION SEAT does not accept liability for any dam- age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

Driver assistance systems

Cruise control system (CCS)*

Related video

Fig. 250 Dash panel

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and active.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is switched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approxi- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Introduction

Fig. 251 Instrument panel display: GRA status indications.

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking the vehicle .

Status display GRA status Fig. 251

268

Driver assistance systems

CCS temporarily switched off. The set speed is displayed in small or darkened figures. System error. Contact a specialised workshop. CCS switched on. The speed memory is empty. The CCS is switched on. The set speed is displayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS mode The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS If the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi- cle speed downhill, brake and change down a gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarily disabled by pressing the brake.

Automatic off The GRA disconnects automatically or is temporarily interrupted:

If the system detects a fault that could af- fect the working order of the CCS. If you press and maintain the accelerator pedal for a certain time, driving faster than the stored speed. If the dynamic driving control systems inter- vene, ASR, ESC, etc.

A

B

C

D

If the brake pedal is pressed. If the airbag is triggered. If the lever is taken out of the D/S position.

WARNING Use of GRA could cause accidents and se- vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safety dis- tance. Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis- tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi- cient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances or on flooded roads. Never use the CCS when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. Adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath- er, the condition of the road and the traffic situation. To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time you finish using it. It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for other conditions. If driving down a steep gradient, the GRA cannot maintain a constant speed. The speed can increase. In this case, brake and change down a gear.

Operating the cruise control

Fig. 252 On the turn signal lever: controls for operating the GRA.

Connecting Move the control Fig. 252 1 to .

If no speed has been programmed, the sys- tem will not control it.

Activating the cruise control Press button Fig. 252 2 in area .

The current speed is stored and the cruise control is activated.

Temporarily interrupting Move the control Fig. 252 1 to or step on the brake.

The cruise control system is switched off tem- porarily. The speed is stored.

269

Driving

Reinstating the cruise control Press button Fig. 252 2 in area .

Cruise control is activated at the stored speed.

Adjusting the speed While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be adjusted with button Fig. 252 2 :

To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) briefly press button Fig. 252 2 in the area . To increase the speed without interruption, keep button Fig. 252 2 pressed down in the area . To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) briefly press button Fig. 252 2 in the area . To reduce the speed without interruption, keep button Fig. 252 2 pressed down in the area .

The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac- celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi- cle does not brake actively.

Switching off Move control Fig. 252 1 to .

The system is disconnected and the memo- rised speed is deleted.

Speed limiter

Control lamp

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee- ded.

It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit- er is active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approxi- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Introduction

Fig. 253 On the instrument panel display: indi- cations of the speed limited status.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a programmed speed, from 30 km/h (19 mph) approx. and faster. Depending on the equipment, the speed limi- ted can be operated using the lever of the turn signals page 272 or by the third lever page 272.

Display messages on the speed limiter Status Fig. 253:

The speed limiter is active. The last speed set is displayed in large figures. The speed limiter is not active. The last speed set is displayed in small or dark- ened figures. The speed limiter is switched off. The total mileage is displayed.

A

B

C

270

Driver assistance systems

Switching between the speed limiter and GRA or ACC (while the speed limiter is connected) To change between the driving assistance systems, press button Fig. 254 2 , then select with the right thumbwheel on the multi- function steering wheel in the instrument panel menu and press the thumbwheel to confirm your selection.

It switches between the speed limiter and cruise control (GRA) or the adaptive cruise control (ACC).

Going down slopes with the speed limiter If the programmed speed is exceeded while driving downhill, after a short time the control warning lamp page 270 flashes and an audible warning may sound. Brake and change down a gear.

Temporarily deactivate by pressing the accelerator down If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- down) and the set speed is exceeded be- cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is temporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acoustic signal sound once. While cruise control is off, the control lamp flashes .

When the accelerator is no longer pressed down and the speed is reduced below the set

value, the limiter switches on again. The con- trol lamp lights up and remains lit.

Automatic off The speed limiter is automatically switched off:

If the system detects a fault that could neg- atively affect the working order of the limiter. If the airbag is triggered.

WARNING After use, switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated without it being required. The speed limiter does not relieve the driver of their responsibility to drive at the appropriate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary. Using the speed limiter in adverse weath- er conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents. Use the speed limiter only when the condition of the road surface and the weather and traffic conditions al- low it. When driving on a steep gradient, the speed limiter cannot limit the vehicles speed. This can increase. In this case, brake and change down a gear.

CAUTION For automatic switching off due to system failures, for security reasons, the limiter is only completely switched off when the driver stops pressing the accelerator or consciously switches it off.

Note Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. If the cruise control (GRA), the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter are connected when the ignition is switch- ed off, the assistants will switch it when the ignition is switched on, but only the speed limiter will maintain the last programmed speed.

271

Driving

Operating the speed limiter with the turn signal lever

Fig. 254 On the turn signal lever: buttons to operate the speed limiter.

Connecting Move control Fig. 254 1 to position and press button 2 .

The last programmed speed is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Activating the speed limiter While driving, press button Fig. 254 3 in the area .

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed.

Setting the programmed speed You can set the speed using button Fig. 254 3 :

Briefly press area to increase speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). Press and hold the area to continu- ously increase speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph). Briefly press area to decrease speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). Press and hold area to continuously decrease speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).

The speed is limited to the set value.

Switching off the speed limiter Move control Fig. 254 1 to position .

The system switches off.

Switching off temporarily If you want to temporarily deactivate the speed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move the control Fig. 254 1 to position or press button 2 .

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be ac- tivated with the previously programmed speed by pressing button Fig. 254 3 in the area .

Operating the speed limiter with the third lever

Fig. 255 On the left of the steering column: buttons to operate the speed limiter.

Connecting Move the lever towards the steering wheel to position .

The last programmed speed is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Activating the speed limiter While driving, press button Fig. 255

1 .

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed.

Setting the programmed speed The programmed speed can be set:

272

Driver assistance systems

Move the lever to the pressure point to increase speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). Move the lever upwards to increase in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph). Press the button Fig. 255 1 to reduce speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). Move the lever downwards to reduce in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).

To change the programmed speed without interruption, keep the lever pressed in the di- rection + or - . The speed is limited to the set value.

Switching off the speed limiter Move the lever to position .

The system switches off.

Switching off temporarily If you want to temporarily deactivate the speed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move the lever to the pressure point or press but- ton Fig. 255 2 .

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be ac- tivated with the previously programmed speed by moving the lever to the pressure point .

Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)*

Introduction

Fig. 256 On the instrument panel display: ad- vance warning indications.

The objective of the system is to prevent head-on collisions against objects that may be in the vehicles path or minimise the con- sequences of such impacts.

Depending on several factors and how criti- cal the situation is, the system operates in a staggered manner. First it warns the driver, and if the drivers reaction does not occur or is insufficient, it activates independent emer- gency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same lane travelling in the same direction, or with pedestrians crossing the vehicles path or cir-

culating on the same lane and in the same di- rection. It may not activate in other hazard situations .

Front Assist is active between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on a range of conditions, some of the func- tions described below are omitted to optimize the behaviour of the system.

Front Assist is a driving assistance function that can never replace the drivers atten- tion.

Safety distance warning If the system detects that you are driving too close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the driver with this indication on the instrument panel display .

The timing of the warning varies depending on driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warning If the system detects a possible collision with the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by means of an audible warning and an indica- tion on the instrument panel display Fig. 256.

The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possible emergency braking .

273

Driving

Critical warning If the driver fails to react to the advance warning, the system may actively intervene in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger of a colli- sion.

Automatic braking If the driver also fails to react to the critical warning, the system may initiate independ- ent emergency braking by progressively in- creasing the braking in accordance with how critical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assistance sys- tem The system may detect that the driver is not braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it will increase the braking intensity.

The system cannot prevent a collision, al- though it can significantly minimise the con- sequences by reducing the speed and the force of the impact.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

WARNING Front Assist cannot change the laws of physics or replace the driver in terms of

keeping control of the vehicle and reacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING Following a Front Assist emergency warn- ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- tion and try to avoid the collision as appli- cable. If the Front Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership. Always adapt your speed and distance away from the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- dents and serious injuries. In complex driving situations, Front Assist may issue warnings and intervene in brak- ing unnecessarily. If the operation of the Front Assist is im- paired by dirt or because the radar sensor has lost its settings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inop- portunely in the braking. The Front Assist does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or ap- proaching head-on down the same lane.

The Front Assist does not react to pedes- trians walking head-on in the same lane. The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.

Note When Front Assist is connected, the indi- cations of other functions on the screen may be hidden. When the Front Assist causes a braking, the brake pedal is harder. Automatic interventions by the Front As- sist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. The Front Assist may brake the vehicle until it stops completely. However, the brake system does not halt the vehicle per- manently. Use the foot brake! If the Front Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several times unnecessarily), switch it off.

274

Driver assistance systems

Radar sensors

Fig. 257 On the front behind the SEAT badge: radar sensors.

A radar sensor is fitted on the front, behind the SEAT badge Fig. 257.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired by dirt, or by environmental influences such as rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assist does not work. The instrument panel displays the following message: Front Assist: No sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor .

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the Front Assist will be availa- ble again. The message will disappear from the screen.

Front Assist operation may be affected by a strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re- paired or structural modifications are made to it, Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

CAUTION If you have the feeling that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, discon- nect the Front Assist. This will avoid possi- ble dangerous situations caused by the in- adequate operation of the system. If this occurs have it adjusted. The sensor may not be adjusted correct- ly if it receives an impact. This may com- promise the system's efficacy or discon- nect it. Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose. Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- icer spray.

Operation of the emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 258 On the instrument panel display: Front Assist deactivated indication.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so too are the advance warning and the distance warning functions.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist activated. Exceptions page 276, Deacti- vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol- lowing situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist can be deactivated or activated as follows: Select the corresponding menu option us- ing the button for the driver assistance sys- tems page 86.

275

Driving

OR: using the Easy Connect system with the button > SETTINGS > Driver as- sistance page 89.

When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi- cation Fig. 258 will be shown on the in- strument panel.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning (advance warning) The advance warning can be activated or deactivated in the Easy Connect system us- ing button > SETTINGS > Driver as- sistance page 89.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping advance warning active.

Depending on the vehicles infotainment sys- tem the advance warning function may be adapted in the following modes:

Advance Medium Delayed Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in Medium mode.

Switching distance warning on and off The distance warning can be activated or deactivated in the Easy Connect system us- ing button > SETTINGS > Driver as- sistance page 89.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distance warning active.

Deactivating Front Assist tempora- rily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist should be deactivated due to the system's limitations:

When the vehicle is to be towed. If the vehicle is on a test bed. When the radar sensor is damaged. If the radar sensor receives a violent im- pact. If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. If the radar sensor is temporarily covered by an accessory. When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto transportation.

System limitations

Fig. 259 On the instrument panel display: ini- tial system self-calibration indication.

Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the reactions may be inappropriate from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the Front Assist not to react or to do so too late: In the first few instants of driving after switching on the ignition, due to the systems initial auto-calibration. During this period, a status icon Fig. 259is displayed. If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- aged. If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. On taking tight bends or complex paths.

276

Driver assistance systems

Pressing the accelerator all the way down. If the ASR has been disconnected or the ESC activated in Sport mode page 303. If the ESC is controlling. If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged. If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works. If the vehicle is reversing. In case of snow or heavy rain. In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- bikes. Misaligned vehicles. Vehicles crossing the other's path. Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- tion. Loads and accessories of other vehicles that protrude over the sides, backwards or over the top.

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con- trol*

Introduction

Fig. 260 Related video

Fig. 261 Detection area.

The ACC is an extension of the vehicles cruise control function (GRA) .

It allows the driver to set a cruise speed be- tween 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph), and select the desired distance from the previous in front.

The ACC adapts the cruising speed of the vehicle, keeping a safe distance away from the vehicle in front, if there is one, depending on speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, the ACC reduces speed until it is the same as that of the vehicle ahead and maintains the set distance between the vehicles. If the vehi- cle ahead accelerates, the ACC also accel- erates the vehicle, going no higher than the programmed target speed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it stops.

The distance programmed should be in- creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. In other words, in certain cir- cumstances the driver will have to adjust the speed and the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen will warn you to intervene by applying the brake and a warning tone will be heard page 278.

WARNING The ACCs technology cannot overcome the system's inherent limitations or change

277

Driving

the laws of physics. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious acci- dents and injuries. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not use ACC in poor visibility, or on roads that are steep, with lots of curves or slippery. Never use ACC when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de- signed for use on paved roads only. ACC does not react when approaching a fixed obstacle, such as the end of a traffic jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop- ped at the traffic lights. The ACC only reacts to people if a pe- destrian monitoring system is available. The system does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or approaching head-on down the same lane. If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi- ciently, brake the vehicle immediately. If you are driving with a spare wheel fit- ted, the ACC system could automatically switch off. Switch off the system when starting off. If the vehicle continues to move involun- tarily after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle.

If the instrument panel screen displays a driver intervention prompt, adjust the dis- tance. The driver should be ready to accelerate or brake at all times.

Note If the ACC does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose. Maximum speed with the ACC activated is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph). When the ACC is switched on, strange noises may be heard during braking, caused by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument panel display and control lamps

The speed reduction by the ACC to maintain the distance from the vehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.

ACC is not currently availablea).

While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engine and start it again. Check the area of the SEAT em- blem on the front Fig. 263. If it is still unavailable, refer to a specialised workshop to have the system inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in colour.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed remains constant.

If the symbol is white: the ACC is active.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad- justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac- tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

The lamp lights up green

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

278

Driver assistance systems

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Status display

Fig. 262 On the instrument panel display: ACC inactive (Standby). ACC active.

Indications on the display Fig. 262: Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac- tive and is not regulating your speed.

1

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is not active and is not regulating your dis- tance. Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active and is regulating your speed. Distance level 2 set by the driver. ACC is active and is regulating your dis- tance based on speed. Speed programmed with the ACC

Note When the ACC is connected, the indica- tions on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by warnings from other func- tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensors

Fig. 263 On the front behind the SEAT badge: radar sensors.

2

3

4

5

6

A radar sensor is fitted on the front, behind the SEAT badge Fig. 263.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired by dirt, or by environmental influences such as rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. The instrument panel displays the following message: ACC: No sensor vision! Clean the SEAT badge area .

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly, the ACC will become available. The message on the screen will switch off and the ACC may be reactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for example, in a closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re- paired or structural modifications are made to it, ACC operation may be affected. In this scenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

CAUTION If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

279

Driving

disconnect the ACC. This way you can avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. The sensor may not be adjusted correct- ly if it receives an impact. This may com- promise the system's efficacy or discon- nect it. Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose. Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- icer spray.

ACC operation

Fig. 264 On the left of the steering column: operating the ACC with the third lever.

Fig. 265 On the left of the steering column: operating the ACC with the third lever.

When the ACC is connected, the green con- trol lamp will light up on the instrument panel, and the programmed speed and ACC status will be displayed Fig. 262.

What ACC settings are possible? Connecting and activating the ACC page 280. Setting your speed page 280. Setting your distance page 281. Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC page 281. Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey page 281. Adjusting the driving profile page 281. Conditions in which the ACC does not re- act page 281.

Connecting and activating the ACC To connect and activate the ACC, the posi- tion of the gearbox lever, the vehicle speed and the position of the third level of the ACC must all be taken into account.

With manual transmission, the gear lever must be in any gear except first. With auto- matic transmission, the gear lever must be in position D or S. Speed must be higher than 30 km/h (18 mph) approx. To activate the ACC, move the third lever to position Fig. 264 1 . At this time, the ACC is not active and there is no program- med speed. Next, press button Fig. 265 B or move the lever to position Fig. 264 2 . At this moment the ACC is ac- tivated and the current speed and distance are programmed. The picture in the box will change to Active mode Fig. 262.

While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at a set speed and distance from the vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can be changed at any time.

Setting speed To set the speed, move the third lever up + or down to the desired speed Fig. 262 6 . The speed adjustment is made at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

280

Driver assistance systems

If you wish to increase speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position Fig. 264 2 , or to decrease it press button Fig. 265 B .

The set speed can be changed when the ve- hicle is stopped or during driving.

Setting your distance level To increase or reduce the distance, press button A to the right or left Fig. 265.

The instrument panel display modifies the se- lected distance Fig. 262 4 . There are 5 distance levels to choose from. SEAT recom- mends level 3. The set distance can be changed when the vehicle is stopped or while driving .

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC To disconnect the ACC move the lever to position (fixed) Fig. 264 0 . An ACC de- activated message appears and the func- tion is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just to switch it temporarily to inactive mode (Standby), move the third lever to position 3 or press the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey In wet road conditions, you should always set a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in front than when driving in dry conditions .

In the Easy Connect system, you can pre-se- lect the distance level when connecting the ACC to: Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very long using button > SETTINGS > Driver assistance page 89.

Changing the driving profile In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving profile selected can have an influence on the ACCs acceleration and braking behaviour page 262.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- haviour of the ACC can also be affected if any of the following drive profiles are selec- ted in the Easy Connect system:

Normal Sport Eco Convenience

In this case you must access the ACC set- tings using button > SETTINGS > Driver assistance > ACC page 89.

The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react: If the accelerator is pressed. If there is no gear engaged. If the ESC is controlling. If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged. If the vehicle is reversing. Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages ACC not available The system cannot continue to guarantee safe vehicle detection and is deactivated. The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: currently not available. No sensor vision This message is displayed if the radar sen- sor's visibility is impaired by leaves, snow, dense fog or dirt. Clean the SEAT badge Fig. 263.

ACC: currently not available. Gradient too steep The maximum road slope has been excee- ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be

281

Driving

guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on.

ACC: only available in D, S or M Select the D/S or M position on the selector lever.

ACC: parking brake applied The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is applied. The ACC is available once again after the parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available. In- tervention of stability control The indication is displayed when the elec- tronic stability control (ESC) intervenes. In this case, the ACC is automatically switched off.

ACC: Take action! The indication is displayed if, when the ve- hicle starts up on a hill with a slight slope, the vehicle rolls back even although the ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding with another vehicle.

ACC: speed limit The indication is displayed in vehicles with manual gearboxes if the current speed is too low for the ACC mode. The speed limiter switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2nd gear The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear (manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speed This indication is displayed if, when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driver does not shift up or down a gear in time, which means exceeding or not reaching the permit- ted RPM. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

ACC: clutch applied Vehicles with manual transmission: pressing the clutch pedal for longer exits cruise con- trol.

Door open Vehicles with automatic transmission: the ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle stationary and the door open.

WARNING There is a danger of rear collision when the distance to the vehicle in front is reduced and the speed difference between both ve- hicles is so great that a speed reduction by the ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brake immediately! The ACC may not be able to detect all situations properly. Stepping on the accelerator may cause the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver

braking will have priority over intervention by the speed control or adaptive cruise control. Always be ready to use the brakes! Observe country-specific provisions gov- erning obligatory minimum distances be- tween vehicles. It is dangerous to activate control and re- sume the programmed speed if the road, traffic or weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of accident!

Note The programmed speed is erased once the ignition or the ACC are switched off. When the traction control system (ASR) is deactivated during acceleration or else the ESC is activated in Sport* Mode ( page 89), the ACC switches off auto- matically. In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the engine switches off during the ACC stopping phase and restarts for moving off.

282

Driver assistance systems

Function to prevent overtaking on the right

Fig. 266 On the instrument panel display: ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The ACC has a function to prevent overtaking on the right.

If another vehicle is driving more slowly to the left of the vehicle, it is shown on the display Fig. 266.

The system brakes the vehicle to avoid over- taking on the right, and will avoid overtaking based on speed. The driver can interrupt the intervention of the ACC by pressing the ac- celerator. At low speeds the function is inac- tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in city traffic.

Deactivating the ACC temporarily in certain situations

In the following situations the ACC should be deactivated due to the system's limitations :

When overtaking, on closed curves or mountain roads, roundabouts, slip roads or roadwork sections, preventing the system from accelerating to reach the programmed speed. When going through a tunnel, as operation could be affected. When other vehicles are going slower in the left lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be overtaken on the right. In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi- cle in front may not be detected.

WARNING If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- tions described, serious accidents and inju- ries may occur. Always switch off the ACC in critical sit- uations.

Note If you do not switch off the ACC in the aforementioned situations, you may com- mit a legal offence.

Special driving recommendations

Fig. 267 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclist ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.

283

Driving

Fig. 268 Vehicle changing lanes. One vehicle turning and another stationary.

The ACC has certain limitations inherent to the system. Certain reactions, under certain circumstances, may be unexpected or come late from the driver's point of view. So pay at- tention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following situations require maximum at- tention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase (only with automatic transmission) After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin driving when the vehicle in front moves off .

Overtaking When the turn signal lights up before the ve- hicle starts to overtake, the ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically and thus reduces the distance from the vehicle in front.

When the vehicle moves to the overtaking lane, if the ACC does not detect another ve- hicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the programmed speed.

System acceleration can be interrupted at any time by pressing the brake or moving the third lever to position Fig. 264 3 .

Driving through a bend When entering or leaving some curves, the radar sensor may cease to sense the vehicle driving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane Fig. 267. The vehicle may brake unnecessarily or stop reacting to the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to intervene by accelerating or interrupting braking by applying the brake or pushing the third lever to position Fig. 264 3 .

Driving in tunnels When driving through tunnels the radar sen- sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehicles The radar sensor can only detect narrow ve- hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align- ment when they enter its range Fig. 267. In these cases, you should brake as necessa- ry.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso- ries Special loads and accessories of other vehi- cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or over the top may be out of the ACC's range. SEAT recommends disconnecting it.

Other vehicles changing lanes Vehicles changing lanes a short distance away from your own can only be detected when they are within range of the sensors. As a consequence, the ACC will take longer to react Fig. 268. Brake yourself as neces- sary.

Stationary vehicles The ACC does not detect stationary objects while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged vehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to it Fig. 268 . Brake yourself as necessary.

284

Driver assistance systems

Vehicles driving in the opposite direction and vehicles crossing your path The ACC does not react to vehicles ap- proaching from the opposite direction or ve- hicles crossing your path.

Metal objects Metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works, can confuse the radar sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radar sensor operates If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to heavy rain snow or mud, the ACC is deactiva- ted temporarily. A message will be displayed stating this. If necessary clean the SEAT badge Fig. 263.

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly, the ACC will become available. The message will turn off and the ACC may be reactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong radar reverse reflection, for example in a closed car park. SEAT recommends discon- necting it.

Trailer mode When driving with trailer the ACC controls less dynamically.

Overheated brakes If the brakes overheat, for example on long and steep descents, the ACC may be deacti- vated temporarily. A message will be dis- played stating this. In this case, adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

Cruise control may be reactivated once the brake temperature has dropped. The mes- sage will disappear. If the message ACC not available remains on for quite a long time it means that there is a fault. Contact a speci- alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

WARNING If you do not pay attention to the Press the brake message, the vehicle may move and crash into the vehicle ahead. Before driving off again, check that the road is clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob- stacles on the road. This could cause an accident and serious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

Lane Assist*

Introduction

Fig. 269 On the windscreen: field of vision of the Lane Assist system.

Using the camera located in the windscreen, the Lane Assist system detects the possible lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in- voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has detected, the system notifies the driver with a corrective steering movement. The purpose is not only to warn the driver, but also to keep the vehicle inside the lane. This movement can be over-regulated at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signals activated, given that the Lane Assist system understands that a lane change is required.

285

Driving

Control lamp

It lights up yellow

Lane Assist system active but not available. The system cannot accurately recognize the lane. See page 287, lane assist system not available (the control lamp is lit up in yellow)

It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

It lights up yellow

Error in the lane departure warning system. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.

Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Indications on the instrument panel display

Fig. 270 On the instrument panel display: Indi- cation on the Lane Assist system display (ex- ample 1).

Fig. 271 On the instrument panel display: Indi- cation on the Lane Assist system display (ex- ample 2).

Status display Fig. 270 : The system is active, but not available, either because the minimum speed has not been reached or because the lane lines are not recognised. Fig. 270 : The system is active and available, both lane lines are recognised. The steering angle is not being correc- ted at this moment.

286

Driver assistance systems

Fig. 271 Fig. 270 : The system is op- erational, the highlighted line 1 indi- cates that there was a risk of involuntari- ly crossing the lane line and that the steering is being adjusted to correct the angle. Fig. 271 : The two highlighted lines 1 and 2 light up simultaneously when both lane lines are recognised and the Lane Assist function is activated.

Operating mode

Steering wheel vibration The following situations can cause vibration in the steering wheel and require the driver to take active control of driving:

When the steering angle assist value re- quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is higher than the systems maximum operating value. If the system ceases to display the lane lines while assisting with steering.

Switching the Lane Assist system on or off Select the corresponding menu option us- ing the button for the driver assistance sys- tems page 86. OR: by using the Easy Connect system with button > SETTINGS > Driver assis- tance page 89.

Lane Assist with lane centring guide The Lane Centring Guide function is inten- ded to keep the vehicle in the centre of the lane.

If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly off centre in the lane, the system adapts to driver preferences.

The Lane Centring Guide function is ac- tivated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys- tem using the button > SETTINGS page 89.

Automatic deactivation: the Lane Assist sys- tem can be automatically deactivated if there is a system malfunction. The control lamp disappears.

Hands-Off Function In the absence of steering wheel activity the system alerts the driver with acoustic signals and a text message on the dash panel asking to actively take over the steering.

If the driver does not react to this, the system also alerts the driver with a little shaking mo- tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle has it, activates the Emergency Assist function page 290.

In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the adaptive lane guidance function will be disa- bled after the corresponding warnings to the driver.

The lane assist system is active but it is not available (the control lamp is lit up yellow) When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38 mph). When the Lane Assist system does not de- tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam- ple, in the event warnings indicating road works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections. When the radius of a curve is too small. When no road markings can be seen. When the distance to the next marking to too great. When the system does not detect any clear and active steering movement during a long period of time. Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic driving styles. If a turn signal is activated. With the stability control system (ESC) in Sport mode or switched off.

BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot As- sist)* The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat- ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions page 291. In this case, the Lane Assist function expands its functions in the following way:

If the driver tries to change lane and there is a vehicle in the blind spot:

287

Driving

The lamp flashes in the corresponding rear-view mirror even though the turn signal has not been activated. The steering wheel vibrates to warn the driver of the risk of collision. torque is applied to correct the steering and return the vehicle to its lane.

Switching off the Lane Assist system in the following situations Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, switch it off in the following situations:

When more attention is required of the driv- er When driving in a sporty style In unfavourable weather conditions On roads in poor condition In areas of road works

WARNING The intelligent technology in the Lane As- sist system cannot change the limits im- posed by the laws of physics and by the very nature of the system. Careless or un- controlled use of the Lane Assist system may cause accidents and injury. The sys- tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ness. Always adapt your speed and the dis- tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so it can be turned at any time. The Lane Assist system does not detect all road markings. The road surfaces, road structures or objects in poor condition can be incorrectly detected as road markings under certain circumstances by the Lane Assist system. In such situations, switch the Lane Assist system off immediately. Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary. Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings. When the area of vision of the camera becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane Assist system function can be affec- ted.

CAUTION In order to avoid influencing the operation of the system, the following points must be taken into account: Regularly clean the area of vision of the camera and keep it in a clean state, without snow or ice Fig. 269. Do not cover the area of vision of the camera. Check that the area of vision of the wind- screen camera is not damaged.

Note The lane departure warning system has been exclusively developed for driving on paved roads only. If the Lane Assist system does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it and contact a specialised workshop. If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Traffic Jam Assist

Description and operation

Fig. 272 Related video

Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the car within its lane and to move in convoy in case of traffic congestion or slow traffic.

Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of Lane Assist page 285 and combines Lane Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) page 277. Therefore, it is essential that you read these two chapters carefully

288

Driver assistance systems

and note the limitations of the systems and the information about them.

Operation of Traffic Jam Assist At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis- tance preset by the driver with respect to the vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane .

To do this, the system automatically controls the accelerator, brakes and steering, and slows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces- sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that has stopped. It automatically moves off again when the vehicle ahead moves.

Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never use it in city traffic.

Technical requirements for using Traffic Jam Assist Lane assist must be activated: button > SETTINGS > Driver assistance > Lane assist system page 89. Adaptive lane guidance must be activated: button > SETTINGS > Driver assis- tance > Lane assist system Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be connected and active page 280. The speed must be below 60 km/h (38 mph).

Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane Assist control light turns yellow) If any of the conditions mentioned on page 289, Technical requirements for us- ing Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met. If any of the conditions required for opera- tion of the Lane Assist are not met page 285. If any of the conditions necessary for the adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no longer fulfilled page 277.

Situations where traffic jam assist has to be disconnected Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic Jam Assist must always be switched off in the following situations:

When more attention is required by the driver. When driving in a very sporty style. In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case of snow or heavy rain. When driving on roads in poor condition. In sections with roadworks. In city journeys.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into Traffic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the

system. Accidents and severe injury may occur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negli- gently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- ditions. Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour- neys. Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is poor visibility, for example, in case of snow, ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slip- pery sections or flooded roads. Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or on roads where the surface is not firm. Traf- fic Jam Assist has been designed for use on paved roads only. Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peo- ple or animals or vehicles crossing your path or that approach you head-on down the same lane. If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce speed sufficiently, brake the vehicle imme- diately by applying the pedal. If the vehicle continues to move when you wish it to stop after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the pedal. If driver intervention is requested on the dash panel display, immediately resume control of the vehicle.

289

Driving

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time. The driver is always responsible for keeping the vehicle in its own lane. Always be prepared to take charge of driving (accelerating or braking) yourself.

Note If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter, stop using it and contact a specialised workshop. If the system is faulty, take it to a special- ised workshop and have it checked.

Emergency Assist

Description and operation

Emergency Assist detects whether there is in- activity by the driver and can automatically keep the car within the lane and stop it alto- gether if necessary. This way the system can actively help avoid an accident.

Emergency Assist is an additional function of Lane Assist page 285 and combines Lane Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) page 277. Therefore, it is essential that you read these two chapters carefully and note the limitations of the systems and the information about them.

Operation of Emergency Assist Emergency Assist detects when the driver ceases to perform any activity and repeated- ly requests that he/she regain active control of the vehicle, through the use of optical and acoustic warnings and by applying the brakes.

If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys- tem automatically takes over the accelerator, brakes and steering in order to brake the ve- hicle and keep it in its lane . When the emergency assistant is actively regulating, the hazard lights turn on page 123.

If the remaining braking distance is sufficient, if necessary the system slows down the vehi- cle until it stops completely and automati- cally switches on the electronic parking brake page 298.

Connecting and disconnecting Emergen- cy Assist The Emergency Assist is switched on auto- matically when the Lane Assist is switched on page 285.

Technical requirements for using the Emer- gency Assist The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be switched on page 277. The Lane Assist must be switched on page 285.

The selector lever must be in the D/S posi- tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate. The system must have detected a lane separation line on both sides of the vehicle Fig. 271.

The following conditions may cause the Emergency Assist not to react or to switch off automatically: If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves the steering wheel. If any of the conditions mentioned in page 290, Technical requirements for using the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled. If any of the conditions required for opera- tion of the Lane Assist are not met page 285. If any of the conditions necessary for the adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no longer fulfilled page 277.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the Emergency Assist cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it on- ly works within the limits of the system. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- ditions.

290

Driver assistance systems

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time. The Emergency Assist alone cannot al- ways avoid accidents or serious injuries. If the operation of the Emergency Assist is impaired, for example if the radar sensor of the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the Lane Assist camera are covered or have lost their settings, the system may inter- vene inopportunely in braking or in steer- ing. The Emergency Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane.

WARNING If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor- tunely, serious accidents and injuries may occur. If the Emergency Assist does not operate properly, switch off the Lane Assist page 285. Doing so will also switch off the Emergency Assist. Have the system checked by a special- ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Note Automatic interventions by the Emergen- cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted

by pressing the accelerator or brake or by moving the wheel. Hazard warning lights that come on auto- matically can be switched off by pressing the accelerator or the break, moving the steering wheel or pressing the hazard warning light switch. If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a complete stop. When the Emergency Assist is activated, it is only available again after the ignition has been switched off and back on again.

Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA)*

Introduction

Fig. 273 Related video

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect the traffic situation behind the vehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps the driver when backing out of a parallel parking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developed for driving on paved roads.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance (RCTA) included cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Accidents and severe injury may occur if the blind spot detection system or the rear cross traffic alert are used negli- gently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time. Pay attention to the control lamps that may come on in the external rear view mir- rors and on the instrument panel, and fol- low any instructions they may give. The blind spot assistant could react to any special constructions that might be present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high or irregular dividers. This may cause erro- neous warnings.

291

Driving

Never use the blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blind spot detector with rear cross traf- fic alert has been designed for use on paved roads. Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings. Never use the blind spot detector or the parking assistant if the radar sensors are dirty. The external rear view mirror control lamps may have limited functionality due to solar radiation.

CAUTION The radar sensors on the rear bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least possibly having its functionality diminished. In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of snow and ice and do not cover it. The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spot detector's functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used.

Note If the blind spot detector with parking as- sistant does not work as described in this

chapter, stop using it and contact a speci- alised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

It lights up

It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac- tivated and ready to operate.

It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi- cle in the blind spot.

Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in the direction of the detected vehicle .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist page 285, a warning to switch lanes will also ap- pear even though the turn signal has not been en- gaged (blind spot detector Plus).

The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approxi- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

If there are no indications from the control lamp in the external rear view mirror, this means that the blind spot detector has not detected any other vehicles in the area .

If the dipped beam is on, then the control lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be dimmed (night mode).

WARNING If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- sages. Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- responding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.

292

Driver assistance systems

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 274 In the exterior mirrors: blind spot de- tector indication.

Fig. 275 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor zones.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle Fig. 275. The system does this by measur- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The blind spot de- tector will not work at speeds of less than ap- prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti- cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to notify the driver.

Indication on the exterior mirror The control lamp (expanded view) provides an indication in the corresponding external mirror Fig. 274 regarding the traffic situa- tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex- ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to

the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or windows with tinted film, the indications of the external mirrors may not be seen clearly or correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensors The radar sensors are located on the left and right of the bumper and are not visible from the outside Fig. 275. The sensors monitor both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- hicle Fig. 276, Fig. 277. The range to the sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the width of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- tween two lanes, the indications may be in- correct. Furthermore, the system can detect vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if there are any), and can also detect station- ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an incorrect indication.

293

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 276 Schematic representation: Passing situation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi- cation from the blind spot detector in the left- hand external mirror.

Fig. 277 Schematic representation: Situa- tion of passing and then moving into the right- hand lane. Indication from the blind spot de- tector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will be displayed in the external mirror Fig. 276 (arrow) or Fig. 277 (arrow):

When being overtaken by another vehicle Fig. 276 . When passing another vehicle Fig. 277 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will be dis- played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon- er an indication will be displayed in the exter- nal mirror, because the blind spot detector takes into account the speed differential with other vehicles. Thus even though the distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indica- tion will appear sooner in some cases and later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the system In some situations the blind spot detector may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ly. E.g. in the following situations:

on tight bends; in the case of lanes with different widths; at the top of slopes; in adverse weather conditions;

294

Driver assistance systems

in the case of special constructions to the side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid- ers.

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

Fig. 278 Schematic representation of the rear cross traffic alert assistant: zone monitored around the vehicle while leaving a parking space.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensors on the rear bumper Fig. 275 to monitor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of a parallel parking space or as it is be- ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi- bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- cle Fig. 278, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on infotainment system display. This signal is dis- played in the form of a red strip at the back of the image of the vehicle on the infotainment system screen. This strip displays the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is approach- ing.1)

Automatic braking to reduce damages If the rear cross traffic alert detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehicle and the driver does not step on the brake, the system will engage the brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto- matically engaging the brakes to reduce any damage. The automatic intervention on the brakes takes place when driving in reverse at approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting that the vehicle is stationary, the system keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam- age, the system will not be able to automati- cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking by stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. The system should never be used in limi- ted visibility conditions or complicated traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing multiple lanes. Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- cle's surroundings, since the system often fails to detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians. The rear cross traffic alert itself will not brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system.

295

Driving

Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA) The blind spot detector with parking assistant can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistance systems menu on the dash panel display using the steering wheel con- trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi- function camera, it can also be accessed by means of the driver assistance systems key located on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu.

Blind spot Exit Assist

If the verification box on the control panel is checked , the functionality will be automat- ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op- erate, the indications in the external mirrors will turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automatically deactivated, it will only be possible to restart the system after turning the vehicle off and restarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spot detector (BSD) The radar sensors of the blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- cally deactivated when, among other rea- sons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently covered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice in front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display.

Trailer mode The Blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will be automatically deactivated and it will be impossible to activate them if the tow hitch is electrically connected to a trailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a message will appear on the instrument panel display indicating that the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva- ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you will have to reactivate them in the corre- sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, then the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer.

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low page 351 or fault in the brake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Electronic parking brake page 298. The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- leased.

It lights up green

Auto Hold function activated page 300.

It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn. Contact a specialised workshop immediately.

WARNING If the brake warning lamp does not go out or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there is a risk of an accident page 351, Brake fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain technical assistance.

296

Braking and parking

If the brake warning lamp lights up to- gether with the ABS lamp this could be due to an ABS fault. When this function fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi- cle may skid, with the danger of losing con- trol. Stop and seek technical assistance. If the lamp lights up, alone or accom- panied by a warning message on the in- strument panel display, please go immedi- ately to a specialised workshop to check the brake pads and to replace them if they are worn.

Information about the brakes

New brake pads For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum braking capacity, and need to be run in first. However, you can compen- sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by applying more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid overloading the brakes while running them in.

Wear The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a particular problem in urban traffic and short stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking force and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem- perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be produced when braking.

Wet roads or road salt In certain situations (for example, on driving through flooded areas, in severe downpours or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- tion could be delayed if the discs and pads are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipers activated, the brake pads will briefly touch the brake discs. This takes place, although unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals to improve the response time of the brakes when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the discs and pads can be removed by gently apply- ing the brakes a few times.

Corrosion There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a moderately high speed .

Fault in the brake system If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- member that you will have to apply more pressure on the brake pedal and allow for longer stopping distances.

Low brake fluid level Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.

Brake servo The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works only when the engine is running.

WARNING Any anomaly in the brake system can in- crease the braking distance, with the re- sulting risk of an accident. New brake pads and discs must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced

297

Driving

braking capacity may be offset by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. If you are driving on roads which have been salted, braking effectiveness may be decreased. Brakes can overheat if used excessively on slopes. Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and change down into a lower gear or range. Therefore, using the engine brake relieves the brakes. Gentle continuous braking causes the brakes to overheat and the braking dis- tance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately. Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake system only in a suitable traffic situa- tion. Do not put other road users in danger: there is risk of causing an accident. Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active. If the brake is subjected to high stresses, vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys- tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of the brakes. Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please read the relevant in- structions.

CAUTION Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not neces- sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re- sulting in longer stopping distances and greater wear. Before driving down a long, steep gradi- ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se- lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Note If the brake servo is out of action, for ex- ample when the car is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal to make up for the lack of servo assistance. If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac- cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not obstructed, other- wise the brakes can overheat.

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 279 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: electronic parking brake button

The electronic parking brake replaces the handbrake.

Applying the electronic parking brake The electronic parking brake can be activa- ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the ignition is switched off. Acti- vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi- cle.

Pull and hold the Fig. 279 button. The parking brake is activated when the control light of button Fig. 279 (arrow) is on and the red control lamp on the instru- ment panel is always on. Release the button.

298

Braking and parking

Disconnecting the electronic parking brake Switch the ignition on. Press the button Fig. 279. At the same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the engine is running, press the accelerator pedal slightly. The control lamp of button Fig. 279 (ar- row) and the red control lamp on the in- strument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park- ing brake upon moving off The electronic parking brake is automatically switched off when starting if, after the driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas- tened, any of the following situations take place:

In vehicles with automatic transmission: a gear range is engaged or the vehicle is switched to another one and the accelerator pedal is lightly pressed. In vehicles with manual transmission: the clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press- ed. To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are exceptions that allow the automatic parking brake to be released without the driver's seat belt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented from be- ing automatically released by continuously pulling up the Fig. 279 switch when starting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon- nected until the button is released. This can facilitate starting off when a heavy load is towed page 325.

Automatic activation of the electronic parking brake when exiting the vehicle in- correctly In vehicles with automatic transmission, the electronic parking brake is activated auto- matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly if:

The selector lever is in the D/S or R position or in the Tiptronic selector gate. AND: the vehicle is stationary. AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency brake function Only use the emergency brake function if you are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot brake .

Pull and hold the Fig. 279 button in this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At the same time, an acoustic warning can be heard.

To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.

WARNING The improper use of the electronic parking brake can cause accidents and serious in- jury. Never use the electronic parking brake to stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. Braking distances can be considerably lon- ger, since, under certain circumstances, only the rear wheels brake. Always use the foot brake. Never accelerate from the engine when a gear range or a gear is engaged and the engine is running. The vehicle could move, even if the electronic parking brake is acti- vated.

CAUTION To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally moving when parking it, first apply the electronic parking brake and then remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Note In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re- leasing the clutch and accelerating at the same time automatically disconnects the electronic parking brake. If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be possible to disconnect the electronic

299

Driving

parking brake. Use the jump-start page 47. When the electronic parking brake is ap- plied or released, noises may be heard. The system performs automatic and au- dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi- cle if some time elapses without the elec- tronic parking brake being used.

Auto Hold Function

Fig. 280 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: Auto Hold function button.

The control lamp on button Fig. 280 remains on while the Auto Hold function is connected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station- ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri- od of time with the engine running, for exam- ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at

traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit- tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au- tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling when stationary without pressing the brake pedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal has been released, the Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv- er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the accelerator pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv- ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake. The vehicle moves according to the slope of the road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con- ditions required by the Auto Hold function is impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's control light goes out Fig. 280. The elec- tronic parking brake connects automatically, if necessary, to park the vehicle safely .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle station- ary with the Auto Hold function The driver door must be closed. The driver's seat belt must be fastened. The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on and off Pulse button . The control lamp on the button goes out when the Auto Hold func- tion is switched off.

Automatically engaging and disengaging the Auto Hold function If the Auto Hold function was switched on with the button before disconnecting the igni- tion, the function will remain on after the igni- tion is re-connected.

If the Auto Hold function was not switched on, it will automatically remain off next time the ignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function connects automat- ically if the following conditions are met (all points must be met at the same time ):

The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake pedal on a flat surface or on a slope. The engine rotates correctly.

The Auto Hold function is automatically turned off if the following conditions are met:

If any of the conditions mentioned on page 300, Conditions for keeping the vehicle stationary with the Au- to Hold function are no longer met.

1.

2.

1.

300

Braking and parking

If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly is detected. If the engine is turned off or stalls. Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac- celerator are pressed at the same time. Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is pressed Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres has only minimal contact with the ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula- tion.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the Auto Hold function cannot defy the laws of physics; it only works within the lim- its of the system. The greater convenience provided by the Auto Hold function should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. Never leave the vehicle running and with the Auto Hold function switched on. The Auto Hold function cannot always keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down- hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on slippery or frozen surfaces.

Note Before entering a car wash, always switch off the Auto Hold function, because if the electronic parking brake is automatically connected, it may cause damage.

2.

3. 4.

5.

Stabilisation and brake as- sistance systems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by the system. The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the ABS fails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode page 303.

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when the ignition is switched on and should turn off af- ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces the tendency to skid and improves the stabili- ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC detects critical handling situations, such as vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle by braking individual wheels or by reducing the engine torque. The warning lamp will flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is intervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system (ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the traction control system (ASR), electronic dif- ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control (XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by changing the torque.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin is desirable page 303.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- der braking until the vehicle has reached a virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal pulsate while the ABS is working.

301

Driving

If the running gear or brake system is modi- fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- verely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) The brake assist system can reduce the re- quired braking distance. The braking force is automatically boosted if you press the brake pedal quickly in an emergency. You must keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR) In the event of wheelspin, the traction control system reduces the engine torque to match the amount of grip available. This helps the car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL) When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel and directs the power to the other driven wheel. This function is active up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve- hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- matically brake the towing vehicle within the limits of the system and mitigate the sway. Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available in all countries page 332.

Electronic engine torque management (XDS) When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re- ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque delivered to the inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This can cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this case the front axle, which results in under- steer or lengthening of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess driving torque of that wheel. This means that the requested trajectory is much more precise.

XDS works in combination with the ESC and is always active, even when ASR is disconnec- ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis- connected.

Multi-collision brake In an accident, the multi-collision brake can help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of skidding during the accident and causing other collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, side or rear accidents, when the airbag control unit records its activation level and the acci- dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam- aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on- board network

The following actions control automatic brak- ing during the accident:

When the driver presses the accelerator, the automatic braking does not take place. When the braking pressure through press- ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- tems braking pressure the vehicle will brake automatically. Multi-collision braking will not be available if ESC is malfunctioning.

302

Braking and parking

WARNING Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet ground can result in loss of vehicle control and serious injury to the driver and passen- gers. The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron- ic torque control system cannot exceed the limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al- ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery roads. If you notice the systems cutting in, you should reduce your speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not be encouraged to take risks by the presence of more safety sys- tems. If you do, an accident may occur. Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive fast, espe- cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and the electronic torque control sys- tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci- dents! Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- faces (for example, icy or snow-covered). Despite the control systems, the driven wheels could spin, affecting the stability of the vehicle: risk of accident!

Note The ABS and ASR will only operate cor- rectly if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to re- duce engine power when this is not desired. The regulating processes of the systems can make noises due to their operation. If the warning lamp or lights up, there could be a fault page 86. Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine, brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may affect the operation of the ABS, ASR and EDS.

Connecting and disconnecting the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started, and only works when the engine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR function should only be switched off in situations in which traction is insufficient.

Depending on the finishes and versions, there is the possibility of disconnecting only the ASR or activating the ESC in Sport mode.

Disconnecting and connecting the ASR The ASR can be disconnected and connec- ted using the Easy Connect system page 89. In vehicles with a driver informa- tion system* the corresponding indication will be displayed.

When the ASR is disconnected, the control warning light lights up on the instrument cluster.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in Sport mode In Sport mode, the ESC can be discon- nected and connected using the Easy Con- nect system page 89. In vehicles with a driver information system* the corresponding indication will be displayed.

When Sport mode is connected, the inter- ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle, and the anti-slip regulation (ASR1)) interven- tions are limited. In addition, the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel.

1) In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the ASR is dis- connected completely .

303

Driving

ESC in Offroad mode1)

Turn the Driving Experience button to select the Offroad mode and connect it page 263. The interventions of the ESC, as well as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt to irregular terrain.

In the following exceptional situations it may make sense to activate the Offroad mode to allow the wheels to spin:

When swinging the vehicle to get it un- stuck. Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces. When driving on rough terrain with much of the car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle articulation). Steep descents with braking on unpaved terrain.

For your safety we recommend that you turn off the Offroad mode when it is not absolute- ly necessary.

To disconnect the Offroad mode, select a different driving mode.

ESC in Snow mode1)

Turn the Driving Experience button to select the Snow mode and connect it. page 263 Traction control system (ASR)

interventions adjust to the adhesion of snowy roads.

To disconnect the Snow mode, select a dif- ferent driving mode.

WARNING The ESC Sport mode should be activated only when traffic conditions and the ability of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding! With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited to allow for a sporti- er drive. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could skid.

WARNING You should only activate the Offroad Mode or disable the ASR if the experience of the driver and traffic conditions allow it. Dan- ger of skidding! With the Offroad mode activated, the stabilisation function is limited. In particu- lar, if the road is too smooth and slippery, the driving wheels could spin and the vehi- cle could skid.

Note If the ASR is disconnected or the Sport mode is selected, cruise control* will be switched off.

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require- ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park- ing the vehicle:

Park the vehicle on a suitable surface . Connect the electronic parking brake page 298. For an automatic gearbox, move the selec- tor lever to position P. Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal. When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with you.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines Before switching off the engine, rotate the steering wheel so that if the vehicle should move, it will be held by the kerb.

1) Only for 4Drive models. 304

Help with parking and manoeuvring

On slopes, turn the front wheels so that they are against the edge of the kerb. Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of the road.

WARNING Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel or flammable materials. Do not leave passengers inside a closed vehicle, they may not be able to open doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the possibility of a rescue. Children should not be left alone in the vehicle. They could tamper with the hand- brake or the gears, which could cause the vehicle to move without control. Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Note In vehicles with automatic transmission, the key can only be removed from the ignition when the lever is in position P.

Help with parking and ma- noeuvring

Assisted parking system (Park Assist)*

Introduction

Fig. 281 Related video

The Park Assist system is an additional ParkPilot function page 312 and helps the driver to:

find a suitable parking space, select a parking mode, park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- dicular and parallel spaces, park driving forwards in suitable perpendic- ular spaces, exit a parking space driving forwards from a parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- tory infotainment system, the front, rear and

side areas are represented, and the position of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver .

WARNING The technology used in the park assist sys- tem involves a series of limitations inherent in the actual system and in the use of ultra- sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at least correctly, these objects or people wearing such clothes. Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- ted by external sound sources. In certain circumstances this may prevent them from detecting people or objects. The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not reg- istered. Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the ultrasound sensors do not

305

Driving

detect small children, animals or certain objects in all situations.

WARNING Quick turns of the steering wheel when parking or exiting a parking space with Park Assist can cause serious injury. Do not hold the steering wheel during manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space until the system requests it. Doing so disa- bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trail- er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle. Retrofitting of certain accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter- fere with the operation of the Park Assist system and cause damage. The Park Assist system uses as a refer- ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not damaged while parking. If necessa- ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of

a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not apply it directly unless very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm. A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the reg- istration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause: false detections, loss of sensor visibility. cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking. If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- aged, the area corresponding to that group of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot be activated until the fault is cor- rected. However, you can still use the sen- sors of the other bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a spe- cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Note In order to guarantee good system oper- ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other ob- jects. Certain sources of noise, such as rough asphalt or paving stones and the noise of

other vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- ings. In order to become familiar with the sys- tem and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice operating the Park Assist system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

Description of the parking assist system

Fig. 282 In the upper part of the centre con- sole: button to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist system are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, the button Fig. 282 to switch the system on and off and the mes- sages on the instrument panel display.

306

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Prerequisites for parking The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 303. Speed when passing next to the parking space (parallel parking): do not exceed ap- prox. 40 km/h (25 mph). Speed when passing next to the parking space (angle parking): do not exceed approx. 20 km/h (12 mph). Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me- tres when driving past the parking space. Space length (parallel parking): vehicle length + 0.8 meters. Space width (angle parking): vehicle width + 0.8 meters. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when parking.

Requirements for leaving the parking space (only for parallel parking) The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 303. Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in- terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space in any of the following cases:

Press the button. The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h (4 mph). The driver takes hold of the steering wheel. The parking manoeuvre does not end within 6 minutes from the activation of automatic steering. There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable). ASR is switched off. ASR or ESC intervene with regulation. The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that none of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.

Special characteristics The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. For exam- ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, a brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to

change between forward and reverse gears (depending on the case). In successive ma- noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to change gears, at the latest, when the contin- uous audible signal is given (object present at a distance of 30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in- strument panel also displays the symbol . Keep the brake pedal depressed while the symbol remains on the dash panel display to turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This way, the system will require fewer manoeu- vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer mode The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket page 325 is electrically connected to a trailer.

After changing a wheel If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correct- ly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place during driving. Making turns slow- ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) for a few minutes may contribute to this adaptation process in Introduction on page 305.

307

Driving

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 283 On the instrument panel display: view of the parking assist system with reduced view.

Fig. 284 On the instrument panel display: in- dication of parking modes.

Parking assist has the following 3 parking modes:

Reverse parallel parking. Reverse angle parking. Forward angle parking.

Selecting a parking mode after passing in front of the space After activating the Park Assist system and af- ter detecting a parking space, the display on the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the parking mode automatically. The selected mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- play Fig. 283. The reduced display of oth- er possible parking modes is also shown Fig. 284. If the mode selected by the sys- tem does not correspond to the desired mode, you can select another mode by pressing the button Fig. 282.

The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 307. Press the button. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display and the reduced display shows another parking mode it can be changed to. Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- wards the side of the road where you are parking. The instrument panel displays the side corresponding to the road. By default, if

the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in the direction of traffic. If necessary, press the button again to change to the next parking mode. Once you have switched to all possible parking modes, if the button is pressed again, the system switches off. Press the button again to switch the sys- tem back on. Follow the instructions displayed on the in- strument panel while paying attention to traf- fic and drive the vehicle past the parking space.

Special case of perpendicular parking space to park forwards without driving past first The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 307. Drive forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle. Press the button once. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display without reduced display. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 306.

308

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 285 On the instrument panel display: paral- lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park- ing position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 286 On the instrument panel display: angle parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.

Message to move forwards Your vehicle Parked vehicle Parking space detected Message to park Message to press the brake pedal Progress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

The necessary conditions have to be met to park with Park Assist page 307 and the parking mode must be selected page 308.

Parking Look at the display on the instrument panel to see if the space has been detected as ap- propriate and if the correct position for park- ing has been reached Fig. 285

or Fig. 286 . The space is considered appropriate if the display on the instrument panel shows the message to park 5 . Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engage the reverse gear. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 306.

309

Driving

Please note the following message: Auto- matic steering enabled. Pay atten- tion to your surroundings. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accel- erating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). During the parking manoeuvre, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake. Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to move forward appears on the instrument panel display Fig. 285 or Fig. 286 ; OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish- ed message appears on the instrument panel display. The progress bar 7 indicates the distance to cover page 310. Press the brake pedal until the parking as- sist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: until the symbol goes out on the instrument panel screen. Select first gear. Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it centres it in the space Fig. 285 or Fig. 286 . For best results, wait at the end of each manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has finished turning the steering wheel. The park- ing manoeuvre ends when a corresponding

message is displayed on the instrument pan- el and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.

Progress bars The progress bar Fig. 285 7 and Fig. 286 7 on the screen of the instrument panel displays the relative distance to be covered. The greater the distance, the fuller the progress bar. When driving forward, the content of the pro- gress bar decreases upwards, and when re- versing, it decreases downwards.

Note If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely during parking, the result may not be the best.

Leaving a parking space with the parking assist system (only for par- allel parking)

Fig. 287 On the instrument panel display: exit a parallel parking space.

Parked vehicle Your vehicle in reverse gear Progress bar to indicate the distance left to cover Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking) The necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist have to be met page 307.

Press the button Fig. 282. A control lamp on the button lights up when the sys- tem is switched on.

1

2

3

4

310

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- wards the road you will enter when exiting the parking space. Select reverse gear. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 306. Please note the fol- lowing message: Automatic steering en- abled. Pay attention to your sur- roundings. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting the parking space, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa- ry, change gears and brake. Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument panel display shows the forward indication. The progress bar Fig. 287 3 indicates the distance to cover page 310. Press the brake pedal until the parking as- sist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the symbol goes out on the instrument panel screen. Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it can exit the space.

The vehicle can exit the space when a cor- responding message is displayed on the in- strument panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the steering with the turning angle set by the Park Assist system. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the park- ing space.

Automatic operation of the brakes by the parking assist system

Park Assist helps the driver by automatically braking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking in time .

Automatic braking intervention to avoid exceeding the speed limit To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving a parking space, the brakes may activate au- tomatically. After automatically activating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a parking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activated once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- ing space. If the speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damages Depending on certain conditions, the Park Assist system can automatically brake the vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly actioning and holding down the brake ped- al . Following this the driver must press the brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reduce damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- ishing.

WARNING The automatic braking intervention by Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The sys- tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ness. The Park Assist system is subject to cer- tain limitations inherent to the system. In certain situations, the automatic braking intervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all. Always be ready to use the brakes your- self! The automatic braking intervention will end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

311

Driving

Parking aid parking and ma- noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

These assist systems help you when parking and manoeuvring:

Park assist plus. It is an assistant that gives a visual and audio warning of obstacles de- tected in front and behind the vehicle page 313.

Rear parking aid. An audio and visual as- sistant that warns of obstacles located be- hind the vehicle page 317.

WARNING Always pay attention, by looking directly, to traffic and the area around the vehicle. Assistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. Responsibility always lies with the driver. The sensors have blind spots in which ob- stacles and people are not detected. Pay special attention to children and animals. Always keep visual control of the sur- roundings: use the mirrors for additional help.

CAUTION Parking distance warning system functions can be affected by different factors that can cause damage: Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects: Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees. Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall. Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- der snow.

Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- sors' signals. The system cannot detect these objects or people wearing such clothes correctly. Sensor signals may be affected by exter- nal sound sources. This may prevent them from detecting people or objects. If the system warns you of the proximity of a low obstacle, please note that after being detected by the system, the obstacle in question may disappear from the meas- urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos- er, and the system will no longer warn of its presence. In certain circumstances, ob- jects such as high kerbs that could damage the underside of the vehicle are not detec- ted.

If the parking distance warning system is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- ble damage. Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can modify the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the parking aid function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop. A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a cured or deformed number plate can cause false detections or a loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note The display on the Easy Connect screen shows a slight time delay. In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area; rough or cobbled surfaces or with long

grass, external ultrasound sources, such as

other vehicles equipped with ultra- sound systems,

downpours, heavy snow, hail or dense exhaust gases,

if the number plate is not perfectly se- cured to the bumper surface,

in gradient changes.

312

Help with parking and manoeuvring

In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist. We recommend that you practice park- ing in an area without traffic. The volume and tone of the signals and indications can be changed page 317. Please observe information on towing a trailer page 318.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 288 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen.

Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving visual and audio warnings about obstacles detected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible signals and in the Easy Connect system Fig. 288.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi- ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve- hicle or behind it by choosing different sounds.

The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:

1.20 mA

1.60 m 0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop!

If separation is maintained, the warning vol- ume reduces after about 4 seconds.

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve- hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me- tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing areas are screened and obstacles at the sides of the vehicle are displayed C .

Special features of ParkPilot with Area View In the following situations the screened area on the side of the vehicle is automatically hid- den:

When a vehicle door is opened. When the ASR is switched off. When there is ASR or ESC regulation. If the vehicle remains stationary for more than approximately 3 minutes.

B

C

313

Driving

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 289 Centre console: parking aid button (depending on the version).

Manually connecting and disconnecting the parking aid Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- play (the audible sounds remain active) Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system. OR press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid Select reverse gear. OR: If you drive forward at a speed of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter an obstacle, it is detected when it is approx. less than 95 cm. away. If the automatic connec- tion is activated, a reduced display is shown Fig. 290.

OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid Move the selector lever to position P. OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view Select reverse gear. OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera RVC) Select reverse gear. OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up when the sys- tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 290 Miniature indication of automatic ac- tivation.

When the parking aid plus connects auto- matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the segments will appear on the left of the dis- play Fig. 290.

It only operates every time the speed is re- duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first time.

If it is switched off using the button, one of the following actions must be taken for it to reactivate automatically:

Switch off the ignition and switch it on again. OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) approx. OR: move the lever into position P and pack again.

314

Help with parking and manoeuvring

OR: switch the automatic activation on and off in the Easy Connect system.

The automatic activation of the parking aid can be switched on and off in the Easy Con- nect system page 89:

Switch the ignition on. Select: infotainment button > SETTINGS > Parking and manoeuvring. Select Automatic activation. If the box is checked , the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible sound warning will only be given when obstacles in front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap- prox.

CAUTION The automatic connection of the Parking Aid only works when you are driving slowly. If driving style is not adapted to the circum- stances, an accident and serious injury or damage may be caused.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 291 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the opposite direction of travel. They are also displayed when the electronic park- ing brake is activated.

the obstacles lie on the vehicles path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away.

obstacles are less than ap- prox. 30 cm away.

With the Media System Plus, Navi System or Navi System Plus, yellow lines show the ex- pected trajectory based on turns of the steer- ing wheel.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

Red segments:

If an obstacle is located in the vehicles way, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

When the penultimate segment is displayed, the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are repre- sented in red, including those out of the path. Stop the vehicle! in Introduction on page 312, in Introduction on page 312 !

In the event the car is equipped with the Top View Camera system, Park Assist visual guid- ance will appear in accordance with the view selected in the Top View Camera system.

Setting the indications and audio signals

The indications and audio signal settings are in Easy Connect* page 89.

Automatic activation on off.

Front volume* Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness* Sound tone in the front area.

315

Driving

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness* Sound tone in the rear area.

Adjust volume When the parking aid is switched on, the vol- ume of the audio source will be reduced, de- pending on the selected option.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a fault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area A are displayed Fig. 288. If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area B are displayed. Symbol is displayed.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Trailer mode

Fig. 292 Parking assist display on the screen with trailer attached.

On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch, when the trailer is connected, the rear sen- sors will not activate when reverse gear is en- gaged or button is pressed. Therefore, any objects behind or to the side of the vehicle will not be indicated on the screen and no audio signals will sound.

The screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Manoeuvre braking function* 3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency braking function is used to minimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring function activates emergency braking when it detects an obstacle in the vehicles path that could cause a collision, driving forwards or in reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is activated automatically. For the system to operate, manoeuvring speed must be be- tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6 mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and 10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking while manoeuvring function will be inactive in the same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once the gear is changed, or the selector levers position is changed, the function will be ac- tive again. The Parking Aids limitations apply.

The manoeuvre braking function is set in the Easy Connect system with button > SET- TINGS > Parking and manoeuvring.

on permits the use of the braking while manoeuvring function. off does not permit the use of the braking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency braking When the function is deactivated with the Manoeuvre braking button that appears on

316

Help with parking and manoeuvring

the Parking assist screen of the Easy Con- nect system. Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or bonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible and visual assistant that warns of obstacles located be- hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rear bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings and visually on the Easy Connect system.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, the rear parking aid will issue an audible warning about objects near the rear of the vehicle, and the Top View Camera* image will be available on the Easy Connect screen, giving a real image of the objects around the car.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the like, as this could affect the system's op- eration. Cleaning instructions page 371.

The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is:

0.60 mSide area:

1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop! in Introduction on page 312, in Introduction on page 312 !

If the separation is maintained, the warning volume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection Place the selector level in position P, N or D (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain the system active for approximately 8 sec- onds before switching off. During that time, Parking assist will switch off if:

The selector lever is moved to position P. OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, rear parking aid will be automatically deactivated when disengaging reverse gear.

Central area: Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- play (the audible sounds remain active) Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system. OR press the BACK function button.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button. If you have the Top View Camera* system installed, you can- not use the temporary suppression of sound in Parking Aid.

Change from reduced view to full view Select reverse gear. OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist (Rear View Camera RVC) click on the car icon of the reduced display.

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera RVC) Select reverse gear. OR: press the RVC function button.

Setting the indications and audio signals The indications and audio signal settings are in Easy Connect* page 89.

Rear volume*: volume in the rear area. Rear sound settings/treble*: sound tone in the rear area.

317

Driving

Lower volume: when the parking aid is switched on, the volume of the audio source will be reduced, depending on the selected option.

Error messages If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a fault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the parking aid is connected.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the Easy Connect display.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing device In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is connected, the parking aid will not be activa- ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 293 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima- ted with the help of the segments at the rear of the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the opposite direction of travel. They are also displayed when the electronic park- ing brake is activated.

the obstacles lie on the vehicles path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away.

obstacles are less than ap- prox. 30 cm away.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

Red segments:

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta- cles are represented in red (including those out of the path). Do not continue to reverse in Introduction on page 312, in In- troduction on page 312!

If you are equipped with the Top View Camera* Segments are not displayed when the vehicle is equipped with Top View Camera*.

The Parking Aid system will issue an audible warning for objects that are near the rear of the vehicle, and the Top View Camera* im- age will be available on the screen, giving a real image of the objects around the car.

318

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Peripheral view system (Top View Camera)*

Introduction

Fig. 294 Related video

Using 4 cameras, the system generates a representation that is shown on the infotain- ment system display. The cameras are loca- ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors and the rear lid.

The functions and representations of the Area View system may vary depending on whether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.

WARNING The image from the cameras does not make it possible to calculate the distance to the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) precisely, so using them could cause seri- ous accidents and injury. The camera lenses augment and distort the visual field and the objects on the screen are seen differently and imprecise- ly.

Certain objects may not be shown or may not be shown very clearly, for example, posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu- tion or if light conditions are insufficient. The cameras have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered. The camera lens must be kept free, with- out snow or ice, and should not be covered.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the Top View Camera* system cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. The greater convenience provi- ded by the Area View system should never tempt you to take any risk that may com- promise safety. If used negligently or invol- untarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replace- ment for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the cameras do not capture small children, animals and certain objects in all situations. The use of a number plate may interfere in the views shown on the screen, since the cameras' field of vision may be reduced.

The system will probably be unable to represent all areas clearly.

CAUTION The camera images are only two-dimen- sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, ob- jects that jut out or holes on the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all. In certain circumstances, the camera does not capture objects such as beams, fences, posts or thin trees, which could damage the vehicle. The system displays the auxiliary lines and boxes regardless of the vehicle's envi- ronment, no objects are detected. The driv- er is responsible for determining that the vehicle will fit in the parking space.

CAUTION In order to guarantee good system opera- tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhe- sives or other objects. Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lenses. Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Doing so could damage the lenses.

319

Driving

Area View system

Fig. 295 Viewing the top view system: aerial view.

There are four different views to choose from:

Front camera area Right camera area Rear camera area Left camera area

Function buttons Fig. 295: Exit the current display.

Adjust the display: bright, contrast and colour. Three-dimensional views

Depending on the equipment: connect- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot sound.

A

B

C

D

The aerial view is generated by combining the images from all the cameras Fig. 295. The aerial view can be selected by pressing the vehicle in the area.

Select the corresponding view by pressing the different areas Fig. 295 A to D of the aerial view or the reduced aerial view.

Conditions necessary for the use of the Area View system The doors and the rear lid must be closed. The image must be reliable and clear. For this reason, for example, the camera lens must be clean. The area around the vehicle must be clear- ly and totally visible. The area for parking or manoeuvring should be a flat surface. The vehicle should not be loaded very heavily at the rear. The driver must be used to the system. There should be no damage to the vehicle in the camera area. If the position or installa- tion angle of the cameras have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the system should be checked by a specialised workshop.

Special characteristics The images on the area view system cameras are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of

spatial depth, it is difficult or impossible to make out on-screen any holes there may be on the ground, objects jutting out from the ground or parts protruding from other vehi- cles.

Situations in which the objects or other vehi- cles appear to be further away or closer than they really are:

On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope. On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane. If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. If the vehicle approaches protruding ob- jects. These objects may be outside the cam- eras' angle of visibility.

Trailer mode The Area View system conceals, in the rear camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines when the factory-fitted towing bracket is connected electrically to a trailer page 325.

Note In order to become familiar with the system and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice handling the Area View sys- tem in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

320

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Connecting and disconnecting

Fig. 296 Centre console: button for activat- ing/deactivating the Area View system manual- ly in combination with the parking aid system () or else with the rear ParkPilot system ().

Manual activation Press button once Fig. 296.

The infotainment system screen displays the aerial view Fig. 295. If you press the button when driving at over 15 km/h (9 mph), the image will not be displayed.

Automatic activation Select reverse gear. OR: The vehicle moves backwards.

The view of the image of the vehicle's rear camera is shown in parallel parking mode with the reduced aerial view.

Manual disconnection Press button again Fig. 296.

OR: press a button on the factory-equip- ped infotainment system, for example the button. OR: press the function button.

Automatic off Drive forwards at over 15 km/h (9 mph) ap- proximately. OR: switch off the ignition. The Area View system menu disappears immediately.

Views of the peripheral vision sys- tem (modes)

Fig. 297 Display on the top view system screen: Front camera: off-road view. Rear camera: off-road view.

Depending on the equipment: connect- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot sound. Showing the reduced display.

Hiding the reduced display.

Exiting the Area View system screen:

321

Driving

Adjust the display: bright, contrast and colour.

The selected view is displayed on the right side of the screen. The reduced aerial view shown on the right side displays the view framed in yellow. In addition, the right margin of the screen displays the menu options pos- sible and the views (the so-called modes) of the camera in question. The active view (mode) at the time is highlighted.

The reduced aerial view can be hidden by pressing the symbol to thus display the se- lected view full-screen.

The red lines are indicate a distance of ap- prox. 40 cm away from the vehicle.

Aerial views (bird's eye view) Main mode:

The vehicle and its immediate vicinity seen from above are shown. Depending on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path may also be displayed.

Three-dimensional views: The vehicle and its vicinity seen from above are shown. The vehicle and its vicinity seen from above are shown obliquely.

The vehicle and its vicinity seen obli- quely are shown.

Swipe the infotainment system display with your finger in the direction of the arrows to change the angle of vision in the three-di- mensional views of the vehicle and its vicinity.

Front camera views (front view) Cross traffic. This visualization helps to monitor traffic to the left, front and right of the vehicle and can be used, for ex- ample, when exiting garages or narrow exits. Angle parking. The area in front of the vehicle is shown. Orientation lines are shown to give guidance. Off-road. The area directly in front of the vehicle seen from above is shown. For example, on a slope, in order to see the area directly in front of the vehicle.

Side camera views (side view) Right and left sides. The areas located directly to the side of the vehicle seen from above are represented in order to navigate possible obstacles more pre- cisely.

The drivers or passenger's side seen from above is shown. This makes it

possible to visualize the blind spots along the vehicle.

Rear camera views (rear view) Angle parking. The area behind the vehi- cle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shown to give guidance.

Parallel parking. The area directly be- hind the vehicle is shown. The coloured

boxes and auxiliary lines serve as orien- tation. Off-road or hitching a trailer function. The vehicle's rear is presented. Green and red semicircular auxiliary lines are displayed in vehicles with a fac- tory-fitted towing bracket. The auxiliary lines indicate the distance from the tow- ing bracket. The distance between the auxiliary lines (green and red) is approx. 30 cm The orange auxiliary line indi- cates, according to how the steering wheel is turned, the precalculated direc- tion of the towed device. Cross traffic. This visualization helps to monitor traffic to the left, front and right of the vehicle and can be used, for ex- ample, when exiting garages or narrow exits.

322

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING The reverse assist does not make it possi- ble to precisely calculate the distance from obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- tem's own limits, hence its negligent use may cause serious accidents and injuries if used without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her surroundings at all times to ensure safe driving. The camera lens expands and distorts the field of view and displays the objects on the screen in a way that is different from reality. Distance perception is also distor- ted. Due to the screen resolution or light con- ditions, some items may be blurry or not displayed at all. Take care with thin posts, fences, railings or trees that might not be seen on the screen and could damage the vehicle. The reverse assist has blind spots where it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and snow, and do not cover it. The system is not a replacement for driv- er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-

noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. The images are only two-dimensional. Protruding objects or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all. Vehicle load modifies the representation of the guide lines Fig. 299. The width rep- resented by the lines decreases with vehi- cle load. Pay special attention to the sur- roundings when the inside of the vehicle of the luggage compartment are loaded. In the following situations, objects or oth- er vehicles appear to be further away or closer than they actually are. Pay special attention: If moving from a flat surface to a slope

and vice-versa. If the vehicle is heavily loaded. When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface or that protrude from it. These objects may be outside the camera angle when reversing.

Note It is important to take great care and pay special attention if the driver is not familiar with the system.

Reverse assist will not be available if the rear lid is open.

Usage instructions

Fig. 298 In the rear lid handle: location of the reverse assist camera.

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- sists the driver with reverse parking or ma- noeuvring Fig. 298.

The camera image is viewed together with orientation lines projected on the Infotain- ment system screen. Part of the bumper can be seen at the bottom, which can be used by the driver as a reference point.

Rear assist settings Rear assist offers the user the possibility to change the image's brightness, contrast and colour settings.

323

Driving

To change these settings:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place without switching off the ignition or the infotainment system. Apply the parking brake. Select reverse gear. Press the function button displayed on the screen. Make the desired adjustments on the menu by pressing the /+ function buttons or by moving the scroll button.

Requirements for parking and manoeu- vring with the rear assist The system should not be used in the follow- ing cases:

If the image displayed is not very reliable or is distorted, or if the lens is dirty. If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete. If the vehicle is heavily loaded. If the position of the camera has changed after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- ommends practising in a place without too much traffic or in a car park when there are good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow and ice:

Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- based glass cleaning product and clean the lens with a dry cloth. Remove snow using a small brush. Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lens. Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lens, as it could be damaged.

Parking and manoeuvring with re- verse assist

Fig. 299 Display on the Easy Connect system screen: guide lines.

Meaning of the orientation lines Fig. 299 Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle (approximately in its total width) on the road. End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behind the vehicle on the road. Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind the vehicle on the road. Horizontal red line: a safe distance of approx. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the road.

Switching the system on and off Reverse assist is connected by a contact when engaging reverse gear.

1

2

3

4

324

Towing bracket device*

The system switches off 8 seconds after disengaging reverse gear and immediately after removing the contact. The camera will stop transmitting images above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- verse engaged.

In combination with the parking aid plus sys- tem page 313, the camera image will no longer be displayed when reverse gear is dis- engaged, and the system will display the op- tical information provided by the parking aid system.

It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im- age:

By pressing one of the Infotainment system buttons on the display. OR: by clicking on the miniature vehicle shown on the screen.

If you wish to display the rear assist image again:

Disengage and re-engage reverse gear. OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Parking manoeuvre Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se- lect reverse gear.

Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel so that the side lines lead towards the park- ing space. Guide the vehicle into the parking space so that the side lines run parallel to it.

Towing bracket device*

Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula- tions about driving with a trailer and the use of a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily for carrying people, although it can also be used to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding technical equipment. This additional load has an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption and vehicle performance and in some cases can reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force from the vehicle, and thus more concentration from the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit- ted on the coupling device The maximum technically permitted vertical load of the tow bar on the hitch of the towing device is 88 kg.

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when re- verse gear is engaged.

325

Driving

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the Start-Stop system operates as normal. No special characteristics need to be taken into account.

If the system does not recognise the trailer or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- nected by pressing the corresponding button in the lower part of the centre console before driving with the trailer, and it should remain off for the rest of the journey .

Vehicles with driving profile selection If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- ded. You are advised to select another of the available driving profiles before beginning to drive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar load Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en- gine performance and the ability to climb slopes, the tow load decreases proportional- ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-

bination must be reduced by 10% for every 1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum authorised drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim- it.

WARNING Never use the trailer to transport people, since it would put their life in danger and is also prohibited.

WARNING Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents. Only use the towing bracket if it is in a perfect state of repair and is properly se- cured. Never modify or repair the towing bracket in any way. In order to reduce the danger of injury in the event of rear-end collisions and to avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists when parking the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hook when you are not using a trail- er. Never fit a towing bracket with weight distribution or load compensation. The vehicle has not been designed for this type of towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail and the trailer could be released from the vehicle.

WARNING Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects can affect driving properties and even cause an accident. Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Trailers with a high centre of gravity are more likely to overturn than those with a low one. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir- cumstances). This also applies in countries where driving at higher speeds is permit- ted. Take into account the speed limit for vehicles with trailers in the corresponding country, as it could be less than the speed limit for vehicles without a trailer. Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNING If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop

326

Towing bracket device*

system must be disconnected manually whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise the brake system could be damaged and could consequently cause a serious acci- dent or injury. Always disconnect the Start-Stop system manually when using a towing bracket that has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm page 97. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's first 1000 km page 264. SEAT recommends that, if possible, the tow hook be removed or covered when it is not going to be used. In the event of a rear- end collision, the damage to the vehicle could be greater if the tow hook is fitted. Some retrofitted towing brackets cover the rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing eye should not be used for tow- starting or for towing other vehicles. For this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit- ted with a towing bracket, always keep the tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-fitted with a towing bracket meet all the technical and legal re- quirements for driving with a trailer.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for the maximum authorised load of the trailer that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer and must be properly secured to the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for this vehicle. Always check and take into ac- count the towing bracket manufacturer's in- structions. Never fit a towing bracket with weight distribution or load compensation.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumper Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to the area where the bumper is mounted. The towing bracket should not impair the bum- per's function. Do not make modifications or repairs to the exhaust system or the brake system. Make regular checks to ensure that the towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling system Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling sys- tem should have sufficient coolant and be prepared for the additional effort involved in driving with a trailer.

Trailer brakes If the trailer has its own brake system, please take the relevant legal requirements into ac- count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cable Always use a cable between the vehicle and the trailer page 328.

Trailer tail lights The trailer's rear lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations page 328.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not sure that the trailer's electrical connection is correct, have it checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Exterior mirrors If you cannot see the area behind the trailer with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle, additional mirrors will have to be installed in accordance with the regulations of the coun- try in question. The exterior mirrors should be adjusted before you start driving and must provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption Never exceed the values indicated!

327

Driving

Europe, Asia, Africa, South America and Central America

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts

Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Australia

Brake lights (total) 108 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 54 Watts

Side lights (on each side) 100 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 54 Watts

Rear fog light 54 Watts

WARNING If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is not the right one, the trailer could become detached from the vehicle and cause seri- ous injury.

CAUTION If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.

Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sour- ces. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 300 Schematic representation: assign- ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock- et.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

Pin Meaning

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailer The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the connection between the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine running, electrical devices on the trailer receive power from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has been connected, the consumers on the trailer will receive electricity through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for example, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan only receive electrical power if the engine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system, you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.

328

Towing bracket device*

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available.

Tow cable The tow rope must always be securely fixed to the towing vehicle and loose enough so that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. However, make sure that the cable does not rub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lights Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure they are working correctly and that they comply with the relevant safety regulations. Make sure that the maximum permissible power that can be absorbed by the trailer is not exceeded page 327.

Include in the anti-theft alarm The trailer is included in the anti-theft system if the following conditions are met:

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an anti-theft alarm and towing bracket. If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power sock- et. If the electrical systems of the vehicle and trailer are in perfect condition and have no faults or damage.

If the vehicle is locked with the key and the anti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- gered if the electrical connection with the trailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lights For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does not go off when the electrical connection with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected when hitching the trailer, this will automatically switch to the Normal profile. If the system cannot detect the attached trailer or if the towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au- to repair shop other than SEAT, you must manually select the Normal profile before you start driving with a trailer attached. To re- connect the Eco profile once the trailer has been unhitched, switch the ignition off and back on once.

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, it may lead to an excessive amount of current supplied to the trailer, which can cause abnormalities in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- dents and serious injuries. Ensure that any repairs that need to be carried out on the electrical system are carried out by a specialised workshop. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sour- ces.

WARNING Contact between the pins of the trailer power socket can cause short circuits, overloading of the electrical system or fail- ure of the lighting system, and consequent- ly can cause accidents and serious injuries. Never connect the pins of the trailer pow- er socket to each other. Make sure any work on bent pins is car- ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehicle when parked; place it on its support wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or falls due, for example, to a variation of the load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will

329

Driving

be placed on the towing bracket and the trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

Note In case of anomalies in the electrical sys- tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in the anti-theft alarm system, have them in- spected by a specialised workshop. If the trailer accessories consume energy through the power socket to the trailer and the engine is turned off, the battery will dis- charge. If the vehicle battery is running low, the electrical connection with the trailer will be automatically cut.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling device The technically permissible maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow . The vertical load on the coupling is ex- erted vertically from above on the hook of the towing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling de- vice contained in the type plate of the towing bracket are experimental values only. The

correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle documentation. The information in the vehicle documentation takes precedence at all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom- mends making the most of the maximum ver- tical load technically permissible on the coupling device page 325. An insufficient vertical load has a negative influence on the behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual weight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified into distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob- taining information from a specialised work- shop regarding which type of trailer is most suitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loading The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the load must be as close as possible to the max- imum vertical load technically permissible on the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-

tributed between the back and front of the trailer:

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible or above it. Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressure Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the towing vehicle with the maximum allowable pressure page 360.

WARNING If the maximum permissible axle weight, the maximum load technically permissible on the coupling point, the maximum author- ised vehicle weight or the gross combina- tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer are exceeded, accidents and serious inju- ries may occur. Never exceed the values indicated! The actual weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum per- missible axle weight. The weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum permissible weight.

330

Towing bracket device*

WARNING A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil- ity and security of the towing vehicle and trailer, which could lead to accidents and serious injuries. Always load the trailer correctly. Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights The front part of the vehicle may be raised when the trailer is connected and the light may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the headlight range adjuster page 1241).

Specific features of driving with a trailer If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- vent the jerking that can be caused by the locking of trailer wheels. Due to the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis- tance increases.

When going down a slope, go into a lower gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip- tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad- vantage of the braking power provided by the engine. Otherwise, the braking system could overheat and even fail. The trailer weight, as well as the gross com- bination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, change the centre of gravity and the properties of the vehicle. If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer is loaded, then the load distribution is incor- rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailer Depending on the slope of the hill and the combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back- wards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

Press and hold the brake pedal. Press the button once to disconnect the electronic parking brake page 298. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way down.

Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se- lector lever to position D/S page 252. Pull out the button and hold it in that po- sition to immobilise the towing vehicle and trailer with the electronic parking brake. Release the brake pedal. Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch pedal. Do not release the button until the en- gine has sufficient power to start driving.

WARNING If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury. Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects will change the ve- hicle handling and braking distances. Always drive cautiously and carefully. Brake earlier than usual. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Slow down, especially when driving down hills or slopes. Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu- vres.

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights.

331

Driving

Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating. Take into account the speed limit for vehi- cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than for vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combination is an additional function of the electronic stability control (ESC).

If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation system detects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac- tion on the steering control to reduce the weaving of the trailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa- tion requirements The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a compatible towing bracket. The ESC and ASR are active. The control lamp or is not lit up on the instrument cluster. The trailer is connected to the towing vehi- cle through the trailer power socket.

The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h (approx. 37 mph). The maximum vertical load technically per- missible is not being exceeded on the cou- pling device. The trailer has a rigid draw bar. If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped with a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNING The enhanced safety provided by the elec- tric stability control of the vehicle and trail- er should not lead you to take any risks that could compromise your safety. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery. When adjusting any settings, stop accel- erating.

WARNING The electric stability control for the vehicle and trailer may not correctly detect all driving conditions. When the ESC is switched off, the stabili- sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al- so switched off.

The stability system does not always de- tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise these correctly. When driving on surfaces with poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with the sta- bility system. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over without having previously weaved. If a trailer is not attached, but a connec- tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g. installation of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated automatic braking may occur in extreme driving conditions.

Electrically unlocking trailer hook*

Description

Fig. 301 On the right side of the luggage com- partment: button for unlocking the tow hook.

332

Towing bracket device*

The towing brackets hook is located in the bumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlocking cannot be removed.

There should be no person, animal or object in the path of the tow hook .

Unlocking the tow hook and removing it Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic parking brake page 298. Switch off the engine. Open the rear lid. Pull the Fig. 301 button briefly. The tow hook unlocks electrically and automatically turns outwards. The button's control lamp flashes. Finish remove the tow hook by hand until you feel and hear that it has engaged and the control lamp on the button stays on. Close the rear lid. Hitching and connecting a trailer page 328.

Retracting the tow hook Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic parking brake. Switch off the engine. Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri- cal connection between it and the vehicle. If you are using an adapter, remove it from the trailer's power socket.

Open the rear lid. Pull the Fig. 301 button briefly. The tow hook unlocks electrically. Turn the tow hook under the bumper with your hand until you feel and hear that it en- gages and the control lamp on the button re- mains on continuously. Close the rear lid.

The control lamp If the warning light on the button Fig. 301 flashes, this means that the tow hook has not been attached properly or is damaged . If the warning lamp Fig. 301 remains on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is cor- rectly in place both when extracted and when covered.

The control light of the lamp switches off ap- proximately 1 minute after closing the read lid.

WARNING Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents. Only use the tow hook if it is properly en- gaged. Always ensure that no person, animal or object is to be found in the path of the tow hook. Never use a tool or instrument while the tow hook is moving.

Never press the Fig. 301 button when there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or when a carrier system or other accessories are mounted on the tow hook. If the tow hook is not attached properly, do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised workshop and have the towing bracket checked. If you detect any fault in the electrical system or in the towing bracket, contact a specialised workshop and ask them to check it. If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 mm at any one point, do not use the towing bracket under any circumstances.

CAUTION If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure or steam devices, do not point the jet di- rectly towards the retractable tow hook or the trailer power socket, as this may dam- age the joints or remove the grease neces- sary for lubrication.

Note At extremely low temperatures, the tow hook may be impossible to operate. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca- tion (for example, a garage).

333

Driving

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re- tractable towbar

The maximum allowed weight of the carrier system, including the load, is 75 kg. The carri- er system should not protrude more than 700 mm backwards from the spherical head. On- ly carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicycles must be mounted as close to the vehicle as possible (tow hook).

WARNING The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi- cycle rack mounted on the tow hook can cause accidents and injury. Never exceed the maximum weight or the limits indicated above. The bicycle rack may not be mounted to the neck of the hook below the ball be- cause, due to the shape of the neck and depending on the rack model, the rack could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi- cle. Always read and take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account.

CAUTION If the maximum weight and limits indicated above are exceeded, the vehicle may suf- fer considerable damage. Never exceed the values indicated!

Note SEAT recommends removing, as far as pos- sible, all removable parts of the bicycles before setting off. These parts include, for example, baskets and saddlebags, child seats or batteries. This improves aerody- namics and the centre of gravity of the rack system.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 302 Limits and attachment points for ret- rofitting a towing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets be retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For

334

Towing bracket device*

example, it may very well be necessary to adjust the cooling system or mount thermal protection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance specifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ball head and the road Fig. 302 D must never be less than indicated. This also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the tech- nically permissible maximum vertical load on the coupling device.

Distance specifications Fig. 302: Attachment points (lower part of the vehi- cle) 932.5 mm 65 mm min. 350-420 mm 220 mm 615.5 mm 1,043 mm

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other unsuitable power sour-

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

ces. Only use suitable connectors to con- nect the trailer. The towing bracket should be retrofitted only at a specialised workshop.

WARNING If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un- suitable, the trailer may separate from the vehicle while driving. This could cause seri- ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note Only use towing brackets that have been approved by SEAT for the model in ques- tion. In some versions, the fitting of a conven- tional towing hook solution is not recom- mended. Please consult your Technical Service.

335

Practical tips

Practical tips

Checking and refilling lev- els

Refuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 303 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attach- ed.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the vehicle.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automatically using the central locking.

Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the left side. Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap Fig. 303. Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as the pumps automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion chamber in the fuel tank. Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go. Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at page 337.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv- en in page 383.

WARNING Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se- rious burns and other injuries. When refuelling, turn off the engine, the auxiliary heater page 158 and turn off the ignition for safety reasons. Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the vicinity due to the risk of explosion. Observe legislation governing the use, storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis- ter in the vehicle. For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-

cle. In an accident the canister could be damaged and could leak. If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points: Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi- ble into the spare fuel canister.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in con- tact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is explosive. Risk of fatal accident!

CAUTION If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it should be removed immediately. It could otherwise damage the paintwork. Never run the tank completely dry. The catalytic converter can be damaged. When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel engine, the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds before starting the en- gine. When you then start the engine it may

336

Checking and refilling levels

take longer than normal (up to one minute) to start firing.

For the sake of the environment Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Note There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- essary, request assistance from special- ised personnel.

Note Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective device that prevents the insertion of the wrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re- fuel with Diesel nozzles. If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if it is very small, it is possible that it will not be able to open the protective device. Be- fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it, try a different pump or request specialist help. If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can- ister, the protective device will not open.

One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in very slowly.

Fuel types

Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 304 Identification of fuels according to European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols on the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. The identification serves to prevent confusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (E stands for Etha- nol). The number indicates the percent-

1

age of ethanol in the petrol. E5 means, for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. Diesel with biodiesel (B stands for Bio- diesel). The number indicates the per- centage of biodiesel in the diesel. B7 means, for example, a proportion of bio- diesel of max. 7%. Natural gas: CNG means Compressed Natural Gas.

Type of petrol 3 Applies to: vehicles with petrol engines

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- verter and must only be run on unleaded petrol. The petrol must comply with the standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled (E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiated by using the octane numbers (RON) or via the anti-knock index (AKI).

2

3

1) Depending on country 2) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

337

Practical tips

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or normal 91 octane petrol at least We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power loss) may be used.

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or super 95 octane petrol at least We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ble.

CAUTION Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. E30 - E100 button must not be used. The fuel system would be damaged. Exception: vehicles with Totalflex engine page 338, Ethanol fuel. A single refuelling with leaded fuel or other metal additives entails a permanent deterioration of the effectiveness of the catalytic converter. Only use fuel additives that have been approved by SEAT. The products that con- tain substances to increase the octane rat- ing or decrease knocking may contain met- al additives that damage the engine and catalytic converter. This type of products must not be used. Do not use fuels shown in the pump as containing metals. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Risk of engine damage! High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

Note Fuel with an octane rating higher than the one required by the engine can be used.

In countries in which there is no sulphur- free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- phur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel 3 Applies to: vehicles with Totalflex engines

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with with the marking Petrol/ethanol.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that page 337, Type of pet- rol

Note SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu- sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- crease impurities that using E100 ethanol fuel might have left in the engine.

1) This motor is only available in some markets. 338

Checking and refilling levels

Diesel 3 Applies to: vehicles with diesel engines

Please note the information on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according to standard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- tures, thus affecting the start or operation of the engine. Ask your service station attendant if their diesel is suitable for winter use.

Water in the fuel filter1)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep- arator, the instrument panel may display the following warning: Water in the fuel filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop so that they can drain the fuel filter.

CAUTION Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol, heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents as they can cause severely damage the fuel system and the engine. If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not start the engine under any circumstances.

Risk of damaging the fuel system and the engine! Obtain technical assistance.

AdBlue

Information about AdBlue

Fig. 305 Related video

The consumption of AdBlue depends on your personal driving style, the temperature of the system and on the outdoor tempera- ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue freezes at temperatures of -11 C (+13 F). The system has heating elements that guarantee its operation even at low tempera- tures.

The capacity of the AdBlue tank is approx. 11 litres.

When the range is less than 2400 km the instrument panel screen displays a message requesting an AdBlue refill.

If this message is ignored, the yellow warning lamp will come on when the remaining range is less than 1000 km. . The indica- tion that in XXX km it will no longer be possible to restart the engine will appear on the instru- ment panel display.

If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will no longer be possible to restart the engine. The red warning lamp will light up .

AdBlue is a registered brand of the German Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid).

CAUTION Filling the AdBlue tank excessively can cause damage to the tank.

Control and warning lamps

It lights up red

The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue level is too low. Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue page 340.

1) Depending upon country. 339

Practical tips

and They light up red

The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the AdBlue system. Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system checked there.

It lights up yellow

The AdBlue reserve is low. Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) that are indicated page 340. SEAT recommends con- tacting a specialised workshop.

and They light up yellow

There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable AdBlue fluid has been used. Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system checked there.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is be- ing verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Fill AdBlue

Fig. 306 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refilling Park the vehicle on a flat surface and turn off the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a curb, the level indicator may not detect the refill properly.

If a warning message about AdBlue levels appears on the dash panel display, fill at least the minimum amount required (ap- prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amount will the system detect that AdBlue has been added and you will be able to start the en- gine again. The maximum amount that can be refilled is 11 litres.

Fill with a refill bottle Only use AdBlue that complies with ISO 22241-1. Only use original containers.

Open the tank cover Fig. 306.

Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an- ti-clockwise direction. Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- tions, indicated on the refill bottle. Check the expiry date. Remove the cap of the refill bottle. Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler neck vertically and screw the bottle on by hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. Press the refill bottle in the direction of the filler neck and hold it in this position. Wait until the contents of the refill bottle have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do not compress or break the bottle! Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di- rection and gently pull it upwards . The AdBlue tank is full when no more liquid comes out of the bottle. Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- tion until it is tightly closed. Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig- nition. Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- onds for the system to detect the fluid load. Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine!

340

Checking and refilling levels

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- duction.

Open the tank cap. Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise Fig. 306. Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the first time. Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise until you hear a click.

WARNING AdBlue should only be stored in the origi- nal container, which should be tightly closed and kept in a safe place.

CAUTION When refilling, the nozzle grip should be aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle will not connect automatically. Do not try to add any more additive after the nozzle has stopped for the first time. The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue could spill out. Only use AdBlue that complies with ISO 22241-1. Only use original containers. Never mix AdBlue with water, fuel or ad- ditives. Any type of damage caused by such a mixture will not be covered by the warranty.

Never pour AdBlue into the fuel tank. This could result in engine damage. Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera- ture changes or damage to the bottle), the AdBlue may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ- ment-friendly manner.

Note You can buy refill bottles that are adequate for AdBlue use at SEAT dealerships.

Engine management and emissions control system

Introduction

WARNING Due to the high temperatures reached by the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you should not park your vehicle near a surface that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard! Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle around the area of the exhaust system: Fire hazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked page 342.

It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop.

When the ignition is switched on, the (Electronic Power Control) lights up and should go off once the engine has started.

It lights up

Diesel engine preheating system. The engine can be started straight away when the lamp switches off.

341

Practical tips

Flashes

Fault in the diesel engine management. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop.

Note While the control lamps , , or are on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel consumption may go up and the engine might lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en- gines. Never run the fuel tank dry. When changing or adding engine oil, do not exceed the necessary amount page 348, Topping up the engine oil. Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary page 47.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the car is moving, have the vehicle inspected by a specialised work- shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp will light up when any of these symptoms occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the

atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the cata- lytic converter.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the gases on occasions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. This can quite often be avoided by changing to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter 3 Applies to: vehicles with petrol or diesel partic- ulate filters

The particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor- mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short journeys are made continuously), it becomes blocked with soot and the following indica- tion is displayed to the driver: Particu- late filter: cleaned while the vehi-

cle is moving. See Manual. The partic- ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).

Regeneration of the petrol particulate fil- ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines) Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine is at operating temperature.

Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h Completely remove your foot from the ac- celerator pedal for a few seconds to let the vehicle roll with the gear engaged. Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let roll) until the control lamp turns off.

This procedure involves an autonomous par- ticulate filter cleaning process and may take some time.

If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im- mediately to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.

Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI 2.0l engine) and diesel particulate filter Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine is at operating temperature.

Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h (31-75 mph). This increases the temperature and burns the soot in the filter . Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears.

342

Checking and refilling levels

End the regeneration journey once the con- trol warning lamp has gone out.

If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes of running in regeneration mode, have a spe- cialised workshop repair the fault

WARNING Always adjust your speed to suit the weath- er conditions, roads, braking distance and traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen- eration phase. Route recommendations should never make you disregard each country's specific traffic regulations.

CAUTION When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, the self-cleaning function of this system recommends optimal driving for this func- tion. Due to the high temperatures caused by the regeneration of the particulate filter, it is possible that the radiator fan will acti- vate after stopping the engine, even it its operating temperature has not been reached. Noise, smells and high idle speeds can occur during regeneration. Always use the correct engine oil and the correct fuel to make sure the useful life of the particulate filter is not affected. Also avoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compart- ment

Fig. 307 Related video

Always be aware of the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire when working in the engine compartment (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).

Always observe the warnings listed below and follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po- tentially hazardous area .

WARNING When work is done in the engine compart- ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even fires can occur. Switch the engine off, remove the key from the ignition and apply the electronic parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox, place the selector lever in position P. Wait for the engine to cool down.

Never open the bonnet if you see steam or drips of coolant being released from the engine compartment. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before opening the bonnet. Keep children away from the engine compartment. Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- tion on the engine compartment, as these may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool- ant). Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec- trical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 47. The battery could explode. If working inside the engine compart- ment, remember that, even when the igni- tion is switched off, the radiator fan may start up automatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury. Never cover the engine with additional in- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of fire! Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure. Protect face, hands and arms by cover- ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect against escaping coolant and steam. Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the engine compartment.

343

Practical tips

If you have to work underneath the vehi- cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following: Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system. Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro- tating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewel- lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.

Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary precau- tions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

Observe the following additional warn- ings if work on the fuel system or the elec- trical system is necessary: Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network. Do not smoke. Never work near naked flames.

Always keep an approved fire extin- guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment Inspect the ground underneath your vehi- cle regularly so that any leaks are detec- ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or other fluids in the area where it was parked, have your vehicle inspected at the workshop. Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en- vironment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a specialised workshop.

Note In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake fluid reservoirs are on the other side of the engine compartment Fig. 310.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 308 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.

Fig. 309 Cam under the bonnet

Opening the bonnet The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.

344

Checking and refilling levels

Open the door and pull the lever under the dashboard Fig. 308 1 . To lift the bonnet, press the release catch under the bonnet upwards Fig. 309 2 . The arrester hook under the bonnet is re- leased. The bonnet can be opened. Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet Slightly lift the bonnet.

Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.

WARNING Make sure that the bonnet is properly closed. If it opens when driving, it can cause an accident.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open it when the windscreen wipers are in place against the windscreen.

345

Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 310 Diagram for the location of the various el- ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank page 350 Engine oil level dipstick page 348 Engine oil filler cap page 348 Brake fluid reservoir page 351 Battery (under the cover) page 353 Windscreen washer reservoir page 352

1

2

3

4

5

6

Note The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- tial for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change be done by a technical service or specialised work- shop.

If the engine oil level is too low You can get information about the correct en- gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa- ble, in the event of an emergency you can change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L of the next oil until the next oil change:

346

Checking and refilling levels

Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or API SN. Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00, VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work- shop.

Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW 504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00 could increase consumption and the vehicles CO2 emissions.

Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to guarantee high SEAT engine performance.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in diesel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- fore:

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 348 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil

(once) conforming to the specifications VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l) page 346.

Engine oil additives No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corre- sponding VW specifications and recom- mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type Type of Service

Specifica- tion

With particulate filter (DPF)a)

Set Service and Flexible Service Inter- vals

VW 507 00

Without particu- late filter (DPF)

Set Service Intervals

VW 505 01b)

VW 506 01b)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine. b) If the quality of the fuel available in the country does not fulfil the EN 590 (for diesel) standard.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving! Engine oil pressure too low. Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom- panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en- gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil page 348.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

347

Practical tips

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to do so page 348.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor. Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un- til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 311 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.

Checking oil level Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then stop.

Wait for about two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out once more and check the oil level Fig. 311. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones A and C . It can never go above zone A .

Zone A : do not add oil. Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level in that zone. Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNING Any work carried out in the engine com- partment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. When working in the engine compart- ment, always observe the safety warnings page 343.

CAUTION If the oil level is above area A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Con- tact a Technical Service.

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 312 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

348

Checking and refilling levels

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in Working in the engine compartment on page 343.

Topping up engine oil Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening Fig. 312. Carefully add oil in small quantities (no more than 0.5 l). To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes and recheck the oil level page 348. If necessary, add some more oil. When the oil level reaches at least zone Fig. 311 B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully .

The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine compartment il- lustration page 346.

Engine oil specification page 347.

WARNING Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents when topping up.

CAUTION If the oil level is above area Fig. 311 A , do not start the engine. This could result in

damage to the engine and catalytic con- verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above zone Fig. 311 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and leak into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- tem.

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corre- sponding VW specifications and recom- mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required! Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings page 343. Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.

Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm. Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil. Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children.

CAUTION No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine damage. Any damage caused by the use of such addi- tives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

For the sake of the environment We recommend that you change the en- gine oil and the filter at a technical service centre. Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all the engine oil.

349

Practical tips

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of water and at least 40 % of the additive G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25C (-13F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con- siderably raises the boiling point of the cool- ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent- age of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- tifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the additive G12evo for optimal protection against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13 (TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green blue) engine coolants decreases pro- tection again corrosion and should be avoi- ded.

WARNING If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may fail lead- ing to serious damage. Ensure that the percentage of additive is correct for the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehi- cle is to be used. When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- cle would be immobilised.

CAUTION The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not ap- proved by SEAT. If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indi- cates that the G12evo additive has been mixed with an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possi- ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly dis- posed of, with respect to the environment.

Refilling coolant

Fig. 313 In the engine compartment: marking on coolant expansion tank.

Fig. 314 Engine compartment: coolant expan- sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the engine compartment page 346.

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

350

Checking and refilling levels

Checking coolant level Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Switch the ignition off.

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the marks Fig. 313. When the engine is hot, it may be slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant Wait for the engine to cool down.

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left .

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you could damage the engine. If there is no coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- tinue driving. You should obtain professional assistance .

If there is still some coolant in the expansion tank, top up to the upper mark.

Top up with coolant until the level becomes stable.

Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe- cialised workshop to have the cooling system examined.

WARNING The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of burns! Store the antifreeze in its original con- tainer and keep it out of reach of children. If working inside the engine compart- ment, remember that, even when the igni- tion is switched off, the radiator fan may start up automatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury.

CAUTION If you run out of coolant in the expansion tank, park the car in a safe place and do not continue driving. Obtain technical as- sistance.

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 315 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- gine compartment page 346.

Checking the brake fluid level The brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning light on the instrument panel display monitors the brake fluid level page 86.

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid reservoir is on the other side of the engine compartment.

351

Practical tips

Changing brake fluid We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita- ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys- tem may fail or braking power may be re- duced. Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly! When the brake fluid is used and brakes are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys- tem. These bubbles can significantly re- duce braking power, notably increasing braking distance, and could result in the to- tal failure of the brake system. Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the VW 501 14 standard. You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Service. If none is available, use only high- quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4. The replacement brake fluid must be new. Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTION Brake fluid should not come into contact with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environment Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the window washer tank and refilling it

Fig. 316 In the engine compartment: window washer tank cap.

The window washer tank is in the engine compartment page 346.

Check the water level in the windscreen washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- quired.

The container for the windscreen washer contains the cleaning fluid for the wind- screen, the rear window and the headlight washer system*.

Open the bonnet page 343. The window washer tank is marked with the symbol on the cap. Check there is enough windscreen water in the reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- screen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers For the hottest seasons we recommend summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- ter). All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. Approximate proportion of the winter mixture, up to -18C (0F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of mixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank can be found in page 383.

352

Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION If the water from the windscreen washer does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze on the windscreen and rear window, reducing forward and rear visibility. In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough anti-freeze. In cold conditions, you should not use the windscreen wiper system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the ventila- tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.

CAUTION Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other similar additives with the windscreen wash- er water. A greasy layer may be formed on the windscreen which will impair visibility. Use clean water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT. If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION Do not mix cleaning products recommen- ded by SEAT with other products. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen washer jets. When topping up service fluids, make ab- solutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-

ids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage! Not having windscreen wiper fluid re- duces visibility through the windscreen, and leads to loss of visibility in headlights in models with headlight washer.

Battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine compart- ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is checked as part of the Inspection Service. Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean and have the correct tightening torque, espe- cially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official Service or a workshop specialising in batter- ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- erwise explosive gas is released from the bat- tery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well- ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Disconnecting the battery The battery should only be disconnected in exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- connected, some of the vehicle's functions are lost. These functions will require resetting after the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from the ve- hicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods The vehicle has a system for monitoring the current consumption when the engine is left unused for long periods of time page 356. Some functions, such as the interior lights, or the remote door opening, may be temporarily disabled to prevent the battery from running flat. These functions will come back on as

353

Practical tips

soon as the ignition is switched on and the engine started.

Winter conditions During the winter, the starting power may be reduced, and if necessary, the battery should be charged

WARNING Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the bat- tery and the electrical system: Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead. Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents. Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu- tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately. Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury. A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- leased when the battery is under charge.

The batteries should be charged in a well- ventilated room only. Keep children away from acid and bat- teries. Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all electrical devices. The negative ca- ble on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need on- ly switch off the light. Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un- locking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered. When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable. Switch off all electrical devices before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire. Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in ex- plosions and chemical burns. Always re- place a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0C (+32F). Ensure that the vent hose is always con- nected to the battery.

Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

CAUTION Do not expose the battery to direct sun- light over a long period of time, as the in- tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing. If the vehicle is left standing in cold con- ditions for a long period, protect the bat- tery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer charging the bat- tery. You should immediately drive to the nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary because this will drain the battery.

354

Checking and refilling levels

Checking the battery electrolyte level

The electrolyte level should be checked reg- ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- tries and in older batteries.

Open the bonnet and then lift the cover that protects the front part of the battery in Working in the engine compart- ment on page 343. Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the battery. If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 346.

The magic eye indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.

There are two different colours:

Black: correct charge status. Transparent/light yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a specialised work- shop.

Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve- hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery should be checked by a specialised work- shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- ommend you have the vehicle battery checked by a Technical Service where it will be re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled environ- ment.

Replacing a vehicle battery The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features. If the battery must be re- placed, consult a technical service for infor- mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the size and maintenance, performance and safety requirements of the new battery in your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT recommends you have the battery replaced by a technical service.

Start-Stop systems ( page 249) are equip- ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must only be replaced with a battery of the same specifications.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy page 356. The power management function ensures that the battery is charged much more effi- ciently than on vehicles without a power management system. To maintain this func- tion after replacing the battery, we recom- mend that the replacement battery used is of the same make and type as the original fitted battery. To make proper use of the power management function after the battery has been changed, have the battery coded to the power management mode at a specialised workshop.

WARNING Always use only maintenance free bat- teries that do not run flat alone and whose properties, specifications and size corre- spond to the standard battery. The specifi- cations are indicated on the battery case. Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in General information on page 354.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be

355

Practical tips

disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Energy management

Optimisation of the starting ca- pacity

The power management controls the distri- bution of electrical energy and thus helps to ensure that there is always enough power available to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- tem is left parked for a long time, the battery will gradually lose its charge because certain electrical devices, such as the electronic gearbox lock continues to draw current even when the ignition is off. In some cases there may not be enough power available to start the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- cantly improves reliability when starting the engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the battery.

The main functions incorporated in the power management system are battery diagnosis, residual current management and dynam- ic power management.

Battery diagnosis The battery diagnosis function constantly registers the condition of the battery. Sensors detect the battery voltage, battery current and battery temperature. This enables the system to calculate the current power level and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current management The residual current management reduces power consumption while the vehicle is parked. It controls the supply of power to the various electrical devices while the ignition is switched off. The system takes the battery di- agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery, switch off the individual electrical devices one after the other to prevent the battery from losing too much charge and to ensure that the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power management While the vehicle is moving, this function dis- tributes the available power to the various electrical devices and systems according to their requirements. The power management ensures that on-board systems do not con- sume more electrical power than the alterna- tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi- mum possible battery power level.

Note Neither is the power management system able to overcome the given physical limits. Please remember that the power and use- ful life of the battery are limited. When there is a risk that the vehicle will not start, the alternator power failure or low battery charge level warning lamp will be shown page 86.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures all place a heavy load on the battery. In these conditions a large amount of power is consumed, but only a small amount is sup- plied. The situation is also critical if electrical devices are in use when the engine is not run- ning. In this case power is consumed when none is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that the power management system is intervening to control the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri- ods If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of several days or weeks, the power manage- ment will gradually shut off the electrical de- vices one by one or reduce the amount of

356

Wheels

current they are using. This limits the amount of power consumed and helps to ensure reli- able starting even after a long period. Some convenience functions, such as remote vehi- cle opening, may not be available under cer- tain circumstances. These functions will be restored when you switch on the ignition and start the engine.

With the engine switched off For example, if you listen to the sound system with the engine switched off the battery will run down.

If the energy consumption means there is a risk that the engine will not start, a text will appear in vehicles with a driver information system*.

This driver indicator tells you that you must start the engine so that the battery can re- charge.

When the engine is running Although the alternator generates electrical power, the battery can still become dis- charged while the vehicle is being driven. This can occur when a lot of power is being con- sumed but only a small amount supplied, es- pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini- tially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, the system will then temporarily shut off the elec- trical devices that are using a lot of power, or

reduce the current they are consuming. Heat- ing systems in particular use a large amount of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, that the seat heating* or the rear window heater is not working, they may have been temporarily switched off or regulated to a lower heat output. These systems will be available again as soon as sufficient electri- cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at a slightly faster idling speed when necessary. This is quite normal, and no cause for con- cern. The increased idling speed allows the alternator to meet the greater power require- ment and charge the battery at the same time.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the obstacle.

Check from time to time if the tyres are damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or dents). Remove any foreign objects em- bedded in the treads.

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- placed immediately.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Replace any missing valve caps as soon as possible.

Mark the wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back.

When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.

357

Practical tips

Low profile tyres Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ly than standard tyres, for instance due to strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important page 360.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive with special care when driving on roads in poor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im- pact or have been damaged, have a special- ised workshop check whether or not it is nec- essary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damage Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed immediately if there is any reason to suspect that damage may have occurred. In- spect the tyres for damage. If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre Do not remove foreign bodies if they have penetrated through the tyre wall! If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility system, where necessary seal the damaged tyre as shown in section page 38. Use a specialised workshop for repair or replace- ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread wraps around the foreign body and provision- ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread pattern An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ways note the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This makes sure that optimal use is made of tyre properties in terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise and wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessories If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or wheel trims, we recommend that you consult with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice regarding current techniques.

Speed symbols The speed rating indicates the maximum speed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph) max. 160 km/h (99 mph) max. 170 km/h (106 mph) max. 180 km/h (112 mph) max. 190 km/h (118 mph) max. 200 km/h (124 mph) max. 210 km/h (130 mph) max. 240 km/h (149 mph) max. 240 km/h (149 mph) max. 270 km/h (168 mph) max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters ZR for tyres with a maximum authorised speed above 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents. Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident. If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres. Never use old tyres or those with an un- known history of use.

P Q R S T U H V Z W Y

358

Wheels

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced by a specialised workshop. There they have the required knowledge, the special tools and the corresponding spare parts.

Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you have installed new tyres, drive the first 500 km carefully and at a moderate speed. All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and, if possible, tread pattern. When changing tyres, do not change just one; change at least two on the same axle. If you want to equip your vehicle with a combination tyres and rims that are different to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe- cialised workshop before purchasing them The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC document1)). The vehicle documen- tation varies depending on the country of res- idence.

If the type of spare wheel is different form the normal wheels e.g. in the case of winter tyres or particularly wide tyres the spare wheel should only be used temporarily in the

event of a puncture, and the vehicle should be driven with care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same brand, type and tread so that the traction system is not damaged by a difference in the number of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the same perimeter as normal tyres should be used.

Manufacturing date The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the wheel):

DOT... 2218... it means, for example, that the tyre was man- ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING Use only combinations of tyres and rims, as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam- aged, causing an accident. For technical reasons it is not possible to use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases not even wheels from the same vehicle model should be used.

Always ensure that the tyres you have chosen have adequate clearance. When selecting replacement tyres, do not rely entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif- fer significantly depending on the manu- facturer. Lack of clearance can damage the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en- danger road safety. Risk of accident! Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in an emergency, and drive with due care. The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper- ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro- hibited use can cause accidents or can damage your vehicle. If decorative hubcaps are subsequently fitted, make sure that they allow enough air in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci- dent!

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.

Note A SEAT Service Centre should be consul- ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of different sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 359

Practical tips

the combinations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). Never mount used tyres if you are not sure of their previous history. When 245/40 R19 tyres are outfitted, the corresponding reflector must also be in- stalled.

Tyre life

Fig. 317 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- ing habits will increase the useful life of your tyres.

Check tyre pressure at least once a month, and also prior to any long trip. The tyre pressure should only be checked when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the pressure of warm tyres. Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- ried by the vehicle Fig. 317. In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, save the modified tyre pressure page 364. Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from time to time.

Tyre pressure The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a sticker on the rear of the front left door frame Fig. 317.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- rect inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- ing comfort (tyre pressure Fig. 317). When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehicle is going to carry the maximum load, the tyre pressure should be increased to the

maximum value indicated on the sticker Fig. 317.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checking the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in- flated to the highest pressure required for the road wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary spare wheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure label Fig. 317.

Driving style Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre wear.

Wheel balance The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted or if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you

360

Wheels

should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of- ficial Service.

WARNING Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los- ses, to tread separation or even to a blow- out. The driver is responsible for ensuring that all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla- ted to the right pressure. The recommen- ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label Fig. 317. Check tyre pressures regularly and en- sure they are maintained at the pressures indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause overheating, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres. When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure should be that indicated on the label Fig. 317. Regularly check the cold inflation pres- sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are cold. Regularly check your tyres for damage and wear. Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 318 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 319 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be found on the base of the original tyre treads, ordered at regular intervals and running across the tread Fig. 318. The letters "TWI" or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark the position of the wear indicators.

The minimum permitted profile depth1) have been reached when the tyres have worn down to the wear indicators. Replace the tyres with new ones .

Changing wheels around To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres the wheels should be changed round from time to time according to the system Fig. 319. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

361

Practical tips

WARNING The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident. Particularly in difficult driving conditions such as wet or icy roads. It is important that the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be approximately the same on the tyres of both the front and the rear axles. The scant driving safety due to insuffi- cient tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle handling, when there is a risk of aquaplaning in deep puddles of water and when driving through corners, and braking is also adversely affected. The speed has to be adapted according- ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control over the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts are matched to the rims. When installing different wheels (for instance alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use the correct wheel nuts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-

curely and that the brake system functions correctly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti- theft wheel nuts* page 42.

WARNING Wheel nuts should never be greased or oiled. Use only wheel nuts which belong to the wheel. If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve- hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTION See page 45 to find out the recommen- ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for steel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Only use winter tyres that are approved for your vehicle.

Please note that the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres.

Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef- fective when the tread is worn down.

After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. When doing so, take into account the correct tyre pressures listed on the rear of the front left door frame page 360.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con- siderably improve vehicle handling. The de- sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com- pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles equipped with wide section tyres or with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on the sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)). The vehicle documentation varies depending on the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- ties when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 362

Wheels

The performance of winter tyres is also se- verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is still much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit is stamped on all winter tyres page 358.

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds must have an appropriate sticker attached so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick- ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv- ice and specialised workshop. Please note the regulations to this effect in your country.

All-weather tyres can also be used instead of winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-rating Please note that the generally applicable 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres with the letter V is subject to technical re- strictions; the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle may be significantly lower. The maximum speed limit for these tyres de- pends directly on the maximum axle weights for your car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to check the maximum speed which is permissi- ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis of this information.

WARNING Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con- trol of the vehicle risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment When winter is over, change back to sum- mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In temperatures above +7C (+45F), perform- ance will be improved if summer tyres are used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises while driving will all be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains must only be fitted to the front wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel drive.

Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufac- turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). If there is a danger of being trapped de- spite having mounted the chains, it is best to disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC page 303, Connecting and disconnect- ing the ESC and ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only be used with the following wheel rim/tyre combination.

215/60 R16

Chains with links of maximum 15 mm215/55 R17

215/50 R18

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims and the rim ring before fitting snow chains.

WARNING The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted chains could lead to serious accidents and damage. Always the appropriate snow chains. Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer. Never exceed the maximum permitted speeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will im- pair vehicle handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.

363

Practical tips

Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch- ed if the chains come into direct contact with them. SEAT recommends the use of covered snow chains.

Tyre pressure loss indicator

Control lamp

It lights up

The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has structural damage. In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text message is displayed on the instrument panel screen. Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any damaged tyres.

Flashes

System fault The control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute and then lights up permanently. If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure loss in- dicator page 364. If the fault continues, go to a specialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on while the function is verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 88.

Tyre monitor system

Fig. 320 Instrument panel: warning of loss of tyre pressure.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel revolutions and, with this information, the tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors.

If the rolling circumference of one or more wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring indi- cator will indicate this on the instrument pan- el through a warning lamp and a warning to the driver Fig. 320. When only one specific tyre is affected, its position within the vehicle will be indicated.

Loss of pressure: Check left tyre pressure!

Wheel tread change The wheel diameter changes when:

Tyre pressure is changed manually. Tyre pressure is insufficient. The tyre structure is damaged. The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load. The wheels on an axle are subject to a heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. The temporary spare wheel is fitted. The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre monitoring indicator or it may not indi- cate anything under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un- paved roads, or when driving with snow chains).

Calibrating the tyre monitoring indicator After changing the tyre pressure or replacing one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi- cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for example, when the front and rear wheels are swapped.

Switch the ignition on. 364

Wheels

Store the new inflation pressure in the Easy Connect system with the button > SET- TINGS > Tyres page 89.

When driving, the system self-calibrates the tyre pressure provided by the driver and the wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied speeds the programmed values are collected and monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, the tyre pressure must be increased to the total recommended tyre pressure before calibra- tion Fig. 317.

WARNING When the tyres are inflated at different pressures or at a pressure that is too low then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal accident. If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im- mediately and avoid any sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status. The tyre monitoring system can only op- erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla- ted to the correct pressure when cold. If a tyre has not been punctured and it does not have to be changed immediately, drive to the nearest specialised workshop at a moderate speed and have the tyre checked and inflated to the correct pres- sure.

Note Driving for the first time with new tyres at a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- pand, which could then produce an air pressure warning. If excessively low tyre pressure is detec- ted with the ignition on, an audible warning will sound. In the event that there is a fault in the system, an audible warning will sound. Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of time or driving in a sporty style can tempo- rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control lamp shows a fault, but disappears when road conditions or the driving style change. Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring system. Regularly check your tyres to en- sure that the tyre pressure is correct and that the tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects from the tyres only when they have not pierced the tyres. The tyre monitoring indicator does not function when there is a fault in the ESC or ABS page 301.

Spare wheel

Location and use of the temporary spare wheel

Fig. 321 In the luggage compartment: load floor raised.

365

Practical tips

Fig. 322 In the luggage compartment: remove the subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

The temporary spare wheel has been de- signed to be used for short periods of time. Have the tyres checked and replaced as soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or at a specialised workshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for a spare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the temporary spare wheel page 139. Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise Fig. 321. Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub- woofer)* To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- move the subwoofer.

Lift and secure the luggage compartment floor as explained in page 139. Disconnect the subwoofer Fig. 322 1 speaker cable. Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- wise direction Fig. 322 2 . Remove the subwoofer speaker and the spare wheel. When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with care. When doing so, the tip of the FRONT arrow on the subwoofer should point forward. Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place.

Chains For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possi- ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci- dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left front door frame Fig. 317. Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident! Never travel more than 200 km using a temporary spare wheel. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident! Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci- dent. No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off.

366

SEAT Maintenance Programme

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro- gramme

Service intervals

Service work and the Digital Main- tenance Plan

Log of services performed (Digital Main- tenance Plan) The SEAT dealership or a specialised work- shop records Service receipts in a central system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu- mentation of the service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service receipt after every service carried out con- taining all the services carried out on the sys- tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- able in some markets. In this case, your SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- rent documentation of the work.

Service works In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop documents the following information:

When each one of the services was carried out. Whether a specific repair has been sugges- ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. If you have expressed a special request for the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will write the work order. The components or fluids that were changed. The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until the next inspection. This information is docu- mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may vary from one vehicle to another. A special- ised workshop will be able to provide specific information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic cause an accident and severe in- juries.

Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a SEAT authorised service or speci- alised workshop.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Note Regular services on the vehicle not only maintain its value, but also its correct oper- ation and road safety. For this reason, con- duct the services in accordance with SEAT guidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service In- tervals

Services are classified as oil change service and inspection. The service interval display on the instrument panel display serves as a reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and the conditions of use of the car, either the Fixed service or the Flexible service will be applied for an oil change service..

367

Maintenance

How to know which type of service needs to his vehicle Check the tables below:

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type of service Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after 1 yearb)

QI3 Every 10000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI4 Every 15000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI6 Flexible According to the service in- terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the information about the speci- fications of the engine oil according to the VW standard page 347.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible Service Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil change service only has to be performed when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when you have to carry out this service, take into account the individual conditions of use and personal driving style. A major component of the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci- fications of the engine oil according to the VW standard page 347.

If you do not want to the flexible service you can select the fixed service However, a fixed service may affect service costs The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval display At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- ted by the service interval display on the in- strument panel page 83 or in the Vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system page 89.

The service interval display gives information for service dates that involve an engine oil change or an inspection. When the time for the corresponding service comes, additional work required, such as the change of brake fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usually based on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- verse conditions of use, some of the work must be carried out before the next service period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Frequent short trips. Letting the engine idle for a long period of time, as in the case of taxis. Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on equipment). Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following parts (depending on equipment):

Dust and pollen filter Air Care allergen filter Air filter Toothed chain Particulate filter Engine oil

368

SEAT Maintenance Programme

The Service Advisor of your specialised workshop will gladly inform you about the need of performing service work between normal service intervals, always considering the conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Have the services conducted at author- ised SEAT services or specialised work- shops.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maintenance works needed to ensure the safety and the smooth running of the vehicle (depending on the conditions of use and the features of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or operating fluids). Maintenance services are divided into inspection and review services. Consult the details of the jobs required for your vehicle at:

Your SEAT authorised service Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- opment of components) the sets of services may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop is always receiving up- dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. These parts correspond exactly to the manu- facturer's requirements in terms of design, accuracy of the measurements and materi- als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this reason, we always recommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu- facturer's requirements, are an additional service to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine, gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the same as the factory parts, which are also ap- proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original Accessories and SEAT approved accessories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and suitability of these accessories have been in- spected specifically for this type of vehicle. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase, your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov- ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad- ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri- od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as you carry out the recommended Inspection

369

Maintenance

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- ised Service.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Service differs depending on the country in which the vehicle was purchased. For further information ask your SEAT dealership or the SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect condition of new vehicles. Check the pur- chase agreement or complementary addi- tional documentation provided by your Tech- nical Service to see the conditions and the terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- mation in this regard in your SEAT Official Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may become a prerequisite to demand the war- ranty in the event of corrosion damage and deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions for application on the packaging.

WARNING Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your health if misused. Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment When purchasing car care products, chose products that are compatible with the environment. The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the more damage it can cause to the surface. High temperatures, for instance strong sun- light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af- ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipment When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- structions for the equipment. This applies particularly to the operating pressure and the distance between the spraying water. Do not aim the jet directly to the side window gas- kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun- roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high- pressure cleaner.

370

Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed 60C.

Automatic car washes Spray the vehicle before starting the car wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor- amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- structions of the car wash tunnel operator, especially if your vehicle has detachable parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by hand To prevent damage to the vehicle when washing it, first remove the thicker dust and dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of water with a leather cloth.

WARNING Only wash the vehicle with the ignition switched off or according to the specifica- tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk of accident! When cleaning the underbody or the in- side of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of cut! After cleaning the brakes could act more slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- dent! In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

CAUTION Before washing the vehicle in an auto- matic car wash, please make sure to re- tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de- ployed electrically! Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job! Do not use sponges, abrasive household sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Risk of damaging the surface! Vehicle parts with matte paint: Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface! Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam- age the appearance of matte paint.

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts with matte paint, as removing them may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment The car should only be washed in special wash bays. These places are prepared to prevent oily water from getting into the public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc- tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual components of the vehicle can be checked in the following tables. The contents should be understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have

371

Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed. Take he general considerations into account in Take special care with... on page 375.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol- vent-free cleaning product Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning prod- uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spray with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasion dust

Acid-free special cleaning product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steel cleaning product is re- quired

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flaws Check the paint's colour code in an authorised service and re- store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust tank

Apply rust remover and then apply hard wax. Go you your specialised workshop if you have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work- shop take care of this

The water does not create drop- lets on the clean paint

Maintain with hard wax (at least 2 times a year)

No shine de- spite sober main- tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap- ply paint preservative after- wards if the wax used does not contain preservative ingredi- ents

Tanks, e.g. insect remains, bird droppings, tree sap, road salt

Immediately soften with water and remove with a microfibre cloth

Fat-based dirt, e.g. cosmetic products or sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu- tral soap solutiona) and a soft cloth

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain- ted parts page 370

372

Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- sible solvent-free plastic clean- er

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al- lowed to dry before retracting

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirt stuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral soap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make- up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona). Absorb the dissolved grease and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you must treat it with water after- wards

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry with an absorbent cloth, if applica- ble, apply neutral soap solution afterwardsa)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solutiona)

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth Dry stains: stain remover suita- ble for leather

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make- up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth and suitable stain remover for leather Dry stains: grease solvent spray

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable for leather

373

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu- larly to protect from sunlight. Use a colour preservative if re- quired

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge. Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive products. If the protective coating on the paint of the rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, scratches, etc., the damage should be re- paired immediately.

Camera lenses Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of cracking the lens! To clean the camera lens, never use abra- sive cleaning products or products with alco- hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows Remove snow and ice from windows and exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To avoid scratches, the scraper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to and fro. Never remove snow or ice from windows and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. Risk of cracks on the windows! To prevent damage to the heating of the rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements.

Covers/trims Do not use cleaning products or chrome based cleaning agents.

Paint The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust before applying wax or care products. Risk of scratches! Do not apply wax or care products if the vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job!

The ambient rust deposits must not be re- moved through friction. Risk of damaging the paint job! Remove cosmetic products and sunlight immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel The screens, the instrument panel and the trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of scratches! Make sure that the instrument panel is switched off and cooled down before clean- ing. Make sure that no liquid leaks between the instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- age!

Control panels Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Seat belts and their components must nev- er be cleaned with chemical products, nor should they be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- jects. Risk of damaging the fabric! If you find any damage to the belt webbing, belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, ask your specialised workshop to replace the belt in question.

374

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- er Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara leather with leather cleaning products, sol- vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar products. If the stain is very hard to remove, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it removed there. This will prevent damage. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the seats. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ets or belts can damage the surface. Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed.

Natural leather Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on leather. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ets or belts can damage the surface. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the seats. Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to cover the leather.

WARNING Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such as humid weather, darkness or when the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat- ings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make noise.

Note Remains of insects can be removed much more easily with previously treated paint. Regular car care treatments can prevent deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary for a long period of time, contact a qualified workshop. They will gladly inform you about the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding the vehicle's battery page 353.

Accessories and modifi- cations to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts and repair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for advice before purchasing accessories and replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand- ard of active and passive safety. For this rea- son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi- cial Service for advice before fitting accesso- ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official Service has the latest information from the manufacturer and can recommend accesso- ries and replacement parts which are suita- ble for your requirements. They can also an- swer any questions you might have regarding official regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces- sories and Genuine SEAT parts. SEAT has tested these parts and accessories for suita- bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that the parts are installed correctly and professionally.

375

Maintenance

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven, such as a cruise control system or electronically-controlled suspension, must be approved for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit- ted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in the European Union).

WARNING Accessories, for example telephone hold- ers or cup holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or within the working range of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components, software, wiring or data transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work per- formed incorrectly.

We therefore recommend that all work should be performed by a SEAT Official Service us- ing genuine SEAT parts.

WARNING Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip- ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation) Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT generally authorises in-vehicle installations of approved types of radio transmitters provi- ded that:

The antenna is installed correctly. The aerial is installed on the exterior of the vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). The effective transmitting power does not exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- shop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters Commercial mobile telephones or radio equipment might interfere with the electron- ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to:

No external aerial. External aerial incorrectly installed. Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed exter- nal aerial .

Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.

Business equipment Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- ded the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's immediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the mark. Any retrofit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type approval for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.

WARNING Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without

376

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

a properly installed external aerial can create excessive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.

Note The posterior fitting of electric and elec- tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its licence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances. Please use the mobile telephone/radio operating instructions.

377

Information for the user

Information for the user

Information for the user

Information stored by the control units

Storage of accident data (Event Data Recorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR).

The EDRs function is to record data in the event of a mild or serious accident. These da- ta are used to support the analysis of how dif- ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- ing data and data from the restraint systems, such as:

How different vehicle systems worked. Whether the driver and the occupants were wearing their seat belts. How hard the acceleration or brake pedal was pressed. Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also recorded. This includes data such as whether the systems were inactive or active and if such action had an impact on the vehicles dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the aforementioned situations, accelerating or decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- cludes data from systems such as:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist). Park Pilot system Parking aid system (Park Assist). Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specific accident situations. No data are recorded in normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- ces are personal data such as name, age, or gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate the contents of the EDR data to other data sources and create a personal reference in the context of an accident inves- tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary to access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (On-Board-Diagnose) inter- face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless the owner (or, in Leasing cases, the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex- ceptions to this, depending on legal or con- tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle system quality. Any data used for the purpo- ses of research will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufac- ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re- cycling Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling. Modular construction to facilitate disman- tling. Increased use of single-grade materials.

378

Information for the user

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.

Choice of materials Use of recycled materials. Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated. Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources. Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials. Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities. Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- cle transport. Use of solvent-free adhesives. Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- tems. Recycling and energy recovery from resi- dues (RDF). Improvement in the quality of waste water.

Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.). The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electron- ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must be marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not be discarded as home waste but through selec- tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di- rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara- tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with Directive 2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you to associate the name of the device in the dec- laration of compliance with the features of the vehicle and the terminology used in the on-board documentation.

Features of the vehicle

Name of the device according to the dec- laration of compli- ance

Radiofrequency re- mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477, FS94

Radio frequency re- mote control (auxili- ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT - 50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

379

Information for the user

Features of the vehicle

Name of the device according to the dec- laration of compli- ance

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys- tem

MQB-B B

Radar sensors for as- sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex- ternal antenna of the car

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

LTE-MBC-EU

Features of the vehicle

Name of the device according to the dec- laration of compli- ance

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated in dashboard module instrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Big family

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG 720166002

8S7.035.503.B

Features of the vehicle

Name of the device according to the dec- laration of compli- ance

Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225 6F9.035.225 3V5.035.577.A 7N0.035.552.J 7N0.035.552.K 7N0.035.552.Q 5F4.035.225 5F4.035.225.A 5F4.035.225.B 5F9.035.225 5F9.035.225.A 5F9.035.225.B 575,035,225 575.035.225.A 575.035.225.B 5FJ.035.225 5FJ.035.225.A 5FJ.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all relevant components must include the ad- dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo- nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is legally required:

380

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipment fitted in the vehicle

Addresses of the manufacturers

Radiofrequency remote control key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co. Rixbecker Strae 75 59552 Lippstadt, GERMANY

Radio frequency re- mote control (auxiliary heater)

Digades gmbH uere Weberstrae 20 02763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE Friedrichshafener Str. 9 82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radioelectrical equipment fitted in the vehicle

Addresses of the manufacturers

Radar sensors for as- sistance systems

ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH Peter-Dornier-Strae 10 88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbH Postfach 16 61 71226 Leonberg, GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models 433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 W

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / 6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

Auxiliary heating 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

381

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Bluethooth 2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambra and Tarraco

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

Tarraco

LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for assistance systems 76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

382

Indications about the technical data

Technical data

Indications about the technical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical data may differ depending on optional equipment or version of the model, as well as in the case of special vehicles and equipment for certain countries.

The information in the official vehicle docu- mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die- sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle ID number The vehicle ID number can be found in the following places:

In the infotainment system using button > SETTINGS > Service > Vehicle ID num- ber. One the vehicle's data label. In front, under the windscreen. To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plate The type plate is located on the vehicles right hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised by certified EU laboratories, according to the legislation in force at the time (for more infor- mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: Eu- ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- pend on the equipment/features of each indi- vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environ- mental conditions, load or number of passen- gers.

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and die- sel engines

Vehicles with front-wheel drive: 50 l, 7 l reserve

Vehicles with four-wheel drive: 55 l, 8.5 l reserve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- tainer

Versions without headlight washer system

approx. 3 litres

Versions with headlight washer system

approx. 5 litres

383

Technical data

Weights

Load on the roof The maximum authorised roof load for your vehicle is 75 kg.

Empty weight, total weight, axle loads The empty weight of the vehicle with driver (75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU) 1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can increase the empty weight, which means that the possible useful load decreases propor- tionally.

Trailer weight The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball head of the towing bracket is 88 kg.

WARNING The values indicated for the maximum per- mitted weights must not be exceeded. There is a risk of accident and damage!

384

Indications about the technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 1.0 TSI Start-Stop 1.4 EcoTSI Start-Stop 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/5,000-5,500 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 140 (190)/4,200-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2,000-3,500 250/1,500-3,500 250/1,500-3,500 320/1,500-4,100

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 4/1,395 4/1498 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG DSG 4Drive manual DSG DSG 4Drive DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 181 (5) 198 (6) 189 (5) 201 (5) 198 (6) 189 (5) 212 (5)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 8.6 8.9 8.5 8.6 9.2 7.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,860 1,920 2,010 1,900 1,920 2,050 2,080

385

Technical data

Diesel engines 1.6 TDI CR Start- Stop 2.0 TDI 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop 2.0 TDI CR Start-

Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/3,250-4,000 105 (143)/3,500-4,000 110 (150)/3,500-4,000 140 (190)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,250 320/1,750-3,000 340/1,750-3,000 400/1,750-3,250

No. of cylinders/displace- ment (cm3) 4/1,598 4/1,968 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG DSG manual 4Drive DSG DSG 4Drive DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 184 (5) 184 (6) 192 (5) 200 (5) 196 (6) 200 (6) 196 (6) 212 (6)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.5 11.5 9.2 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 7.6

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,970 1,990 1,970 1,990 2,120 2,010 2,120 2,130

386

Indications about the technical data

Dimensions.

Fig. 323 Dimensions.

Fig. 324 Angles and ground clearance

387

Technical data

Fig. 323, Fig. 324 ATECA ATECA 4Drive

A Front projection (mm) 868 868

B Rear projection (mm) 857 865

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,638 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,363

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,576 1,572

F Backa) track (mm) 1,541 1,544

G Width (mm) 1,841

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,601b)

1,615c) 1,611b)

1,625c)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 176 189

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.4 maximum 20.6

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 27.9 maximum 25.5

Turning radius (m) 10.8

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. b) Distance to the roof. c) Dimension to the roof bars.

388

Index

Index Numbers and Symbols 4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

A ABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 function to prevent overtaking on the right . 283 indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

AdBlue control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Additional heating see Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Adjust front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Air conditioning Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 182 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Anti-trap function

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 App

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 181 Aspects to think about before starting the ve-

hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 305 Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-

sistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 273 hill descent control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 peripheral view system (Top View Camera) .319 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 78 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

389

Index

traffic jam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Audible warning

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . 300 Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 118 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 emergency release of the selector lever. . . 259 ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 255 tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 255 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 electricity consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 radio-operated remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 161 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

B Backrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 147 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

change on the remote control (independ- ent heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Bicycle carrier

fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . 334 max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291, 292

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 293 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Blown bulbs change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Bluetooth connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 346 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 BSD

see blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 BSD Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

C Camera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Capacities AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Care see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

390

Index

Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 tail light bulb in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 tail light bulb in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Childproof locks

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Child seats

group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36

Cleaning the vehicle high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 370 special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Climate control auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Clocks

set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Communication between the Infotainment

System and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Connectors

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 303 audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 303 fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 342 press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 278 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 336 remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 159 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Controls and displays overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

391

Index

Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

D DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

see: RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Deactivation of cylinders

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 72 Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Delayed shutdown (Infotainment system) . . . . 167 Diesel

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Display of road signs on the instrument panel activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Disposal seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Distance control see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 267 with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 209

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

E E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 248 Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Emergencies

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 see Emergency Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Emergency braking assist system

indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

392

Index

system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Emergency opening

driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Emergency operation front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Emissions control system AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Engine

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 start (driver instructions with the mechani-

cal contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Engine and ignition

automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 245 emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 246 switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 346 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Engine failure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Engine oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 349 checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 347

Engine oil pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Environment ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Environmental tip refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 ESC

electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 301 multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

F Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Filling capacities

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 122

393

Index

Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Frequency band AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Front Assist

see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 273 Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Front fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Fuel

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Fuel consumption inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 341

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Fuel tank cap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Fuel tank flap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55 preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

G GALA (speed-dependent volume) . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Gear change

engage the gears (manual change) . . . . . . 252 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

H Handbrake

see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 HDC

see Hill descent control (HDC). . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 17 Head-protection airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Headlights change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 134 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Hill descent control (HDC).

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

I Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Bluetooth audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 CD or DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 change the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 DVD settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 FM, AM, DAB settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

394

Index

images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Media settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 navigation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 rotary/push buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 scroll button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 scroll (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 search on lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . . 191 share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 sound distribution (Balance and Fader) . . . . 173 station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 voice control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 volume and sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Infotainment system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 367 Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 74 menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 85 use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72 Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Interferences caused by mobile phones . . . . . 167 Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

K Keyless Access

Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 100

Keyless Access lock and ignition system: see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Keyless Entry see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Keyless Exit see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Keys assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 instructions for the driver (mechanical con-

tact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 107 vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 395

Index

Kick-down automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

L Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . . 257 Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Leaving a parking space with the parking as-

sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . 122 headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Loading the luggage compartment fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 136 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 142

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Lock and unlock in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 136 electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 features of the electric rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 opening and closing controlled by sensors

(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . 139

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Luggage compartment shelf storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

M Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Malfunctions

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 305 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Media

changing track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 playback modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 playback order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 requirements for data media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 select track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 switching the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 unreadable CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

MEDIA settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

396

Index

Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Mirrors

adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Multifunction steering wheel

with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

N Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 import vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 offroad navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 selecting the destination on the map . . . . . . 215 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 special destinations (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 traffic bulletins (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 updating the installing navigation data . . . . 213

Net bag luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Net for luggage luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Noise adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358, 362

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

O Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Offroad Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 rear lid with electric opening and closing . . 109

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Operating fault automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Operation in winter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

P Painting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Panoramic sliding sunroof

see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Park Assist

see the assisted parking system (Park As- sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 with the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Parking aid

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316, 318 parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

397

Index

rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 see the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 317 surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 318

Parking aid system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 313, 317

Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 310 leaving a parking space (only when paral-

lel parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Parking brake automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Parking distance warning system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 313, 317

Parking (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 313, 317 Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 14 Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . . 319

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Power socket 12 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Power sockets trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Power steering see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Preheating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Properties of oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

R Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 279 Radio

frequency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 indications and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 save station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

RADIO additional DAB services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 additional DAB stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 DAB memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 DAB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 DAB radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 DAB slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 DAB station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 DAB transmission standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 indication of station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . . 191 set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 station tracking by RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 tracking of DAB stations on FM . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Radio-operated remote control see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 291 RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

automatic station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 RDS Regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . 291, 295 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

398

Index

Rear fog light control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 112 see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 109

Rear mounting towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Recognition of road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . . 159

changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70, 81 Road signs

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Rotary/push knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

S Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Safety instructions

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Save fuel inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 21 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

data transmission and control functions . . . 184 Seats

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 folding down and raising the rear seat

backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

399

Index

Selector lever (automatic gearbox) emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Service Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Service Menu

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 255 Side airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Special characteristics AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 332 peripheral view system (Top View Cam-

era) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51 tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 volume reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 SSD

see Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 249 the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Station

set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 72 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 253 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 76

Steering control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Steering wheel

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 255

400

Index

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Storage compartment accessories see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Storing objects

bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 142

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Sunshade blind anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Switch hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

T Tail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Tail lights on the bodywork

remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Tail lights on the rear lid

remove the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Telephone

Bluetooth profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 favourites (quick access to the phone

book) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 short messages (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Temperature indicator exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Time adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 80

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 253, 255 To change the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 To park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36 Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36 Top View Camera

see the Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Torque wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Towable loads loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 329 Tow hook

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Towing device fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 332

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51 four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51 rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51 tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

401

Index

towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 situations where it has to be disconnected . 289

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 329 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316, 318 power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 329 technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 329 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . . 332 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 325, 330

Trailer mode see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . . 142

Trips abroad headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Tyre monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Tyre pressure loss indicator

tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Tyres

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

U Unlock and lock

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 connecting external data media . . . . . . . . . . 204 error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . 139 Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 100 vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Vehicle battery assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 353 electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Vehicle care wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

402

Index

Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Voice control

available languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

W Warning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 370 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 370 sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 362

anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Wheels change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 44 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Wheel trim remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Window washer window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 157 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Winter conditions sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Wiper and rear window wiper blades cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Wiper blades cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

connect external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

X XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Other Characters (TP) Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

403

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.19

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Ateca Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Ateca 2019 v2 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Ateca as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Ateca. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Ateca 2019 v2 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Ateca 2019 v2 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Ateca 2019 v2 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Ateca 2019 v2 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Ateca 2019 v2 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.